^ ■>. sm '/ m r ^>. :>5 IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) 1.0 1^ 1^ ■tt Ui 12.2 I.I 1.25 KlUU m 1.4 II 1.6 Photographic Sciences Corporation 4r 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 (716) 872-4503 wnjnaiiiiiaiifiM 4r «' I CIHM/ICMH Microfiche Series. CIHM/ICIViH Collection de microfiches. 'jjf Canadian Institute for Historical MIcroreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques Technical and Bibliographic iMotes/Notes techniques et bibliographiques The Institute has attempted to obtain the best original copy available for filming. Features of this copy which may be bibliographically unique, which may alter any of the images in the reproduction, or which may significantly change the usual method of filming, are checked below. H Coloured covers/ Couverture de couleur I I Covers damaged/ Couverture endommag6e Covers restored and/or laminated/ Couverture restaurde et/ou pellicul^e Cover title missing/ Le titre de couverture manque Coloured maps/ Cartes gdographiques en couleur Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/ Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire) Coloured plates and/or illustrations/ Planches et/ou illustrations en couleur Bound with other material/ Rell6 avec d'autres documents : D D Tight binding may cause shadows or distortion along interior margin/ La re liure sarrde peut causer de I'ombre ou de la distortion le long de la marge int6rieure Blank leaves added during restoration may appear within the text. Whenever possible, these have been omitted from filming/ II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajoutdes lors d'une restauration upparaissent dans le texte, mais, lorsque cela 6tait possible, ces pages n'ont pas 6t6 filmdes. J3 Additional comments:/ Commentaires suppl^mentaires L'Institut a microfilm^ le meilleur exemplaire qu'il lui a 6t6 possible de se procurer. Les details de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-dtre uniques du point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une modification dans la mdthode normale de filmage sont indiquto ci-dessous. D D D D D D □ n D D This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ Ce document est film6 au taux de reduction indlqu6 ci-dessous. 10X 14X 18X 22X Coloured pages/ Pages de couleur Pages damaged/ Pages endommagdes Pages restored and/or laminated/ Pages restaurdes et/ou pellicuides Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ Pages d6color6es, tachetdes ou piqu^es Pages detached/ Pages d6tach6es Showthrough/ Transparence Quality of print varies/ Quality indgale de I'impression Includes supplementary material/ Comprend du materiel suppl^mentaire Only edition available/ Seule Edition disponlble ^ Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata slips, tissues, etc., have been refilmed to ensure the best possible image/ Les pages totalement ou partiellement obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata, une pelure, etc., ont M filmdes d nouveau de fa^on & obtenir la meilleure image possible. 26X 12X 16X 20X 24X 30X 28X 32X ails du tdifier une lage ^ ata »iure. 1 2X ir The copy filmed here has been reproduced thanks to the generosity of: Library of Congress Photoduplication Service The images appearing here are the best quality possible considering the condition and legibility of the original copy and in Iceeping with the filming contract specifications. Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed beginning with the front cover and ending on the last page with a printed or illustrated impres- sion, or the back cover when appropriate. All other original copies are filmed beginning on the first page with a printed or illustrated impres- sion, and ending on the last page with a printed or illustrated impression. The last recorded frame on each microfiche shall contain the symbol -^ (meaning "CON- TINUED"), or the symbol y (meaning "END"), whichever applies. IVIaps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at different reduction ratios. Those too large to be entirely included in one exposure are filmed beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to right and top to bottom, as many frames as required. The following diagrams illustrata the method: 1 2 3 L'exemplaire film6 fut reproduit grdce d la g6n6rosit6 de: Library of Congress Photoduplication Service Les images suivantes ont 6t6 reproduites avec le plus grand soin. compte tenu de la condition et de la nettetd de l'exemplaire fiimd, et en conformity avec les conditions du contrat de filmage. Les exemplaires originaux dont la couverture en papier est imprimde sont filmds en commengant par le premier plat et en terminant soit par la dernidre page qui comporte une empreinte d'impression ou d'illustration, soit par le second plat, salon le cas. Tous les autres exemplaires originaux sont fiim^s en commenpant par la premidre page qui comporte une empreinte d'impression ou d'illustration et en terminant par la 'lernidre page qui comporte une telle empreinte. Un des symboies suivants apparaitra sur la dernidre image de cheque microfiche, selon le cas: le symbols -^ signifie "A SUIVRE", le symbols V signifie "FIN". Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc.. peuvent dtre film6s d des taux de reduction diffdrents. Lorsque le document est trop grand pour dtre reproduit en un seul clich6. il est film6 d partir de Tangle sup6rieur gauche, de gauche d droite, et de haut en bas, en prenant le nombre d'images ndcessaire. Les diagrammes suivants illustrent la mdthode. 1 2 3 4 5 6 No. 99. SAILING DIRECTIONS FOR Nova Scotia, Bay of Fundy, and South Shore OF Gulf of St. Lawrence. Compiled by E. H. ORE, U. 8. Hydrographio Office. I. By direction of Lieut. Commanixer RICHAEDSON CLOVEE, U. 8. N., Hydrographer. mi*'^ WASHINGTON: QOVBBNMBNT PRINTING OFPICB. 1891. I 1 -rfaXJ* iH'P w1 r i r ] o ■ 1^' vr 1 yjl I? 4 •TTwntr ii— >!■■ w " fc'-^»y ■ CONTENTS. Preface v Note VI Index Chart viu CHAPTER I. Qeneral Remarks— Newfoundland and Nora Scotia Banks, Sable Island, Car- rents, etc 1 CHAPTER II. Bay of Fnndy, North Shore, Meridian Point, Maine, to and inclnding Cnni- berland Basin 1& CHAPTER III. Bay of Fandy , South Shore, Bartiugton Bay to Basin of Mines T)! CHAPTER IV. Nova Scotia, Southeast Coast, Port Latour to Sambro Harbor 78 CHAPTER V. Nora Scotia, Southeast Coast, Sambro Harbor to Cape Canso..... Ill CHAPTER VI. Chedabncto Bay, Lennox Passage, Gut of Canso and St. Geor^o I: ^ 157 CHAPTER VII. Northumberland Strait, Cape St. George to Miramiohi Bay 191 CHAPTER VIII. Prince Edward Island and Northumberland Strait 21& ADDENDA. List of :M Uv .»> IHrimion of tti.iH CimMtniitiunGWlxahPutUui. Animltinl in fh„n/f. DEX TO H. O. CHARTS i TO IN PUBLICATIONS NOa99ANDIOO 'A TATREN CE ?^Lr:?"i' -iwi I l> w » w . 1;^ ».y>rtwit JNyrwut (g- JL^^onutZ amd r.iV«*-,f5H?'-*' ■ LIST OF HARBOR AND SPECIAL CHARTS. Title, I- THE BANKS OF NEWFOUNDLAND, NOVA SCOTIA, AND THE GULF OF MAINE. The Great Bankd of Newfoundland, with the adjacent coast from Cape Bona vista to Cape St. Mary Virgin Rocks and Eastern Shoals Capo St. Mary and the Miquelon Islands to Halifax, with off-lying hanks, inclnding Green, St. Pierre, Artimon, Misaine, Canso, Sable I, and Sam- bro banks, the Middle Gronnd and Banquereau , Halifax to New York, with Roseway, La Have, Brown, and Georges banks, Cashes Ledge, Nantucket Shoals, and the inshore banks Number of charts. GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE AND ADJACENT COASTS AND ISLANDS. River and Gulf of St. Lawrence, Nova Scotia, and adjacent banks, with plans of Georges Shoals and Gut of Canso, Chedabuctou Bay, etc Gulf of St. Lawrence Magdalen Islands, Gulf of St. Lawrence Amherst and Grand Entry harbors, Magdalen Islands GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE— NORTH AND WEST COASTS. Newfoundland; northern half West coast of Nevfoaudland from St. Genevieve Bay to Bonne Bay, and south coast of Quebec from Strait of Belle Isle to Cape MacKinnon South coact of Quebec, Washtawooka Bay to Cape MacKinnon , Anticosti Island and adjacent coast of Qnebeo , Anticosti Island to Point de Monts River St. Lawrence; Point de Monts to Saguenay River River St. Lawrence ; Saguenay River to Quebec , Quebec Harbor , Bay ofCbalenrsaud adjacent coasts. New Brunswick '.!.. Ga8p6 Harbor, Gulf of St. Lawrence, coast of Now Brunswick Caraquette, Shippegan, and Miscou harbors, Bav of Chaleurs , Mirauiichi Bay, New Brunswick .' , PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND AND ADJACENT COASTS AND NEW BRUNSWICK AND NOVA SCOTIA. Prince Edward Island and adjacent coast, inluding Northumberland Strait and northern approaches to the Gut of Canso Shediac Buy and Harbor, New Brunswick Pugwash Harbor, Nova Scotia Wallace Harbor, Nova Scotia Amet Sound and Anchorages, Nova Scotia Caribou Harbor, Nova Scotia Piotou Harbor, Nova Scotia, plan of entrance and bar Merigouiish Harbor, Nova Scotia Pomquet Harbor and Road and Tracadie and Little Tracadie harbors. Nova Scotia _. VII 980 863 198 941 16 1013 1092 1107 581a 1105 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1207 1067 1167 1217 1179 1066 1081 1094 1151 1098 1140 1076 1099 1148 ■ •,-,-,-, VIII LIST OP HARBOR AND SPECIAL CHARTS. Title. I'lUNCE KDWARD ISLAND. Prince Edward Islaud and adjacent coast, including Northumberland Strait and the Northern Approaclies to the Gut of Canso Bedeqne Harbor, including Sumineraide Harbor Crapaud Harbor !.'."!.'." Hillsborough Bajaud Charlottetown Harbor ....—...'. Murray Harbor ........'.'.'.'.'. Cardigan Hay, with Cardigan, Montague, and Brudenellrive'rs.Panmure Island, and Georgetown Harbor ' Number of charts. 1 CAPK BRRTON ISLAND AND ADJACENT COAST. Cape Breton Islaud. Plan of St. Paul Island Port Hood, Cape Breton Island Great and Little Bras d'Or lakes. Cape Breton Island ..'.....' Saint Anne Harbor and Great Bias d'Or, Cape Breton Island. . Sydney Harbor, Cape Breton Island Scatari Island and Meuadou Passage, Cape Breton Island.".".. ! Louisburg Harbor, Cape Breton Island Gut of Canso with its southern approaches and Chedabuctou Bay Gut of Canso and Chedabuctou Bay. (See plan on H. O. 15) Madame Island and Lenox Passage Guysborough Harbor, Chedabuctou Bay. NOVA SCOTIA— EAST COAST. Sanibro Island to Cape Canso; Sheet II Canso Harbor and Approaches, including Glasgow Harbor and" 'Andrew Island and Passage Whitehaven, Nova Scotia !."!!.!.!!! !^i*!!' Country Harbor, Nova Scotia ...'.'.'."'.'.......... Nicomtau Bay, with adjacent coast and islands, Nova Scotia!!."J.. ...!!*! Sheet Harbor and adjacent anchorages, including Mushaboon, Spry, and Pope harbors, and Taylor, Spry, and Tomlees bays Beaver Harbor, Nova Scotia '"\ Ship Harbor, Nova Scotia, and adjacent anchorages ...'.'.'.'..'.'."..'.. Halifax to New York, with Roseway, La Have, Brown, and Georges banks'," Cashes Ledge, Nantucket Shoals, and inshore banks Halifax Harbor, Nova Scotia Capo Sable to Sanibro Island; Sheet I ...........'.'.'.." Port Mouton and Liverpool bays. Nova Scotia il""..^!!! "" UAY OF FUNDY. Bay of Fundy, southern part Grand Manan Island and adjacent coast, flay of Fundy ...'.'.'..'.'..'.'.'.'.'.'.". Passaraaquoddy Bay and Approaches .'.'."....!..'. L'litang Harbor and Approaches, with adjacent harbors and "anchorages", including Bliss Harbor, Petite Harbor, etc Port St. Andrews, Passaniaquoddy Bay ...'. Bay of Fundy, northern part. Plan of Avon River ..........'.'.'... ...'.'..'.'. St, John, Now Brunswick, enlarged plan of entrance to harbor '.'.'.'.. UNITED STATES— EAST COAST. Passainaquoddy Bay and Approaches, including Lepreau Bay, Beaver Harbor, L'Etang Harbor, Quoddy Roads, Cobscook Bay, Friar Roads, St. Andrew Harbor, and the St. Croix River to Calais and St. Stephens.. 10t)6 1080 1095 10b8 1150 1077 611 1079 1237 1134 1061 1097 155 1236 15 1279 1075 525 1074 1124 1116 1139 1173 1069 1135 941 147 524 1106 610 1057 1247 1054 1051 609 149 1247 1" 1066 1080 1095 1068 1150 1077 611 1079 1237 1134 lOtil 1097 155 12:16 15 1272 1075 525 1074 1124 1116 1139 1173 1069 1135 941 147 524 1106 610 1057 1247 1054 1051 609 149 ct CHAPTER!. GENERAL REMARKS — NEWFOUNDLAND AND NOVA SCOTIA BANKS. The province of New Brunswick, which forms the northern shore of the Bay of Fundy, limits the Gulf of St. Lawrence on the west and the St. Lawrence Kiver on the south, and has a coast line of about 500 miles, which is only interrupted by the low isthmus which joins it with Nova Scotia. New Brunswick was first settled by the French in 1639, and it con- tinued, in connection with Nova Scotia, to form part of Acadia, or New France, till it fell into the hands of the British after the capture of Quebec in 1769 ; it was formally ratified as an English possession in 1763, and from that period was annexed to Nova Scotia until 1785, when it became a separate colony. Id 1881 the population of New Brunswick amounted to 321,233. The general surface of this province is broken by a series of bold undulations, which do not, however, rise into mountains, and is trav- ersed by many rivers, the principal of which is that of St. John, which flows into the well-known harbor of the same name. Coal is found in great abundance, and iron ore and gypsum, as well as other minerals, are also to be found in considerable quantities. A great portion of the country is covered by dense forests, and the cut- ting and exporting of timber aifords remunerative employment to a large number of the inhabitants. Shipbuilding is carried on to a con- siderable extent throughout the province, but chiefly at St. John. Nova Scotia, a province of British North America, is an extensive peninsula varying in breadth from 50 to 100 miles, and connected with the continent by an isthmus only 8 miles in width, having the Bay of Fundy on the one side and Northumberland Strait on the other. It lies between latitude 43° and 46° N., and longitude 61° and 67° W. ; and is bounded on the north by Northumberland Strait, which separates it from Prince Edward Islapd ; NE. by the Gut of Oanso, lying between it and Cape Breton Island (now a county of Nova Scotia) ; south and SE. by the Atlantic Ocean ; west by the Bay of Fundy, and NW. by New Brunswick. The soils of Nova Scotia are various along the south shore; the granite forms the basis, extending in many places 20 miles into the interior. This region is the least fertile, and being that which strangers first see is apt to create an unfavorable impression ; but there are else- 5314 1 . 1 i. 4 GENERAL REMARKS. where exteusive alluvial tracts, producitig the most abumlaut crops. The forests also abound in good timber, the ash, beech, birch, maple, oak, pine, and spruce being the most common trees indigenous to the country. The population of Nova Scotia is about 500,000. Caution.— In the following pages will be found the latest informa- tion respecting the approaches to, as well as the appearance of, the SE. coast of Nova Scotia, tliough it must be borne in mind that peculiar and distinctive features are not easily recognizable in the usual misty weather from distances at which, inconsequence of numer- ous outlying dangers, it would be prudent for a vessel uncertain of her position to be kept from the laud. Climate. — The extremes of temperature during the year vary from 60 to 80 (F.) below zero, to 80o above it ; the average of the coldest month being about 20o, and that of the hottest about 70°. The sever- ity of winter seldom sets in until the close of December; frost gener- ally continues from Christmas to April, being followed by a spring of short duration. The cold weather is usUciily dry, and the summer beat regular and temperate; the autumn is, however, the most eiyoyable season. The comparatively mild climate enjoyed by Nova Scotia seems to be attributable in some degree to the indueuce of the Gulf Stream, which prevents the harbors of the Atlantic from being frozen during the win- ter like those on the northern shore of the province. The climate of New Brunswick is similar to that of Nova Scotia, be- ing subject to extremes of heat and cold. The winter lasts from Novem- ber to April, the severest cold beingexperienced between the third weeks of December and March. The prevailing summer winds vary from south to WSW., when dense fogs are often produced on the shores of the Bay of Fuudy, and extend 15 to 20 miles inland. Winds.— The prevailing winds in the Bay of Fundy during the sum- mer are from south to SW., and in autumn from north to NE., generally strong. Winds from south to SW. generally bring fogs, from west to north, dry clear weather ; winds from NE. to SE. are generally accom- panied by rain ; southerly winds veer to the west, NW., and north. Fogs.— The fogs frequently give but little warning, and generally fol. low southerly or southwesterly winds, which bring with them heat and moisture from the Gulf Stream ; they chiefly prevail during the months of July and Augast, and hang principally on the coast between Cape Sable and Bryer Island and the vicinity of Grand Manan Island. On the Nova Sciotia coast eastward of Bryer Island the fog generally dears for a short distance ott shore when the wind is to the southward of S W., and on proceeding to the eastward the belt of clear increases in breadth. On the New Brunswick shore the fog generally clears with the wind to the ^irestward of WNW. Smokes. — During the summer mouths the haze occasioned by the smoke from burning forests in the neighboring State of Maine is almost 1 I I T i T CLIMATE WINDS — TIDES. —-' ^ as bad as a fog, being frequently of suflBcieut density to obscure lights at night when only a short distance from them. Fogs, Winds, and Barometer on the SE. Coast of Nova Scotia- Fogs are i)revalent all the year round, but during the spring and sum- mer months dense fogs or rain almost always accompany all winds from the sea, from ENE. around by south to WSW. In winter the rain is frequently replaced by snow. Dui'ing the autumnal and winter months winds from between north and west become more frequent, and, being ofl" the land, are always accompanied by clear weather. Strong gales of wind do not often occur in May, June, or July ; but afler the middle of August they are often of great strength, and it then becomes essential to attend carefully to the indications of the barome- ter. Strong winds from east, round by south, to WSW., are always accompanied by a falling barometer; when, therefore, these winds be- gin to abate, and the barometer at the same time cep jes to fall, a change of wind, more or less sudden, to the opposite direction may be expected, with a rising barometer and fine weather ; if it be winter the change will probably be accompanied by intense frost, coating the vessel, sails and rigging with ice. Again, a high barometer, stationary or beginning to fall, indicates that a SE. or SW. wind, with accompanying rain and fog, is not far dis- tant; and if, at the same time, there be a bank of clouds rising abovfj the northwestern horizon, the indication is certiiin. Caution. — It is essential to the safety of vessels to attend to thene indications, for to the neglect of such precautious, more especially of the deep-sea lead, no less than to the fogs and irregular currents, the ship- wrecks on Sable Island and the SE. coast of Xova Scotia are attribu- table. All this portion of the sea, from the eastern limit of the bank of Newfoundland, past Cape Race to Halifax, as well as to Portland, Bos- ton, or other harbors of the coast of the United States, is within sound- ings, and therefore during foggy weather, or when in doubt respecting the ship's position, frequent soundings are absolutely necessary,. Another important point to which due attention should be paid is, that in approaching the coast of Nova Scotia the variation of the com- pass changes rapidly, and, if not allowed for, might easily run a vessel into danger. Tides. — The tidal currents along the shores of the Bay of Fundy are uncertain both in velocity and direction, and in navigating the bay extreme caution is necessary when within tidal intluences, whose veloc- ities have been known to vary from one to 8 miles an hour. Gapt. B. v. Hamilton remarks that off the Tusket Islands, the tides are strong and eddying, and that H. M. S. Sphinx, though steaming at the rate of 7 knots an hour, was whirled almost completely round against the helm. The same authority states that the offlng tides are likely to mislead, d 4 CURRENTS NEWFOUNDLAND BANKS. and that be was informed by a flsbermaii that the tidal current on Brown bank — olf Cape Sable — occasionally ran to the NE. for 15 hours con- tinuously at the rate of 2 miles an hour (which would account for ves- sels from Boston being so frequently set up the Bsiy of Fuiuly), whilst at other times the set would be as strong to the SW. No reliance, therefore, can be placed either in the rate or direction of the off-shore tides. Currents on the SE. Coast of Nova Scotia. — The irregular cur- rents are said to be one of the principal causes of the frequent wrecks on Sable Island. The main branch of the Labrador Current, after pass- ing along the eastern coast of Newfoundland, turns to the westward, and is joined by another branch of the same current, which, having entered the Gulf of St. Lawrence through the Strait of Belleisle, runs out to the southeastward, between Newfoundland and Cape Breton Island. These currents are rendered inconstant and irregular both in strength and direction, by local and distant winds; but the general tendency is well known to be to the westward, for vessels find no diffi- culty in working to windward in that direction, anywhere to the north- ward ot the Gulf Stream; and hence it is that many of the vessels wrecked on Sable Island were supposed to have been well to the east- ward of its position when they ran on shore. BANKS. G-reat Bank of Newfoundland. — This bank extends nearly 300 miles north and south, between the parallels of 48° and 43° N., and 280 miles east and west, between the meridians of 48° and 65° W. The only dangers whose existence have been verified, are the Virgin Rocks and banks, and the Eastern Bocks. The form of the bank is irregular, but it reaches its most eastern limit in the parallel of the Virgin Rocks. South of this it trends to the south- west, and decreases in depth, so that in the parallel of 44° N. there is only a depth of 22 fathoms, sand. In the parallel of 43° N. and merid- ian of 50° W. the bank falls into deep water, and its 60-fathom edge trends to the NW. The Great Bank is separated from Ballard Bank near Cat)e Race by a channel about 20 miles wide, having from 80 to 100 fathoms, mud ; but its nortliwestern limit has not yet been correctly defined. The general depth of water on the Great Bank varies from 30 to 45 fathoms, and the bottom is usually sand, gravel, or broken shell. Virgin Rocks. — The bank (with depth of 9 to 20 fathoms) on which these rocks are situated, occupies a space 6 miles long in a north and south direction, and one mile broad. The least depth found on the Vir- gin rocks was 3 fathoms, over a small pinnacle, on which the sea breaks in heavy weather; from this pinnacle, two rocks with 4 and 5^ fathoms water over them, lie respectively north, distant nearly 200 yards, and SW. 4 mile distant ; these rocks with surroundiug{shoal ground of less .. I EA8TF.RN SHOALS — BANK 8T. PIERRE. 6 than 20 fathoms, comprised within a diameter of about 1,100 yards, form the Main Ledge. South slioal witli 4;^ fathoms, the least water, is situated south 1} miles from Main Ledge, and occui)ie8 a space 1^00 yards long in a north and south direction, with a breadth of 700 yards, the depths being under 20 fathoms. This shoal is reported by the fishermen to break I'.eavier, and to be more dangerous than the Main Ledge. Main Ledge and South Shoal are the only dangers in ordinary weather, but several other parts on these shoals are reported to break in heavy gales; the foul ground, combined with the tidal stream, causing a confused sea even in strong breezes. Eastern Shoals.— The least water found on these shoals was 7 fath- oms, about J mile south of the Nine-fathom Bank which lies near the center of a group of shoal patches extending about 3J miles in a north and south direction, with a breadth of 2 miles, having depths on them of 13 to 25 fathoms. The Nine-fathom Bank is in latitude 40° 26' 45" N., longitude 50° 28' 6" W. Eastern Shoals are the easternmost known to the fishermen ; those with 13 fathoms or less over them are reported to break in heavy weather; with a strong breeze there is a confused sea in the locality. In the immediate neighborhood of the Virgin and Eastern Rocks the tidal stream attains a velocity of three-quarters of a knot an hour, but a few miles from them it is scarcely perceptible; during the period of examination a slight southerly set was experienced. Oreen Bank, on which the least depth of water is 30 fathoms, stony bottom, is in reality the western extremity of the Great Bank, being only partially separated from it by a gully of deep water, in about longitude 54° W., having over 60 fathoms mud in it. Its western limit is in lon- gitude 55° W,, and its southern margin in latitude 44° 50' N., and the peculiarity of its western limit nearly coinciding with the meridian of 55° W. makes it of service in verifying the longitude. The deep gully between it and Bank St. Pierre is 14 miles wide, with 70 to 90 fathoms mud. A 5-fathoms i)atch in latitude 45° 46' N., longitude 54° 20' W., was reported on Green Bank in 1881. Bank St Pierre has its eastern limit nearly on the meridian of 55° 20' W., and attains its southern boundary in latitude 45° N., longitude 66° W. Tne bank then trends about NW. for about 140 miles to its western margin, in latitude 46° 55' N., longitude 57° 30' W. The soundings on this bank vary from 20 to 45 fathoms, the ordinary bottom being sand and broken shells. Nova Scotia Banks.— Although our acquaintance with the nature and extent of the principaf banks which mark the approaches to Nova Scotia can not yet be deemed perfect, our knowledge of their limits and depth of water has been greatly increased during la' ^ years. Much use- ful information respecting the outer banks was diiias.id by the French (: 6 NOVA SCOTIA BANKS. i cbHTta in 185S; tin* surveys of La Have and Roseway Ranks bv Captain Shorthuul, Royal Navy, in 1859, were satisfactory in every respect; and, later still, the offsbore soundings by Captain Orlei)ar, Royal Navy, in 1804, aro valuable additions to our hitherto scanty knowledge of the inequalities of the various banks which lie off the much-exposed and dangerous coast of Nova Scotia. Of these banks the principal in extent and most important in position are the Banquereau and Sable Banks, the former being the easternmost of what may be correctly tiesignated the Nova Scotia Banks. Banquereau Bank, with 15 to 5U fathoms, is an extensive plateau of sand, gravel, and shells, and is distinguished from contiguous banks by numerous flat sea-eggs without prickles which are found on the bottom. It extends from about latitude 44Jo N., longitude 57 4° W., in a westerly direction 120 miles to the meridian of 60° W. This bank is separated from Bank St. Pierre by a deep gully 50 miles wide, having from UOOto 300 fsithoms muddy bottom; and from the NE. bar of Sable Island by another gully of deep water 12 miles across its narrowest part and 140 fathoms deep. On referring to the chart it will be seen that its shoalest part, with 15 fathoms, in latitude 44° 35' N. and longitude 57° 54' W., is the apex of a ridge (having less than 30 fathoms) upwards of 40 miles in length in a NE. and SW. direction; and that relatively with the dangers off Sable Island it is not only a safe ofling for vessels intending to pass to the northward of the last named danger, but by keeping, if possible, in the same parallel, the long and continuous line of comparatively shoal water, would enable a vessel under ordinary circumstances to feel her way with some degree of confldenco until she has passed to the west- ward of the meridian of Sable Island. Misaine and Canso Banks. — Misaine Bank lies to the northward of Banquereau Bank, between the latter and Scatari Island, and between its NVV. edge, with 60 fathoms, and a similar depth on the outer edge of a bank extending from the shores of Cape Breton Island, there is a deep gully 20 miles wide, with from 70 to 136 fathoms. The least water yet found on this bank is 36 fathoms, the general depth being more than 40 fathoms, with a bottom of stones and broken shells. The outline of the bank is very irregular; its eastern limit is in latitude 45° 25' N., longitude 58° 10' W., and its western extremity is connected with Causo Bank by the 60- fathom line. The least water on Canso Bank is 35 fathoms, sandy bottom ; the bank is separated from the north end of Middle Ground by a space of deep water with 112 fathoms, and from the bank extending from Cape Causo by a narrow deep-water channel with 84 fathoms. Artimon Bank, situated at the east end of the deep-water gully separating Misaine Bank from Ban»iuereau, is of small extent, the least water being 37 fathoms, over a bottom of stones with star fish and sea- eggs. •t MIDDLE GROUND — BROWN BANK. 7 Middle Qround, about 30 miles to tho northward of the west end of Sable Island, has been reported to have as little as 10 fathoms, although 15 fathoms was the least water obtained on examination. The bank is about 35 miles in hMigth NVV. and SB., with depths varying- from 15 to 30 fathoms, and is separated from tho west end of Bautjuereau Bank by a gully 3 miles acToss, with 100 fithoms. Its inner end extends to within 35 miles of Cape Canso, the distance between being occupied principally by a submarine valley, having in one locality a depth of 140 fathoms. If in foggy weather, soundiugs should be struck within the30-fathom line, they will impart contldenee in making the coast of Nova Scotia, as the middle of the bank is in about the same parallel as the entrance of Halifax Harbor. Sambro Banks consist of two banks; the eastern is about 12 miles in length, within the 60-fathom line, and lies SE. 36 miles from the same depth south of Sambro Ledges. The western bank, with 52 fathoms, sand and gravel, is about 4 miles in extent and separate from the eastern bank by a channel 10 miles wide, with 98 to 100 fathoms, stones. These banks are surrounded by deep water, there are other detached patches of less than 60 fathoms in the neighborhood, not yet accurately defined. La Have Bank. — The northeastern shoal plateau of this bank, with from 45 to 50 fathoms, sand and stones, is 32 miles in length north and south by 15 miles broad ; the north end being about east, nearly 60 miles from Baccaro Point. Another bank, with 45 to 50 fathoms, exists to the westward of the south end of the above, from which it is only separated by a shallow gully with 53 fathoms. The 60-fathom boundary of the bank is well defined all round, and includes within its limits Brown Bank, described hereafter. Roseway Bank.— The shoalest part of this bank, with from 31 to 40 fathoms, stones and pebbles, is about 11 miles iu length, and its center is on the same parallel as Cape Sable light-house and the north end of La Have Bank. Between the 60-fathom lines of La Have and Roseway Banks there is a deep channel with from 70 to 100 fatiioms; whilst in- shore, Roseway Bank is connected by a narrow neck, with the 60-fathom line of the bank extending along the coast. Brown Bank, within the 50-f>ithom line, is 55 miles in length, with an average breadth of 15 miles. It lies to the westward of, but con- tiguous to, La Have Bank, and with it forms an almost continuous bank, following the line of coast off Cape Sable at the distance of 50 miles off shore. Near the western extremity of Brown Bank is a sandy rise al)out 10 miles long north and south, with from 24 to 30 fathoms, the center of which lies about 50 miles SW. of Cape Sable. Outside the .50-fathora line of Brown Bank there is a deep-water chan- nel 25 miles wide, separating it from the 60-fathom line at the north- eastern extremity of George Shoal, off the Massachusetts Coast. \^ 8 8ABLK ISLAND. 'if! I IiiHide Brown Bank there is a narrow deep-water clianuel with above GU fathouKs, dividing; it from the same depth ou the ed^eof the shore bank, which follows, about 30 miles ott", the line of coast from Cape Sable to as far as Dryer Island, abreast which the deep water approaches within /> miles of thu shore. There are many inequalities on the main shore bank, off the SNY. coast of Nova Scotia, which it would be useless to describe in detail in these directions, inaannich as they are clem ly delineated ou the chart, by study- ing which the navigator will have a comprehensive idea, not only of the positions of and dei)ths upon the various small patches, but also of the relative positions of the larger banks. Birds. —The approach to the banks is generally evidenced by an in- creasing number of sea fowl around the vessel. Hagdowns, a species of gull, heavy of tlight, are seen all across the Atlantic, but on the banks they beconu' very numerous, as well as divers aud other sea fowl. Fish. — All tho banks off Xewfonndland aud Nova Scotia abound in cod and other tish, and during the summer season a large fleet of Ash- ing vessels are found at anchor upon them. The ordinary track of the mail steam vessels is left open, but north and south of this unoccupied track numerous American, French, and Canadian vessels are employed in the cod fishery, especially on the Great Bank of Newfoundland, Bank St. Pierre, Bauquereau and Green Banks, and Middle Ground. Sable Island is formed of two nearly parallel ridges of sand shaped like a bow, concave to the northward, and meeting in a point at either end. Its whole length, following the curve, and including the dry parts of the bars, is 22 miles, 20^ miles in a direct line across the curve. Its greatest breadth is exactly one mile. In some parts it is wholly or partially covered with grass ; in others, scooped out by the winds into crater-shaped hollows, or thrown up into sand hills, not exceeding the height of 75 feet above high water. Between these ridges a long pond named Salt Water Lake, said to be gradually filling with blown sand, but still in some parts 12 feet deep, extends from the west end to the distance of 11 miles; and a low valley continues from it 6J miles m re to the NE. end of the island. The entrances to this pond have been for some time closed, the sea flowing in over the low sandy beach on the south side, and at the west end only in high tides and heavy gales. When seen from the north from a distance of 9 or 10 miles, the island presents the appearance of a long range of sand hills, some of which are very white. From the south, the range of white sand appears more coutinuous, and very low towards the west end. On a nearer ap- proach many of the sand hills are seen to have been partly removed by the waves, so as to have formed steep cliff's next the sea. In other parts they are covered by grass, and defended by a broad beach, which, however, can not be reached without passing over ridges of sand cov- ered with only a few feet water. These ridges, which are parallel to the shore at distances not exceeding J of a mile, form heavy breakers, and are dangerous to pass in boats when there is any sea running. 8AHLE ISLAND — DESCRIPTION. 1) Productions. — The amoimi iiiul variety of vegetation on this gigan- tic Hand bar i» extnionlinary. Be idea two kinds of grass, there are wild peas and other pla,,! ■4, affording subsistence to wihl horses and rabbits, iis well as to the doMM'stJc cattle belonging to the establish- ment. There are no other animals on the island, excepting rats, which have come on shore from -wreclvs. There are also four or ttve kinds of edible berries in great abundance, and many (lowers and shrubs, but uo trees. Fresh water can be obtaineil in almost any part by digging down a few feet into the sand. Seals and abundance of wild fowl frequent the island in their seasons. The fisheries around the island are exceedingly valuable, but the danger of remaining near its formidable bars has hitherto restricted the number of vessels engaged in them. The Establishment on Sable Island for the relief of shipwrecked persons is situated on the north side of the island between the pond and the sand hills, and consists of a comfortable house for the super- intendent and his family, buildings for the men and the occasional accommodation of shipwrecked persons, for storing provisions and other property saved from wrecks, workshops, stabling, etc. The superintendent has under him sixteen men, who are stationed as follows, viz, the superintendent and six men at the main station which is at the west flagstatt* ; at the west end lighthouse, the lighthouse keeper and bis assistant; at the east end, the lighthouse keeper, his assistant, and two boatmen ; at the middle station, two boatmen ; and at the foot of the lake station, two boatmen. In addition there are generally two or three extra men. These stations are all connected by telephones. The staflf, with their families, number about forty-six persons, and no one is allowed to reside on the island without the authority of the ma- rine department. No wrecks can take place on the island at a greater distance than 6 miles from some one of these posts ; and in the event of one occurring the outposts report to the superintendent at the principal establish- ment. Life-saving Apparatus. — Life-boats are stationed at the east end, and at the main station, besides the surf boats. There is also a rocket apparatus at the main station, and a life car at the east end. During fogs and snow storms mounted men patrol the beach to ascer- tain if any wrecks have taken place. The West FlagstaflT, which points out the position of the principal establisliment, stands on a sand hill 40 feet high, and with its crow's nest, «r lookout, 100 feet above the sea, is a conspicuous object on the north, side of the island. The East FlagstaflT, 40 feet high, is also a conspicuous object, stand- ing on a sand hill on the north side of the island. ■^t 10 8A1JLE ISLAND, ' i I ! ; y- The Middle Flagstaff is fsirther inland, near the east end of the salt water lake, and 3| miles to the westward of the East Flagstaff. The West Bar dried about 3 ""'e from the end of the grassj^ sand hills. There were several patches nearly dry about a mile farther out, and then 9 miles of heavy breakers, succeeded in bad weather by 7 miles more in which the depth increases from 5 to 10 fathoms, and where there is usually a great ripple and a heavy cross sea. Since 1852 the sea has encroached on the land and covered places where tie grass formerly grew. The direction of this bar is N. 60° W. for the first 12 miles, thence west for the remaining distance; the whole extent of the bar from the end of the grassy sand hills to the depth of 10 fath- oms being 17 miles, bevoud which the water deepens gradually to the westward for many miles. The East Bar during fine weather dried about 4 miles from the end of the grassy sand hills. At the distance of If miles, a small sand hill about 10 feet high and with some grass on it has accumulated around a wreck since 1820. The 4 miles of dry sand are succeeded by 8 or 9 miles of heavy breakers ; the whole length of this bar, from the grassy sand hills to the depth of 10 fathoms being 14 miles. Since 1852 the sea has receded, and vegetation now appears in places which were cov- ered by water. Its direction is N. 40° E. for the first 7 miles, beyond which it curves gradually, till it terminates to east. The ridge of sand with a depth of from 10 to 13 fathoms on it, and with often a heavy cross sea, coutinnes for 10 miles farther to the east, and then ends abruptly, the depth increasing, in a distance of 3 miles farther in the same direction, to 170 fathoms, in the channel between Sable Island and Banquereaa Bank. Vessels should be careful not to be caught within the crescent in a strong gale from the northward, when the accelerated ebb tide, setting directly towards and over the bars, would render hersituation extremely dmigerous. Both the bars are extremely steep on the north side, the east bar especially so, having 30 fathoms water close to it. To the southward, on tbo contrary, the water deepens gradually for many miles, and renders it difficult to account for the great number of ship- wrecks ou that side of the island and its bars, unless they are to be at- tributed to the neglect of the lead. Wrecks on the bars are of course far more dangerous to life than those that take place on the island, and it is important in such cases tokuow on which bar the vessel is, and the consequent direction in which to seek for safety on the island. This information, when the island is hid- den by <"og or the darkness of night, must be sought by observing the direction of the line of breakers, which ou the east bar is between NE. by N. and EJfB. until near its outer extremity, whilst on the West Bar it is WNW. Anchorage.— Off the north side of Sable Island, excepting near the east end, where the deep water approaches too near the shore, there is a i A TIDES — CURRENTS. 11 snd of the %gstaft'. ■assy sand ,rther out, ther by 7 Uoins, and ea. Since where tl'e ir the first > extent of >f 10 fath- ally to the in the end 1 Siind hill ed around by 8 or 9 thegrassy ) 1852 the were cov- 38, beyond ge of sand n a heavy then ends her in the Island and escent in a (le, setting extremely li side, the r. To the for many dv of ship- re to beat- than those ics to know n which to land is hid- lerving the tween NE. } West Bar ig near the re, there is I good anchorage in 5 to 10 fathoms, from one to 2 miles oft" shore. The bottom is fine sand, and holds well, but the sea is so heavy, excepting with oflfsliore winds, that a vessel should weigh immediately on the first indications of a wind from seaward. Directions.— In approaching the anchorage offSable Island from the northward at night or in thick weather, the lead should be kept con- stantly going; and after passing the Middle Ground, distant about 25 miles to the northward of the island, great caution should be used, and the vessel should be certain of her position ; for the east end of the island and the Bast Bar are very steep on that side. Vessels seldom anchor ott" the south side of the island, because of the prevailing heavy swell from the southward ; but they may safely ap- proach by the lead on that side, taking care not to become becalined in the heavy swell, and in the strong and uncertain tides and Ciirrents near the bars. The landing is in general impracticable on the south side, excepting after a long continuance of northerly winds ; and on the north side boats can land only during southerly winds and fine weather ; but there are surf boats at the establishment, which can land when ordinary boats would swamp. Tides.— It is high water, full and change, on the north side of Sable Island at 7h. 30m., and on the south side about an hour earlier ; springs rise about 4 feet. The tidal streams are much influenced by the wind. The ebb sets to the southward on and over the bars, often at the rate of IJ or 2 knots ; the flood at a much less rate in the contrary direc- tion. Currents.— Of the great currents in this part of the ocean, it is gen- erally admitted that the Gulf Stream, after passing along the coast of the United States, is deflected to the eastward between the parallels of 35° and 40° N., and continuing on in about an ENE. direction passes south of the tail of the Great Bank of Newfoundland dnring the winter months, but extends over the south end of the bank during the summer season. From a combination of causes, such as prevailing, or lately prevailing winds, and the preponderance of polar or tropical waters, the Gulf Stream has been found to have an oscillatory motion, so that it would be impossible to assign any definite limits to the margins of this great ocean river. The velocity of the Gulf Stream across the south end of the Great Newfoundland Bank is very variable, but at times amounts to more than a knot an hour in an ENE. direction. One result of this influxof warm water into a cold atmosphere is the production of the dense fogs so fre- quently experienced on the banks, and which materially embarrass and retard navigation. Although the current between the Grand Bank and Newfoundland commonly sets to the SW., sometimes at a rate of nearly one mile per J 12 LABRADOR CURRENT. I i hour, it is not always so ; aud near the shore, m "'^^l^'^**^ ^^^^ j!^''^ even changes with the wind. At these times during the flood it runs toThe SW., and during the ebb to the NE., the former being the '' T^the westward of Cape Race, it must also be remembered that the current so frequently setting to the xXW. one mile P^^^^^T^'^j ';/f;/^ is not invariable in strengtn or direction, but is affected g^eatlj bj the prevailing wind. It is observed generally to run in upon the eastern sTde o the great bays indenting the south coast of Newfound and and out on thei 'western side. In the offing it is influenced by the winds and near the shore by the tides, so that during springs the stream of ebb runs weakly to the SB., and the stream of flood to the NW., the latter sometimes 2 miles per hour round the headlands. Admiral Clone, of the French Imperial Navy, during his survey of Banquereau Bank, remarks that he observed the ^""ents to be very irregular in strength and condition, for they sometimes change all round tL compass in 24 hours, and have been known to set in a contrary direcln'to the prevailing wind. The ordinary strength of the current is about half a knot; but it occasionally attains a vel^'f/Z^^'^^^^^^'i^^ 2 miles an hour. The fact of the transportation of field ice from the north to the latitude of 42° N., indicates the certainty of a current ordinarily setting to the SW. Arctic or Labrador Current-In addition to the warm waters of thfaulf' Stream is the cold ice-bearing current from the Arctic se^, which passes to the southward, along the coast of Labrador, at rates varving from 10 to 56 miles a day, and being very much influenced near the^coast by the winds, it is difficult to estimate the direction or effect for any particular day, but that the general trend is to the sou h ward is shown by the passage of many icebergs; these, however, have been observed to travel north without any apparent reason. Abreast Labrador this cold current appears to extend as far to the eastward as the meridian of 40o W., from thence in its course to the southward it is met by the northern edge of the Gulf Stream, he posi- tion being nearly always distinguishable by the rips caused by the interlacing of the waters of the two currents. A brallfh of the Arctic Current flows through the Strait of Belle Isle iuto the Gulf of St. Lawrence, and again enters the Atlantic in a south- easterly direction between Cape Breton Island and Newfoundland. This' branch current is retarded by easterly winds which sometimes cause it to run in a contrary direction; it is frequently deflected to the southward toward Cape Breton Island by those from the northward and indeed winds generally act so powertuUy and ^"^S^^^'-Jj^'^ *^f. rate aud direction of the current and tides in this entrance of the Gulf of St. Lawrence, as to render it difficult to say anything respecting them that is not subject to exceptions. •,•„.„ .„„ta Vessels bound for the Gulf of St. Lawrence, and wishing to make 1 CURRENTS — BUOYAGE. m ither, it it runs iug the that the le offlug y by the easteru sind, and e winds, tream of SW., the uirvey of J be very all round contrary e current nore than > from the a current waters of ^ctic seas, at rates inced near tt or eflfect southward have been far to the Tse to the , the posi- led by the ' Belle Isle m a south- idland. sometimes oted to the uorthward, irly on the of the Gulf jctiug them ig to make the land of Cape Breton Island, should, if the weather be foggy, shape a course so as to pass a few miles north of Scatari Island, and most frequently after passing the meridian of Flint Island the fog will clear. The SW. wind, which is accomp anied by a dense fog at Scatai i, becomes clear and fine during its piissage over the warm land. When approaching the entrance of the Gulf of St. Lawrence, the current generally sets to the southward, on the Cape Breton Island side of the strait, but on the Newfoundland shore it has frequently beea found setting to the northward about one knot per hour. To the eastward of Cape Breton Island the current intermingles with the main branch of the same current, which, after skirting the east coast of Newfoundland, turns to the westward round Cape Race, thence pass- ing along the SE. Coast of Nova Scotia, continues on to the southward along the American shore to Florida, preserving in a marked degree its distinctive character as a cold current inside the warm waters of the Gulf Stream. Along the SE. coast of Nova Scotia the offshore current generally sets to the SW. at an average rate of rather more than h mile an hour, but both direction and strength are much influenced by the wind. After a continuous westerly blow the current will run to the eastward about ^ knot per hour ; and after a prevalence of easterly winds, the usual southwesterly current is accelerated to more than a knot an hour; in either case the set will tend to increase the vessel's distance from the shore. Between Bam Island and Cape Sable, wi thin 8 miles of the shore, the current is governed by the Bay of Fundy tidal stream, the flood setting to the westward and the ebb to the eastward. The formation of the extensive banks of Newfoundland and Nova Scotia is probably to be attributed to th e meeting of the above diverse currents ; for the loose delta ol the numerous rivers flowing into the Gulf of Mexico, and borne along in suspension by the force of the Gulf Stream, as well as the earthy matter which icebergs are ever bringing from the north, are alike deposited within the comparatively liihited space where the two streams come into collision. A current :jetting to the southward and southwestward at rates varying from 1^ to 3} knots an hour, and skirting the eastern edge of the Great Bank of Newfoundland, was observed in December, 1884, between latitude 43° 6' and 43° 2'*' N., and longitude 49° 2' and 49° 37' W., by Mr. Richard Ladd, navigating officer, telegraph S. S. Minia. Uniform System of Buoyage. — The following uniform system of buoyage is generally adopted in the ports and channels on the Cana- dian coasts: Approaching from seaward, all buoys on the starboard side of a channel are painted red, and, if numbered, marked with even num- bers, and should be left on the starboard hand. All buoys on the port side of a channel are painted black, with odd numbers, if any, and should be left on the port hand. 1^1 i It '\ 14 BUOYAGE — ICE. Buoys painted red aud black iu horizontal bauds mark obatruc. tions on middle grounds, aud may be left on either hand. Buoys painted white and black in vertical stripes mark mulchan- nel, and should be passed close to avoid danger. All other distinguishing marks to buoys are in addition to the foregoing, and indicate particular spots, a detailed description of which will be given when first established. Perches, with balls, cages, etc., will, when placed on buoys be at turning points, the color and number indicating on which hand they should be left. , , . , „.. i The rule for coloring buoys is equally applicable to beacons and other day marks, so far as it may be practicable to carry it out. Ice -One of the most fruitful sources of danger to which vessels are exposed are the immense masses of ice in the form of bergs, and extensive fields of solid, compact ice which are released at the break- ing up of winter in the Arctic regions, and drifted down by the Labrador Current across the direct aud much frequented route between the principal ports of Western Europe and North America. In this route ice is more likely to be encountered from April to August, both months inclusive, although icebergs have been seen du"»g ^11 seasons of the year north of the parallel of 43° N., but not oft^n so far south after August. , ^ . , • u a ^e These icebergs are frequently several hundred feet high, and ot vast extent; they have occasionally been seen as low as latitude 39o IT and in positions to attain which the Gulf Stream must have been crossed. Such phenomena have been attributed to the warm waters of the Gulf Stream overrunning the cold Arctic Current, whilst the latter, retaining its progress and direction as a submarine curreu, transports the deeply-immersed ice islands into ai;d across the Gulf ^*On"this subject an able authority has remarked: •'No impulsion but that of a vast current, setting in a southwesterly direction, and passing beneath the Gulf Stream, could have carried these immeuse bodies to their observed positions on routes which cross the Gulf current in a region where its average breadth has been found to be about 250 miles." , . ,. ^ u„„„ In the latitude of St. Johns, Newfoundland, icebergs have been fallen in with as far east as the meridian of *0°W., being the east ern margin of the cold Arctic Current already described. Farther south, between the parallels of 40o and 45° N., they have been seen as far east as 39° W. „. , . , j„« From latitude 38° 40' N., and longitude 47° 30' W.-wliich under ordinary circumstances may be deemed the most southerly positaou in which to expect icebergs-their probable boundary line to the westward would be nearly in a straight line towards Ualifax to as far as longitude 61° W. « 4i i ICE PASSAGES. 15 obstrac- midchau- 1 to the iption of oys, be at laud they icons and it out. ch vessels t)erg8, aud the break- n\ by the te between El. In this August, during all ot often so gh, and of ititude 390 have been :irm waters whilst the ae current, IS the Gulf 1 impulsion ectiou, and se immense 3 the Gulf found to be have been ng the east- i. Farther B been seen ;rhich under srly position line to the ax to as far Instances of an exceptional nature are on record of icebergs having been seen bordering on the parallel of 40° N,, within GO miles WNVV. of tlio island of Corvo ; aud of another having been passed in latitude 36° 10' N. and longitude 39° 0' W. Ice fields have been fallen in with in the latitude of Cai)e Kace, on'the meridian of 45° W., and also in latitude 41'° N. and longitude 50° W. Under ordinary circumstances the ice does not reach so far south as Cape Race before April, so that sailing vessels leaving England in March have often entered the Gulf of St. Lawrence without being im- peded by ice. When in the supposed vicinity of ice a good lookout is essentially necessary, for even during a fog, or the darkest night, the position of an iceberg may be ascertained by a peculiar whitening of the fog— known as ice blink— vfhich frequently renders them visible at some distance. Generally on approaching ice there is a marked diminution in the temperature of the air and sea, especially of the latter. The indications of the thermometer should therefore never be neglected, though it must not be assumed to be an infallible guide. Vessels should if possible always pass to windward of icebergs to avoid the loose ice doating to leeward. PASSAGES. Southern Route — Sailing vessels, or steam vessels with small power, leaving the English or St. George Channel, and bound for Hali- fax, after making the necessary westing to insure not being set into the B».y of Biscay, should shape a course for Madeira, which may be passed at any convenient distance on either side, except during the months of November, December, and January, and when it is prefer- able to pass to the westward of it on account of the strong westerly gales which prevail, producing eddy winds and heavy squalls on the east side of the island. After passing Madeira steer to the southwestward until within the northern limit of the NE. trade wind (which will be entered when the sun is near the northern troi)ic, between the parallels of 31° and 32° N. and when near the southern between 30° aud 31° N.), when the course should be altered gradually to the westward, keeping within the limit of the trade wind. , Cross the meridian of 40o W. in latitude 26o N., which parallel should be preserved until the meridian of 48o W. be reaehed.when a more north- erly course should be pursued, passing about 200 miles to the eastward of Bermuda, thence a course may be steered for Halifax, observing that m crossing the Gulf Stream when between the parallels of 38° and 42 oN., the current will be found to set about ENE. at the rate of 20 to 70 miles a day, attaining its greatest velocity when the sun is far to the north- ward, or on the return of that Imly to the equator. The color of the Gulf Stream water is a deep indigo blue, and the junction with ordinary sea water distinctly marked ; on crossing the northern limit of the stream the temperature has been observed to decrease 30o. ! ■ i f ■i . 1 CHAPTER BAY OF FUNDY-NORTH COABT-MKEIDIAN POINT-MAINE, TO AHD INCLUDING OUMBEBLAND BASIN. , t. mufl Bav of Fundy is an extensive mm of the •^rr ea^trjfJf"^!"". ALla, »e/arattaB tbe proviuee of N.w other bay, .3 -» - ' ^J^l'lAL ^^^i^^^^^ by .toogo.of SJirrSr. vro:^n:>to O-noe, on the o.«h, and the "1l?Bt'ofF"o';%Td«p!tt-theoav.gati.oi. r.„de.«i not only ..^alf Mt dang" roo', by nameroaaoff-lyiag da«ger.friDg.«g the ap- pSXt- rS and'olrtaio tides, a, .ell as by the frequent oe- %aX-wTtrre'xcepti«n of St John and St. Andrews pno^^^^^^^^ po!:fb". few at .arn.o«th, *- a^ «o .egn " P- o»^o, *e^ay of ,„„dy. TheflsherMjand -» ersjo^n^^^^^^^^ ^ r^STutt a^nU r rr -0.1 info^ed^spectm^ the depth ihsr;:;irrc^°:.J:=srsrrndr: 'B°:::;?::dy™z:r ro,rSaM the .and ..„„... .r^.- Xt' wLm Is^^^^^^ approached within 200 yards, excepting m the immediate vicinity of Dark Harbor. 16 SEAL COVE — BIG DUCK LEDGE. ff , TO AKD rm of the ce of New extending ;e breadth r islets, as aoddy and nsiderable \ tongne of :)h, and the d not only ing the ap- requent oc- pilots, and the Bay of aintedwith nstomed to g the depth mthward of nd between [aine. This Jt. Andrews in the prov- ;rance to the ioi>' s gradu. tied ; but on of which are md also the excepting in From SW. head the extreme dangers off Grand Maiiaii Ishirid, viz, Old Proprietor to the SE. and Machias Seal Island to the SW., are about 1U4 miles distant; whilst the outer of an intermediate cluster of dangers southward of the island, known as Murr Ledges, are 7^ miles distant. It is evident, therefore, that this extensive range of dangers many of which never uncover, increases the difficulty and danger of navigation, and renders extreme caution necessary. During fogs, with southerly and southwesterly winds, it frc([uently happens that a clear space, a full mile wide, extends ott' the northern part of the island, a fact which should be borne in mind as it may facili- tate making a good landfall. The soil of Grand Manan is generally good and produces every va- riety of tir, beech, birch, aiul maple in size and quality adequate to all purposes for which they are generally used. The eastern coasts abound with fish. Seal Cove. -Good anchorage may be obtained at the head of Seal Cove, between the southeastern shore of Grand Manan and Big Wood Island, in 4 to 5 fathoms over muddy bottom. With southerly gales a sea sets into Seal (Jove when vessels require a good scope of cable. There is also good anchorage under the lee of Big Wood Island with easterly winds. Buck Rock is a small rocky patch which uncovers at two- thirds ebb, lying off the SE. point of Grand Manan Island, about i mile off shore, ►with deep water all around it. Big Wood Rocks lie about i mile off the NW. point of Big Wood Island, with 5 fathoms close outside them. The inner rock generally dries, but the outer has 4 feet of water over it. Tides.— It is high water, full and change, at Seal Cove at lOh. Sim.; springs rise 20 feet, neaps 15 feet, and at Grand Harbor at llh. 7m. : springs rise 21 feet, neaps 17^ feet. Grand Harbor is only adapted for vessels of small draft. Vessels drawing 10 feet can be beached on the west side of the harbor. OuU Cove, on the eastern shore of White Head Island, affords good shelter from all winds except those between north round by east to SE. Anchorage may be obtained in the middle of the cove at about 300 yards from the shore in 5^ fathoms, sand. Big Duck Island.— The anchorage under this island on its western side is iu about 3J fathoms, mud, with the west tangent of Long Island midway between High and Low Duck Islands, and the south point of Big Duck Island bearing H. 88° E. A fog horn is established near the southern end of Big Duck Island. It gives one blast of 6 seconds duration every 35 seconds. Big Duck Ledge.— To the southward of Big Duck Island, at the dis- tance of J mile, is Big Duck Ledge, the highest part of which never covers. This ledge should not be approached on its south side nearer than J mile, nor should the uarrow passage between it and Big Duck 5314 2 18 GRAND MANAN ISLAND AND BANK. t It ■ I- I i P Island ever be atten)i>te«l ; the other sides of the ledge may be ap- proaclied within 200 j'urds. Long Island Bay. — Oood anchorage sheltered from h11 except north- erly winds iMiiy be obtained within Long Island in about 'i fathoms, sand, with tli«% east end of Fanner Ledge in line with the center of High Duck luland and the north end of Long Island bearing N. 30° E. Care must be taken on approaching this island to avoid a rock awash, which lies about ^ mile from the north end of Long Island. Flag Cove, situated in the northern part of Long Island Bay, affords anchorage in about 5^ fathoms, stiff clay, protected from all winds but those between S. 30° E. and S. 64° E. In approaching this anchorage from the northward do not bring Swallowtail lighthouse to bear eastward of N. 37° E. until Low Duck Island begins to open out west of Long Island, in order to avoid a clus- ter of rocks which uncovers at last quarter ebb, at 400 yards off Flag Point. TVhale Core. — In Whale Gove, near the north end of Grand Manau Island, a good temporary anchorage may be obtained in about 6 fathoms, but it is exposed to northerly winds. Dark Harbor is an inlet, across the mouth of which the sea has thrown a shingle wall; near its south end there is a pier, and an open> ing available for small vessels at high water. Within the basin there is secure anchorage in 5 to 7 fathoms, mud. Bradford Cove affords anchorage off a green bank in 8 to 10 fathoms water, about 300 or 400 yards offshore. Grand Manan Bank is about 6^ miles long by 2 miles broad ; the depths on it being from 24 to 47 fathoms, gravel and sand, with from 50 to 82 fathoms, mud and sand, all around, though according to some fishermen there are only 10 to 16 fathoms on its sboalost part. At half flood the stream sets over the banks N. by E. and S. by W, about 1^ knots per hour, and during ebb attains an equal velocity in the opposite direction ; it turns about ^ hour after high and low water at Seal Islands, and shows a tide rip of great extent. There |ire two other banks to the southward of Grand Manan Bank, the northern of which is 5 miles long and one mile broad, with 28 to 48 fathoms on it, and lies 2^ miles from the SW. extreme of Grand Manan Bank ; the southern, 2^ miles long and 2 broad with 36 to 50 fathoms on it, lies 6^ miles from the same point. Steering for and sounding on these banks gives confidence when steering into the Bay of Fundy, especially during thick weather. Machias Seal Island. — The island on which the light-houses stand is the larger of two islands, joined together at low water by a rocky ledge ; and it is the most off lying of the dangers S W. of Grand Manan Island. The island is about 4 mile long, has an elevation of 28 feet, and near its center are the light-houses, which in line bearing N. 63° W. lead 4 miles seaward of Murr Ledges. M \i; MACHIA8 SEAL ISLAND — MURR LEDGES. If ge may be ap- ill except north- out 'i fathoms, I center of High N.30OE. Care ik awash, which iud Bay, affords n all winds but i do not bring until Low Duck to avoid a clus- I yards off Flag f Grand Manau led in about 6 tch the sea has >r, and an open- the basin there 1 8 to 10 fathoms lies broad; the iand, with from sording to some it part. a. and S. by W. qual velocity in 1 and low water d Manan Bank, d, with 28 to 48 »f Grand Manan S to 50 fathoms Dnfidence when I weather, ht-houses stand iter by a rocky )f Grand Manan S feet, and near L 630 w. lead 4 The fog signal is one S-second blast every 30 seconds. A small shoal, with only 13 feet water, lies |^ mile S. 09^ E. from the eastern lighthouse ou Machias Seal Island, with deep water in the channel i»elween it and the island. The shoal shows a rip during the strength of the tide, and breaks in heavy weather. Anchorage can be found in the eddy on the SE. side of the island, and a pilot can generally be obtained here. The St. Andrews pilots generally cruise ott" these islands. Tides.— It is high water, full and change, at Machias Seal Island at llh. 5ni.; springs rise 18 feet, neaps li'ilt- Kent Shoal lies N. 9° E. 2 miles from Gannet lighthouse, and al- though some of the fishermen report iis little as 12 feet on it, nothing less than 3^ fathoms at low water could be found on its examination. Bull Rock, of small extent, with 2 feet on it and deep water all round to within ^ mile, lies nearly midway between Gannet and Macbias Seal Island lighthouses, the latter being d'^^ant 6J miles S. 88° W. ; Bull Kock shows a small rip during the strength of the tide and gener* ally breaks. Cautioa — The soundings around Macbias Seal Islands and Mnrr Ledges are irregular. The principal shoals in their vicinity have been described and the others do not amount to dangers; but it will be pro- dent for strangeis to keep outside them. Should it be necessary, a vessel may anchor between Murr Ledges and Grand Manan Island. Old Proprietor Shoal, the most oif-lyiugof the dangers SE. of Grand Manan Island, uncovers at about half tide, and from it the south point of Three Islands bears X. 81° W. about 4 miles distant, and Gannet Rock lighthouse S. 61° W. 5§ miles. The SW. head of Grand Manan Island seen optn south of Three Is. lands, bearing N. 75° W. leads southwards, and Big Duck Island, open east of Black Kocks, bearing N. 16° W., leads eastward of Old Proprie. tor Shoal and all the dangers in its vicinity. Strangers should care, fully avoid getting within the above leading marks. Beacon. — On Old Proprietor Shoal is an iron spindle painted red, and surmounted by a cage 31 feet above high water. It should be vis. ible in clear weather from a distance of 8 to 10 miles. The Foul Qround to the westward of Old Proprietor Shoal is an irregular shoal, about ij of a mile from north to south ; on its northern end a rock, which lies N. 61° W. 4 mile from Old Proprietor Shoal, is jUst awash at low water springs. r^Sii L. ev »\mngH and lack Learts of which are Just dry at low water springs, bearing from each other N. 5<5 W. and S. 5'^ E. nearly i mile a))art. From the Outer Diamond the south point of Three Islands bears S. 74<^ VV., nearly 2<^ miles, and the higher Black Kock N. 24o E. 2^ miles. The house on the northernmost of Three Islands, open northward of the north point of the easternmost of those islands bearing N. 83<^ W. leads northward of the Inner Diamond, between it and Tinker Shoal. Tinker Shoal is about \ mile in length, and the highest part, which uncovers at low water, except at very small neaps, lies with Long Point, White Bead Island, bearing N. 2° W., upwards of a mile dis- tant, and the north point of Three Islands X. 86° W. 2J miles. The SW. head of Grand Manan Island open to the northward of Three Islands leads northward of the shoals; and Mark Hill open southward of Pumpkin Island, which should be equidistant between it and White Head Island, bearing N. 50^ W., leads between the Tinker and Brazil Shoals. Brazil Shoal is an extensive danger, the SW. end of which uncov- ers at the last quarter ebb, and its NE. end just shows above low water springs; between these two patches, which are distant from each other about i mile, the bottom is very irregular. From the SW. patch Long Point bears N. 41° W, one mile, and the higher Black Rock N. 43"^ E. 1| miles. From the NB. patch Long Point bears N. 72° W. one mile, and the higher Black Kock N. 40° E. I mile. Black Rocks are two in number, the larger and northeastern of the two being about 10 feet above high water, anal iHlands both direction and Htreni;th constantly vary. Near the latter the tidal stream sets X. 15° E. and S. 15^ W. with a velocity of about 3 knots. In the vicinity of Old Proprietor Shoal the stream turns about three- fourths of an hour before hijjh and low water by the shore, respectively, and runs with a great Init variable velocity, attaining; in .some places during the 8tren}>th of springs a rate of G knots. The ripples in conse- quence are large, and cause the surface to assume a boiling api)earance, rendering the dangers indistinct. Strangers are therefore strongly recommended to keep outside the clearing marks for Old Proprietor Shoal ; otherwise the best chan- nel is inside all the dangers, along the coast of White Head Island, which may be approached on its southeastern side to about \ mile, ex- cept at Long Point, which should be passed at twice that distance. Off Big Duck Island the inshore streams runs from 2 to 3 knots in a direction parallel to the trend of the coast, about N. 18 oW. on the flood and S. 18° E.ou the ebb. To the northward of Fish Head, as far as Long Eddy Point, the stream, both flood and ebb, sets about N. 30° W.; whilst further off shore the direction of the stream gradually merges into that of the bar tide, with a reduced rate of IJ or 2 knots. Along the west side of Grand Manan Island the flood stream runs parallel to the shore about NNE. and the ebb SSW. 2 knots an hour. Directions. — Vessels approaching Grand Manan Island from the eastward, and bound either to Seal Cove or round SW. head, should bring the latter open to the southward of Three Islands bearing N. 75° W., in order to clear Old Proprietor Shoal and Foul Ground ; this course will lead in safety to Three Islands, which may be passed at the dis- tauceof rj mile, and thence as occasion may require to a suitable anchor- age in Seal Cove. If bound to Grand Harbor, after having passed Old Proprietor Shoal, proceed to the southwestward of Bans Shoal with Mark Hill 0|)en south- ward of Green Island bearing N. 38° W., but it would not be advisable to enter the harbor without a pilot. A temporary anchorage will be found about i mile from the NE. shore of Three Islands, in about 5 fathoms, sand, and safe from all winds which have no easting in them. If proceedingto the anchorage under Big Duck Island from the south- ward, keep Big Duck Island open eastward of Black Rocks bearing N. 16° W. in order to pass eastward of Old Proprietor ; after passing Black Rocks at a moderate distance bring the western tangent of Long Island, njidway between High and Low Duck Islands, bearing N. 25° W., which will lead nearly \ mile outside the rocks off Prangle Point. ■^^h. Old Proprietor shows a heavy IP E., and ebb le Gaiinet and UHtaiitly vary. 15^ W. with a H8 about three- B, respectively, ill some places pples ill coiise- i^ap])earance, ?p outside the he best cban- Head Island, )ut i mile, ex- t distance. :o 3 knots in a W. on the tiood as far as Long ut N. 30° W.; ly merges into s. Along the parallel to the land from the . head, should (earing N. 75° d; this course led at the dis- litable anchor- prietor Shoal, ill 0|)eu south- t be advisable from the NE. safe from all om the south- ocks bearing after passing igentof Long ug N. 250 w., ) Point. WOLVES — WOLF ROCK. m After passing these rocks bring the eastern points of Long and Low Duck Islands in line in order to avoid the long rocky ledge, mostly dry at low war»r. which extends nearly A mile to tiie southward of Big Duck Island and anchor with the west tangent of Long Island midway between lligli and Low Duck Islands, and the south point of IJig Duck Island bearing X. 88o E. ■ The channel between Orand Manaii Island and the coast of Maine varies from 10 to C miles in breadth, and in all respects may be deemed the safest passage up the Bay of Fundy, as it is deep and clear of dangers, with the shores on either side steep-t(», besides being the most advantageous with the preva ent winds which are from the westward. Wolves, consisting of t\y& islands thickly wooded, are 3| miles in length and lie 8J miles N. 15° E. from the north point of Grand Manan Island. These islands are from 60 to 100 feet in height, and along their shores, which are steepto, temporary anchorages may be obtained in 12 to 20 fathoms. The passage between East VVDlf, the largest and northeasrernniost of the group, and Green Wolf has deep water, and is about 600 yanls wide; but vessels using this channel should borrow on the Green Wolf side, in order to avoid some rocks which extend about GOOyards ofl" the southwest shore of East Wolf. There is also a passage between Green and Flat Wolves, but the channel is narrowed to 200 yards by some rocks off the latter island, and should not therefore be taken. The remaining two passages are not navigable except for boats, nor should any of the channels between Wolves Islands be attempted by strangers, unless under unavoidable circumstances. During thick weather, or with light winds and an adverse tide, ves- sels may anchor between Wolves Islands and Beaver Harbor, in 20 to 25 fathoms, good holding ground. Whistling Buoy.~An automatic whistling buoy, painted black, with the name "S. Wolf" in white letters, has been placed southeastward of Southwest Wolf Island. The buoy is moored in 52 fathoms of water, with Southwest Wolf Island light bearing N. 41° W., distant U miles. TVolf Rock, small in size and always above water, lies about 400 yards off the north point of East Wolf, and is separated from another small rock to the eastward by a deep channel 200 yanls wide. Both rocks sliould always be passed on their northerij side, and not within a distance of 400 yards. Coast of Maine, Englishman Bay.— The entrance to this bay is between Cow Point on the east, and Kelly Point on the west. These points are 7 miles apart, but the passage is obstructed by many isl- ands, among which lead the different channels into the bay. From a line joining Kelly and Cow Points, the bay is 5 miles long to the en- trance to Chandler liiver, at its northern end, and affords an excellent anchorage for the largest vessels, 5 and 6 fathoms being found as far up '■1 '1 M aiaipin-. 24 ENGLISHMAN BAY, MAINE. ir^ as Groat Head. The main entrance to Englishman Bay lies between Scabby Islands and The Brothers, between which the channel is IJ miles wide, and is unobstructed up to Shag Ledge, which nuist receive a good berth, owing to other ledges — bare at low water — which radiate in all directions iVoin the main ledge. For vessels of light draft, there is a good and perfectly safe channel from the eastward between Foster and Ram Island, and many coasters and fishermen make use of it in preference to the main channel. It is almost unobstructed uj) to Hickey Island, the only danger being the ledge ofl" the northern end of this island. In using the main entrance care must be taken to avoid the "Cods Heac! " a small rock — out at low water — which lies about | of a mile S. 34° VV. from Mickey Island, and is not marked. Scabby Islands, forming the eastern shore of the main entrance to Englishman Bay, consist of two small islands lying about N. 11° E. and S. 11° W. from each other, and close together. The eastern one is conspicuous for a high rouud head with one or or two dead pines, look- ing like masts, on its top; otherwise it is bare. The southern islet is lower than the northern, and is rocky and bare, except for a few dead trees on its western end. The Brothers, forming the western shore of the main entrance to Englishman Bay, are two rocky islets, bearing about N. 66° E. and S. 66° W. from each other, with grassy surface, and with a scanty growth of fir clinging to their northern sides. Foster Island, forming the northern boundary of the eastern en- trance to Englishman Bay, is bare and rocky. It was formerly wooded, but is now cleared and covered with tree stumps. It is remarkable for the bleached appearance of these stumps, which resemble grave stones. Ram Island, forming the southern boundary of eastern entrance to Englishman Bay, is a low rocky islet, with a scanty growth of stunt»'d fir at its eastern end. Roque Island lies in the middle of the entrance to Englishman Bay, and affords several excellent harbors of refuge. Shorey Cove is a most excellent harbor, sheltered from all winds, with good anchorage in from 2 to 3 fathoms, soft bottom, and no ob- structions. Roque Island Harbor also atlbrds good anchorage and excellent shelter for vessels. It may be entered from the westward through lloques Island Narrows, between Roque Island and Great Si)ruce Island. Tijere is also a passage from the east between Halifax, Anguilla, and the Sliot Islands on the south, and Lakeman Island on the nortli, but the b(;^t i)as8age is that from the southward, between the Shot and Great Si)ruce Islands. Qreat Cove, the bight in the main land just to the eastward of Calf Point, aftbrds good anchorage and shelter from all winds. In case ot ,„^,MU»mr*mim»>* LITTLE KENNEBEC RIVER — MACHIA8 BAY. 25 Jay lies between 8 cbauuel is IJ iclj must receive — which radiate tly safe cliannel i many coaster* channel. It is mger being the old the "Cods It I of a mile S. ain entrance to ibont N. no E. e eastern one is ead pines, look- 3Uthern islet is for a few dead in entrance to J. 66° E. and S. scanty growth he eastern en- cmerly wooded, remarkable for e grave stones, jrn entrance to wth of stunted o Englishman ^om all winds, a, and no ob- and excellent ward through Great Si)ruce Anguilla,and the north, but the Shot and itward of Calf . In case ot southerly winds vessels may run well into the cove and anchor under the lee of Calf Island. Little Kennebec River is an excellent harbor of refuge, the anchor- age being about 1^ miles above the Point of Main, and the approaches l>erfectly safe. Hickey Island, lying in the middle of the entrance to the Little Kennebec, is a low island, partly sand and partly rock, dotted )»ere and there with spruce and flr and a stunted growth of pine. A reef, bare at low water, extends 200 yards from its southern end. Tides. — It is high water, full and change, in Englishman Bay at llh. 15m. Mean rise and fall of tides is 13 feet. Ice. — The bay is generally closed by ice during a portion of each winter. In severe winters navigation by sailing vessels is impossible after the loth of January, although steamers can usually keep running until the end of the month, when the bay is usually completely closed, remaining so until towards the 1st of March. The formation commences in the coves and sheltered places along shore and extends gradually out into the bay. Machias Bay, just to the eastward of Englishman Bay, has a length in a north and south direction of 6 miles and varies between 2^ and 4 miles in width. The main entrance to the bay is between Cross Island on the east and Libby Island on the west. The western channel, between Libby Island on the south and Earn and Stone Islands on the north, aflfords a good and nearly unobstructed passage, with good water. There is a good channel, though unsafe for strangers, from the east- ward, between Cross Island and the main laud, the outer entrance being between The Old Man and Wash Island. Cross Island, on the east side of the entrance to Machias Bay, is a remarkable looking island, crowned with a thick growth of sickly and stunted flr. A reef makes out from its southwestern end about IJ miles in a westerly direction ; otherwise the southern and western shores are remarkably bold and steep-to. Libby Islands, forming the western side of the main entrance to Machias Bay. consist of two rocky islands, which, at low water, are nearly joined by the intervening reefs. The larger (western island) is entirely bare of trees, but has two houses on its summit, near its north- ern end. The eastern islet has a few dead flr and spruce near its north- ern end, but is otherwise rocky and bare of vegetation. Stone Island, about one mile to the northward and westward of Libby Islands, is a barren, rocky island of moderate height, covered with a thick growth of small flr, except at its southern end, where is a remarkable round bluff head with a white face, called Stone Head. Yellow Island, on the west side of the channel to the upper bay, is remarkable for being composed of nearly white rocks. At its eastern end is a high head called Y'ellow Ilead, which is bare except on top, where grow a few stunted flr trees. 26 MACHIAS BAY. T«i?T- ?•*• ^''"^ J"''^ ^"^ **•« northward and westward of Yellow Island, IS made conspicuous by two round bare rocky heads risVnrfrom he beach, the northern of which is high and precipi'Lus the outlern oases, ihe rest of the island is low and rock fringed excent »t it- northern end, where there is a grove of small fir ^ Chances Island, on the eastern side of the channel into the upper bay, IS a round, wooded island of moderate height. Averys Rock, lying exactly in the middle of the channel to th« anHr t" '"'"; '"'■''^^"•^' '^^« "'^ ^««^^' '-^^""^ 2S ?ern height ward it is aZ T "w" "''' '''' ^"'^ ^«"'^ *« P'^^^ ^o the east- ward. It IS always steered for in coming up the bay erlffnd^^SHl"i'«"'P'r''"' ^*'' '^"^ ^^^^' ^""^^^ Wuff head at its east- Smin of the f 1 h"^ "^r^' '""^ *" ^'« «'^^««' «"^^ ^^^^^ i« ^ small group ot the trees on the eastern end of the head. Round Island is rocky and of moderate height, and is covered with a thick growth of spruce and fir. Its eastern end is a ro^d iTredp? tons head, also thickly wooded. ' '''^^'^'P*- Holmes Bay, a wide and deep bay just to the northward of Spragues Neck ,s so obstructed as to make directions useless. It is never uZ except by the small fishing boats belonging there. Sanborns Cove, to the northward of Larrabees Cove, from which t ,s separated by Birch Point, is a large and deep cove, affirdrglxcel- lent anchorage for coasters in from 2 to 3 fathom , water Machias IWver, the entrance to which lies between Birch Point ou the west and Holmes Point, the next point west from Long Po h,t "s difficult of navigation and unsafe for strangers without a pilSt. ' iulwf^ufa'^H"' '" '"''"'"' l^^rbor of refuge, with good anchorage H from 3 to fathoms water, makes oif from the western side of Machias Bay, with ,ts entrance between Bar Island ou the north and Bucks Head on the south, and which is about 300 yards wide Bucks Head is a thinly wooded head of moderate height, descend-' hea 1 on that side will be found very abrupt and bold. A small rocky itLvL^iroroirr s. "-" "'^ - "- °'- ""- ^-'- - ''• "» Bar Island, a high rocky island covered with small pine and spruce rees, has very precipitous faces, except at its southeas ern end, where It descends into a low, rocky point. nff^r^'^^M**^ ^*^' "" ^^*"**'""' nnobstrufited cove with deep water, makes w!r :; Po'irof T"'' of Machias Bay about 1^ milel to .ui JZ waul of loint ot Mam, extending in a northerly directiou about J m LITTLE MACHIAS BAY. 2T ird of Yellow 8 rising from the southern fv about their >xcept at its to the upper inual to the t in height, I to the east- is excelleut the coasters It Island on 1 at its east- 'e is a small jvered with nd, precipi- >f Spragues never used 'rom which ding excel- h Point ou g Point, is ot. anchorage i)f Machias iind Bucks ', descend- I arbor, the lall rocky >of it, lies nd spruce ud, where i^'3r, makes iUo liorth- I about ^ mile. It is unfortunately unprotected from southerly and southeasterly winds. If obliged to anchor in this bay, vessels should lie in close udder the eastern shore where a small cove makes in, affording good shelter from easterly and southeasterly winds. Tides.— It is high water, full and change, in Machias Bay at lOh. 47 m. Mean fise and fall is 18 feet. Little Machias Bay. — Just to the eastward of Machias Bay, and separated from it by a promontory averaging about 1 J miles in breadth, Little Machias makes in about 2J miles to the northward. Its breadth varies from f mile at its mouth, to 1^ near its head. It is of little importance, although it has good water, as its navigation is rendered dangerous by the ledges and rocks off its mouth, and it is open to south- erly and southeasterly winds. The entrance lies betweeii Dennisons Point on the east, and Davis Point on the west, but the channel is much obstructed and very unsafe for strangers. When in the bay the best anchorage will be found on the western shore in from 2 to 5 fath- oms, but it is unsafe ground on account of being open to the southward. Ice. — Little Machias Bay is usually closed to navigation during the winter, and in severe winters remains closed from December to April. For ice in Machias Bay, see "Ice in Englishman Bay." Little River. — Two miles to the eastward of Little Machias Bay lies the entrance to Little Ei^er, which forms one of the best and most fre- quented harbors of refuge between Englishman Bay and Eastport. The Coast between Little Machias Bay and Little River runs in a general ENE. and WSW. direction, and is generally high, rocky, bar- ren, and steep-to. Little River has a length from its entrance to the head of the river of IJ miles, having a general westerly direction, but is navigable only to the town of Cutler on its northern bank and just above its mouth. It affords excellent anchorage for vessels in all winds, in from 2 to 5 fathoms, with a bottom of stiff" gray mud. Little River Island lies in the middle of the entrance to Little River. It is small and rocky, and is covered with a thick growth of stunted fir. Little River Entrance lies between Eastern Knubble ou the north and Little River Head ou the south. There are two channels ; one be- tween Eastern Knubble and Little River Island, called the Main Chan- nel, and one between the island and Little River Head called the West- ern Channel. The latter is shoal, but has no obstructions. Eastern Knubble is a high, precipitous, rocky head, covered with a few spruce and fir trees. To the eastward of it will be seen a high, square, tower-like head, called Great Head, which is a good landmark if approaching the coast in tiiick weather and the lighthouse can not be seeii. Little River Head, forming the southwestern side of the entrance to Little River is of moderate height. With the exception of its northern 'if 28 LITTLE RIVER — PA8SAMAQU0DDY BAY. bluft", which is wooiled with a small growth of tir, the surface has been cleared aud the stumps of trees left standing. These stumps serve to mark the head with certainty, as thoy have become so whitened by exposure as to present the appearance of grave- stones. On the southern and eastern faces of Little River Head large white spots have been i)aintea on the rock just below the tops of the clitt's to enable vessels to recognize the entrance. The northern banks of the river are all high and rocky, while the southern shores are lower, covered with bushes, and here and there groups of houses close to the shore line. Just to the westward of Eastern Knubble is Eastern Head, high, pre- cipitous, and crowned with trees. About 100 yards to the southward of Eastern Bead, on the eastern shore of the river, is Eastern Head Ledge, to avoid which great care must be takeu when entering by the eastern or main channel. It lies about NW. and SE., is 50 yards long, and uncovers at low spring tides. If entering by the western channel, look out for Long Ledge, making out a considerable distance from the southern shore, opposite Little River Island, aud is for the most part dry at low water. Ice in Little River.— The harbor is unobstructed by ice even in the severest winters, aud is accessible at all times by both sailing and steam vessels. Between Little River and West Quoddy Head the coast has a general NE. and SW. direction, covering about 14 miles. It is generally high, rocky, and barren, and quite bold. The few coves and harbors to be found in this stretch are of no importance whatever as harbors of refuge, being generally badly obstructed by ledges, aud affording pro- tection only from northerly winds. Tides.— It is high water, full and change, at West Quoddy Head at lib. 12 m. ; springs rise 21 feet, neaps 17 feet. Sail Rocks, so called in consequence of their bearing some resem- blance to a ship, lie about J mile S. 41<> E. from the light-house on West Quoddy Head. Outside them to the eastward is a heavy race, so that when passing this locality it would be advisable to keep an offlng from J to § mile from lite rocks. Passamaquoddy Bay is an extensive inlet, about 10 miles deep, common to the State of Maine and New Brunswick. On the western side of the bay is the river St. Croix, being the natural boundary be- tween United States territory and British America. The bay, which is never closed by ice, affords excellent shelter, with a sufficient depth of water for vessels of heavy draft, whilst its waters swarm with tish, comprising herring, cod, and mackerel. Across the entrance of the bay, about 10 miles wide, are numerous islaruls, rocks, and shoals, between which are three channels, viz : the ^fci««,» CAMPOBELLO ISLAND — FRIAR ROAD. 29 :e bas been thoy have ie of grave- large white the cUtt'8 to , while the I aud there 1, high, pre- southward steru Head ring by the yards long, ge, making osite Little even In the iailiug and 8 a general jrally high, bors to be harbors of trdiug pro- ly Head at »me resem- se on West en passing 1^ to § mile ailes deep, lie western iindary be- elter, with its waters numerous is, viz : the southern, the middle or ship channel, and the northern, known as Le- tite passage. The first, barely 200 yards wide across the narrows, is that between Canipobello Island and the mainland to the SW. ; the ship channel lies between Canipobello and Deer Islands, and though the most circuitous, is the broadest, deepest, and best; whilst Letito passage, betweeu Macniaster Island and the Xew Brunswick sliore, is alike narrow and dangerous, being only available with local knowledge and during slack tide. Campobello Island has several fine harbors, especially that of De Lute, on its NW. shore. The island is separated from the mainland by a narrow channel, for which at all times local knowledge is necessary. With the exception of the SW. shore, the salient points of the island are steep-to and may be safely approached. CJn the eastern coast Her- ring Bay, Schooner and Mill Coves are well adapted for temporary anchorage ; but when making for the latter care must be taken to avoid a three-quarter fathom patch about 400 yards off the north shore of the cove. Head Ha: jor is formed between the island of that name and an in- dentation in the land at the NE. end of Campobello Island, and though small, is safe, easy of access, and without detached dangers. De Lute Harbor, on the west side of Campobello Island, is well adapted for anchorage, though care must be taken to avoid Racer Rock, about 200 yards in extent, and with only 9 feet water ; it lies a little to the eastward of the line between Man-of-War Head and the nearest point to the northward, and is about 400 yards distant from both. Strangers should anchor to the westward of the line between the be- fore-mentioned points, or, if wishing to go farther in, the services of a pilot should be obtained. Friar Bay, also on the west side of Campobello Island, is an inden- tation between the village of Welchpool and Friar Head about a mile distant. Here good anchorage may be obtained in about 10 fathoms in the line with Mark Island, just open of Friar Head, and as near as conveni- ent to Welchpool, off which the 5-fathom line is only 100 yards distant. Vessels of moderate draft may lie alongside Queen Wharf. The Main Entrance to the harbor of Eastport is by the ship chan- nel, between Campobello and Deer Islands. The entrance by Quoddy Roads and Lubec Narrows is suitable only for small vessels. Friar Road, known as the summer harbor of Eastport, affords good anchorage for vessels in summer time. The water is deep, however, ranging from 12 to 50 fathoms, except near the shore, and the tide runs strong. The road is also exposed to the full sweep of the NE. winds, and in the winter season, or in time of heavy gales, the anchorage is untenable. Vessels then seek shelter in Eastport Harbor proper, known as Broad Cove, which is commodious, and affords excellent shelter and anchorage. It is perfectly safe for strangers to enter at any time. r f I t I 30 PA88AMAQUODDY BAY. White Horse Island is a bare rocky islet, 68 fo,et high, of a whitish appearance, about 2^ miles N. 29° E. from Campobtllo lighthouse ; and as the small islands in the neighborhood are covered with trees, White Horse Island is easily distinguished and serves as a beacon. East Rock, with only one foot of water, lies about 300 yards off the east end of White Horse Island with the northern tangents of White and White Horse Islands in line. Oampobello lighthouse, open to the northward of White Horse, clears East Rock on its north side; and White Island, open iwuth of White Horse Island, clears the danger on its south side. North Rock, with one foot wat«r, lies N. 27° W. i mile from the west end of White Horse Island, with Adam and Barn Islands appar- ently just touching, and has deep water close around. Casco Island, of an irregular shape, nearly ^ mile in length, lies 8. 85° W. from Campobello lighthouse. Its southern short may be ap- proached to 200 yards, but within it to the westward are two detached ledges, nearly equidistant from the west end of Casco Island, the depth in the channel between, about 600 yards across, being very irregular. The clearing mark to pass westward of these ledges is the renter of White Horse Island, seen between Spruce and Sandy Islands bearing N. 54° E. Gull Rock, of small extent, is always visible, and lies 800 yards N. 57° B. from the NE. point of Gasco Island. This rock may be safely approached to 100 yards, but the NE. point of Oasco Island should not be neared within 300 yards, in order to avoid a rocky ledge. Pope Island, about 300 yards in length, lies nearly in mid-channel between the shores of Campobello and Deer Islands and nearly a mile from Casco Island. In this latter channel is Green Island, as well aA a large ledge which uncovers ; these, with the ledges west of Casco Island, contract the navigable passage to about 400 yards, and thus render it difficult for a stranger. Pope Shoal, a small detached spot with 11 feet water, lies about 200 yards S. 64° E. of the south point of Pope Island. A safe clearing mark is White Horse Island open to the southward of Casco Island. Chocolate Shoal, with 10 feet on it, is of small extent, with deep water close around ; it lies midway between the north point of Pope Island and the south point of Chocolate Cove in Deer Island. Deer Point open west of Indian Island clear of, but close to, this danger on its western side ; whilst the west ends of Bouen and Cherry Islands in line leads between the shoal and Pope Island. Indian Island is narrow and about 1^ miles in length, with an eleva> tion of 90 feet near its north end ; it is partially cleared of wood and may be approached to 300 yards all around. The island lies on the eastern side of the south point of Deer Island, the narrowest part of the channel between the two islands being nearly ^ mile. Vessels to or from Passamaquoddy Bay may pass on either side of Indian Island in deep water. DEER ISLAND — PORT ST. ANDREWS. 31 ;b, of a whitish B^hthouse; and ;h trees, White cou. •0 yards off the feuts of White e Horse, clears 9uth of White mile from the I.slands appar- iD length, lies ort may be ap- I two detached and, the depth ry irregular. ) the renter of lands bearing J 800 yards N. may be safely tnd should not ige. 1 mid-channel nearly a mile id, as well a» a Oasco Island, thus render it lies about 200 L safe clearing 300 Island, mt, with deep point of Pope Island. Deer ;his danger on rry Islands in with an eleva> of wood and id lies on the rowest part of either side of Deer Island is GJ miles in length with an extreme breadth of 2^ miles; it is thickly wooded, and in some parts attains an elevation of 300 feet. From Little Harbor on its eastern shore round by south to Doyle Passage at its northern end the shore is steep-to, and may be ap- proached to 300 yards, with the exceptiou of the northern shore of Nortli Harbor, where a small cluster of rocks lie about that distance off the high-water line; but the remainder of the coast, viz, from Lit- tle Harbor to the point of Deer Island, is studded with dangers, and its navigation should on no account be attempted by strangers, more especially as the ai)proaches are also difficult. Northwest Harbor, on the east coast of Deer Island, is a narrow indentation with deep water, but is only adapted tor small vessels, and even these should moor, as the distance between the 5-fathom lines is only 100 yards. When oft" the entrance of this harbor the center of White Horse Island seen between Spectacle Islands beariugN. 81° B. leads into the anchorage. Little Harbor beiug small and very shallow is only adapted for boats or very small vessels. Clam Cove, on the west side of Deer Island, affords good anchorage with all winds excepting from south to west, in about 9 fathoms, with Floss Island on with rocks oft" North Poiut of the cove, and about equi- distant from the points of the cove and the small islands within. North Harbor, although temporary anchorage may be obtained oft" its entrance in about 10 fathoms midway between the NB. rocks and the SW. poiut of the harbor, it is inferior in every respect when compared with Clam Cove, only IJ miles distant. Port St Andrews.— The town of St. Andrews is situated near the extremity of a promontory forming the eastern point of the river St. Croix. The whole town is commanded by an elevation at the back of the town, on which stands the fort and barracks. The port is a tidal harbor, formed between the town and Navy Isl- and, very limited in extenfand shallow, the deepest water being from 12 to 14 feet at low water, iu a space not exceeding 200 yards in extent; whilst its only channel, with one foot water, is less than 100 yards across at low water. Oft" the south point of the promontory on which the town is built, a rocky ledge— which dries— extends to the southward about J mile, its outer end beiug marked by a wooden beacon which shows above the high-water level from 4 to 5 feet ; this beacon is the type of all the others in the vicinity of the port. Navy Island, upwards of a mile in length and with an extreme breadth of about 600 yards, lies within J mile of the main shore, the in- tervening space — with the exception of the narrow channel alluded to- being occupied by flats of stones and bowlders, which dry at low water extending from the island and main shore. The south end of the island, terminating in an abrupt white cliff. I ! -f ? r t \\ 32 PA88AMAQIJODDY BAY. appears like a wedge, and although only 37 feet high it becomes a con- spicuous object when approaching from the southward or eastward. The SW. side of the island may be neared to 300 yards, b:M from its northern point a spit runs out and is nearly connected with the low- water line of the mainland NVV. of the town. Tongue Shoal is the outer extremity of the shoal ground extending, to the southeastward of St. Andrews Promontory, and at low water dries J mile, its highest part being about 18 feet above low-water springs. A beacon stands near its outer end, from which the east beacon bears N. 83° W. ji mile and the south spar buoy S. 73° W. nearly' a mile. Northwest Shoal.— This danger, about 300 yards in extent, dries from one to 3 feet at low water, and from the beacon which marks its center the NW. end of Navy Island bears S. 72° E., a long j^ mile, and the north spar buoy is in line with the Roman Catholic church. Tides.— It is high water, full and change, at Port St. Andrews at 10th, 50m.; springs rise 24 to 26 feet and neaps 20 to 22 feet. The main stream of flood sets from between Grand Manan Islands and the coast of Maine in a direct line towards Cape Lepreau, and the ebb in a contrary direction ; whilst the western branch, after passing along the shore of Campobello, is divided at its northern point, a por- tion taking an easterly trend, whilst the remainder passes into Passa- maquoddy Bay through the various channels. In the Main or Ship Channel the stream attains in some places a velocity of nearly 5 miles an hour, but after passing Deer Island it becomes lost in the wide ex- panse of the bay, and is scarcely perceptible until it enters the Hvpt St. Croix, where it runs about 2 miles an hour, and increases its rate in the branch of the river leading to St. Stephen to between 3 and 4 knots. Directions.— The usual difficulties attending navigation are much increased in the Bay of Pundy, where the mariner must expect to en- counter frequent fogs of long duration, rapid and uncertain tides, and experience a difficulty in obtaining anchorage on account of the depth of water; these causes render the most unremitting attention, neces- sary when frequenting this locality, in order to avoid the numerous dangers which mark the approaches to the bay. Vessels bound to ports on the northern shore of the bay are recom- mended to use the channel west of Grand Manan Island rather than the passage on the eastern shore, for the coast of Manan is not only bold and without off-lying dangers, but during the summer months the atmosphere is goerally clear on the United States shore, whilst the coast of Nova Scotia and the greater part of the Bay of Fundy are enveloped in fog. Vessels bound to Passamaquoddy Bay, after passing through the Grand Manan Channel, should keep a .uoderatc. distance from the east- ern shore of Campobello Island, and after rounding the northern point i I -'"m''^* miv ' m i i^u m Am:^~ m iS im DIRECTIONS — CHAMCOOK HARBOR. 33 iccomes a coii- i or eastward. , b^it from its with tbe low- lul extending, at low water )ve low-water hicli tbe east oy S. 730 W. extent, dries [icb marks its i]g ^ mile, and burch. t. Andrews at feet. lauan Islands )reau, and tbe after passing I point, a por- es into Passa- Main or Sbip learly 5 miles tbe wide ex- ters tlip rivPT Bases its rate ween 3 and 4 ion are much expect to en- ain tides, and of tbe depth ention. neces- trbe numerous ay are recom- 1 rather than n is not only )r months the •e, whilst tbe )f Fundy are through Ihe rom the east- ortbern point steer to pass midway between the western shore of tbe islands and Gasco, Pope, and Indian Islands, taking care on approaching Pope Island to keep White Horse !••' jd open east of Casco Island, in order to avoid Pope Shoal. Having rounded Cherry Island, steer for a mid-channel course be- tween Deer Point and Dog Island, iiud after passing Kendall Head, tbe NE. point of Moose Island, either borrow on the Deer Island shore or bring tbe English redoubt over Eastport in line with Kendall (lead in order to clear Floss Ledge; a closer mark to clear tbe same ledge is Point Pleasant Cburch, apparently touching the eastern tangent of Pleasant Island. Beyond this there are no dangers until approach- ing Navy Island, off Port St. Andrews; and in case of necessity good anchorage may be obtained in any part of Passamaquoddy Bay, in muddy bottom. The best anchorage outside Port St. Andrews is to tbe NW. of Navy Island, in about 10 fathoms, clay, with the block house on Joe Point bearing N. 2° W. and the NW. beacon in line with the north eud of Navy Island S. 69° E. When approaching the NW. shoal keep the south point of Navy Island well open to the SW. shore of the island until the NW. beacon is in line with the Kirk spire bearing N. 51° E.^ or do not shoal less than 10 fathoms. River St Croix. — Abreast Joe Point the river is nearly a mile across, and thence it runs iu a N. 30° W. direction about 7 miles, where it turns abrni^tly to the westward, leading to Calais. Dochet Island Shoal extends about a mile to the southward of Dochet Island. Two red-spar beacons mark this danger, tbe one on its southern extremity and tbe other off the east end of Dochet Island ; both beacons should be left to the westward. As vessels navigating the river St. Croix should always be in charge of a pilot, it is unnecessary to describe its shores in detail. Chamcook Harbor lies on the eastern side uf the promontory on which the town of St. Andrews stands, and is formed between Minister Island and the mainland. Tbe entrance on the north side of tbe island, though marked by buoys, is only about 150 yards broad between the rocky ledges on either side of the entrance ; and having as little as 9 feet wate i only available for vessels of large draft at a certain time of tide, although when inside there is good anchorage in a limited space in 7 to 8 fathoms. Dock. — At the head of an inlet on the north side of the harbor is a wet dock sufficiently large to admit vessels of 31 feet beam, and a vessel drawing 16 feet may pass over the sill of the dock. Hardwood and Hospital Islands lie to the eastward of Cham- cook Harbor and off the entrance to Bocabec Bay ; togtuiher they occupy a mile in length nearly east and west, and within them on their northern siarently touching the north end of Hardwood Island. At low water a shoal extends 250 yards NE. from the light-house on Mijic Bluff. In the bays and amongst the islands anchorage is to be found, but this locality is only frequented by vessels taking in cargoes, and on such occ 4Hioiis they should be under the charge of a native pilot. L'Etang Hnrbor aff.)rd8 most excellent anchorage under all circuui. stances; it has two entrances, and area sufficiently large to accommo- date a large number of vessels and is always open during the winter months, though loose ice is occasionally to be met with in the narrows, but never in sufficient quantities to prevent ingress or fjgress. The depth of water in L'Etang Harbor— as well as in the adjoining anchorage known as Bliss Harbor— is sufflciontforves'^els of the great- est draft, whilst the tenacity of the holding ground is unusually great. As the rise and fail of tide is great vessels should moor slack. The town stands on a tongue of land known as L'Etang peninsula ; supplies can not be obtained, the principal trade being in making casks for fish. Bliss Island, off the entrance of L'Etang Harbor, is IJ miles in length, about 50 feet high, and very irregular in outline ; to the north- ward of the island, between it and Cailitt' Island, is Bliss Harbor, a safe and commodious anchorage, where vessels may ride securely with every wind. Off" the western end of Bliss Island a rocky tongue extends 300 yards from the shore, and off its northern end very shoal water runs off" to nearly the same distance. Mink Island, a small rocky islet about 70 yards in extent and 20 feet high, lies about 200 yards off the NE. end of Bliss Island ; it is moder- ately steep-to on its northern side, but should not be approached nearer than 200 yards on its eastern side. Mare Rock, which dries at half tide, lies 400 yards off the eastern shore of Bliss Island, and is all but connected with the rocky spur extending to the 8E. of Mink Island. Colt Rock also uncovers at half tide, and lies 200 yards south of the Mare Rock, and about 400 yards from Bliss Island. The Colt and Mare Rocks are both steep-to on their eastern sides; there is no avail- able passage within them to the westward. Green Island, a small islet about 50 yards in extent and about 20 feet high, stands near the extremity of a rocky ledge extending from the SE, side of Bliss Island, and forms an excellent mark tor clear- ing the ledge on which it stands ; it should not be passed within 200 yards on its eastern side. Pain Island, on the NW. side of the western entrance into Bliss har- bor, is about 400 yards in extent, 109 feet high, and very steep-to on its Bontheru side. Man-of-War Rock.— The only danger to be avoided when using the western entrance is an extensive ledge 400 yards in length, and its L'ETANO HARBOK. S5 B north eiul of • liglit-liouae ou ! found, but this N, and on such |)ilot. nder all circum- [;e to accouuno- ing the winter in the narrows, igress. I the adjoining els of the great- musually great, lack. The town I. ; supplies can sks for fish, is 1^ miles in i ; to the north- s Harbor, a safe irely with every tends 300 yards ter runs ott' to tent and 20 feet d ; it is moder- >roached nearer off the eastern he rocky spur yards south of The Colt and ere is no avail - and about 20 extending from mark tor clear- sed within 200 into Bliss har- steep-to on its rhen using the length, and its highest part, which uncovers at half-tide, lies one-third of the way acro8H from Maii-of-War Island to liliss Island ; this ledge narrows the main channel on Bliss Island side to about 200 yards, and great pre- caution is necessary when this passage is taken by a stranger, as the leading marks through are not very direct. The center of Mink Island apparently touching the northwestern point of Bliss Island leads through in mid-obannel, and by keepingWhite Horse Island shut in by theliigh- water mark of Bliss Island leads clear of the ledge ; the Bliss Island shore may be ajjproached close- to. There is a passage carrying 4 fathoms to the northward of Man-of- War Island and Boat Bock which may be used by vessels of light draft, and a narrow channel with 3^ fathoms between Man-of-War Island and Rock. The south 2)oint of Adam Island, seen midway be- tween the high water of the Pain Island and the islet next to the NE., leads through this latter channel. Pea Island, nearly 200 yards in length and about 25 feet high, lies close off a peninsula on the eastern side of the eastern entrance into L'Etang harbor ; rocks dry off to the SW. 100 yards, and at the dis- tance of 250 yards SE. of the island and the same distance from the shore is an isolated low-water rock. Halfoide Rock is very small, and lies 250 yards off the pitch of Deadman Head ; a wide clearing mark is the western end of McCann Island just open of Pea Island. It is marked by a black, spar buf'y. Roaring Bnll, a cluster of low-water rouks which just cover, lie to the NW. of Pea Island nearly 400 yards, and narrow the channel of the eastern entrance between them and Mare Bock to about | mile ; the wharves at the west end of L'Etang harborjust insight west of L'Etang Head clears Roaring Bull cluster on their western side. Ice. — During the depth of severe winters ice has been known to ex- tend down the L'Etang River as far as the south end of the peninsula, bat the broail part of the harbor is never frozen, nor is Bliss harbor. Back Bay is an indentation formed between the west side of Cailiff Island and the main shore, but is not adnpted for anchorage save of a temporary nature. Caili£f Rocks, situated just within the entrance of Back Bay, about one-third of the way across from the western shore, cover at half dide, are detached and about 300 yards in extent. The west end of Bliss Island in line with the south point of Pain Island leads southward, and the east end of Barn Island bearing S. 25° W. leads westward of Cailiff Bocks. Black Bay is an indentation between Pea Point and L'Etang Head, and is moderately steep-to on its northern shore, but rocky spurs dry out SOOyards from the southern shore. Half a mile within the entrance, and in the center of the bay, are two small rocks which dry at three- quarters ebb, and vessels seeking a temporary r^nchorage should avoid approaching too near them. I fi: I i I I 5 f '^ 86 BAY OF FUNDT — NORTH COAST Flea and Man-of-War Islauds apparently all but touching lead into the bay clear of danger, and wben theSE. point of Bliss Island appears to toueii tliesniall islet off tb« south point of Black Bay anchor in about 6 fatboins. Deadman Bay, on the eastern side of L'EtanK harbor, is o. en to the SW., and is only adapted for temporary anchorage with northerly or easterly winds. Directions.— Western entrance.— Being to the NE. of White Horse Island, do not shut in Mascabin Point with Pain Island until the south end of McCann Island is in lino with the N\V. high-water mark of Bliss Island, in order to avoid the rocky spur off the western point of the latter, and then steer for Man-of-War Island until the middle of Mink Island is in line with the NW. point of Bliss Island, bearing N. 53° E., thence proceed with these marks in line nearly in mid-channel south of Man-of-War Rock, which will have been passed when Boat Rock is seen open eastward of Man-of-War Island. After passing Manof-War Rock anchorage may be selected either on the north or south sides of Bliss Harbor, as moat convenient, in order to be beyond the influence of the tides. If on north side, a good position is in 6 or 7 fathoms, with Mink Island in line with the west end of Pea Island and the south end of Pain Island just shut in behind the north end of Man of- War Island. On the south side, select a berth about mid-channel at the entrance of Fisherman Cove, in about 8 fathoms, with Pain Island just in line with, or shut in by, the west point of the cove. If bound to L'Etang Harbor, after passing Man-of-War Rock, steer for Flea Island until Pain and Man-of-War Islands are apparently touching, and with these marks in line proceed between Flea Island and the Rocky shoal off the north end of Bliss Island. McCanu Island may be approached close-to on the southern and eastern aides, but care must be taken to avoid a low- water rock off its NE. shore, and this may be done by borrowing on L'Etang Head, which is steep-to. After passing this latter danger select an anchorage where conven- ient; a good position is about mid-channel abreast Little Sturgeon Cove, care being taken to keep clear of a rocky patch 200 yards off the northern shore. Eastern Entrance.— Bring Jail Island, which lies oft" the town, in line with the east end of McCann Island, bearing N. 29° W. ; this mark will lead through in mid-channel clear of all dangers up to McCann Island, after which proceed as before directed; or bring the wharfs at the west end of the town of L'Etang Head, bearing N. 23° W., and these marks will alao lead through in deep water on the eastern side of the channel up to L'Etang Head; after which proceed to the anchorage as previously directed. If wishing to anchor in Bliss Harbor, steer with either of the forego- ing markf^ on, and when Pain Island is seen open north of Mink Island HEAVER HARUOIt — MACES HAY. 37 h\u^^ lead into Hlaiid appears iiuhor in about , is (>, iMi to the li northerly or )f White Horse until the Houth water mark of •stern point of the middle of ud, bearing N. in mid-chaunel sed when Boat selected either convenient, in •th side, a good ) with the west shut in behind , select a berth ,6, in about 8 1 by, the west ar Bock, steer ire apparently Flea Island ilcCanu Island sides, but care , and this may o. wliere conven- ttle Sturgeon yards off the the town, in .V. ; this mark ip to McOann the wharfs at 23° W., and jastern side of the anchorage of the forego- f Mink Island steer for Flea Island until Pain and Manof-War Islands are appar- ently toucliing, bearinj^ S. M^ W.; thenue steer with these niark.s on, and select an anchoni;;e where convenient according to previous direc- tions. Beaver Harbor, i of a mile broad between the entrance points and upwards of a mile «leep, is open to the southward, and can not be deemed safe during strong wituls from that cpiarter. Vessels should pass in and anchor on the western shore, in order to avoid a patch with 2^ fathoms near the center of the harbor. Small vessels may anchor in a bay on the western side of the harbor opposite the village in 2^ fathoms clay, where they will be almost landlocked. The vicinity of Bliss and L'Etang Harbors will prevent Beaver Har- bor being frequented, save as a place of temporary anchorage. Anchorage. — There is guod anchorage betwv^eu the lighthouse and a buoy, bearing N. 58° E. from it. Maces Bay is an extensive bight, lying between Seeley Point and Poiut Lepreau, the latter being distant from the former nearly 8 miles 8. 85° B., and from the line between the two entrance points the bay is nearly 5 miles deei>, the coast line being broken into a series of smaller indentations, all of which afford anchorage for vessels taking in cargo, but only during flue weather, as the entire bay, with the ex- ception of Seeley Cove, on its western side, is exposed to the full force of southerly and southwesterly winds. Seeley Cove. — The coast between Beaver Harbor and Seeley Point may bid safely approached to a distance of 400 yards. Seeley Point may also be rounded close to, and a good anchorage from westerly and south- westerly winds may be obtained on the south side of the cove in about 5 fathoms. Care must be taken to avoid the northern point of the cove, from n'hence low-water rocks extend nearly J of a mile in a southerly direction. Red Head, a clitfy wooded point on the western side of Maces Bay, lies N. 01° B. 3 miles from Seeley Point, the intervening coast being irregular, and, in addition to Seeley Cove, forming several small inden- tations; the cove uex*; west from the head being clear of danger, with a moderate depth of w.iter, is well adapted for temporary anchorage. Mink Bay, on the vestern side of Maces Bay, lies between lied Head and Cranberry Point, and atfords temporary anchorage on the NE. and NVV. sides of Mink Island. Pope Logan Islet, 4 "I'l^ iQ length and 65 feet high, lies to the eastward of Hed Head, and from its northern poiut a rocky ledge ex- tends 300 yards, leaving a channel of the same breadth with 2 fathoms water between it and the lower water of the mainland. From the south point a rocky tongue extends to the SW. nearly in the direction of Red Head. Mink Ledge, an extensive rocky patch to the eastward of the above islet, has a small portion on its eastern end which never covers, and 0» BAY OF FUNDY — NORTH COAST. thus forms a natural beacou ; it lies with the southern point of Pope Islet in line with the tangent of Red Head, and from it a series of rocky patches extend ^ luile in aN. 43° W. direction. Mink Island, about J mile across and 104 feet high, lies i mile to the westward of Cranberry Point and the same distance from the shore of Mink Bay, the greatest depth in the latter channel being 3 fathoms. Outside the island a cluster of detached shoals extend J mile to the southward, whilst off its western point there is a detached ledge, which dries at the distance of J mile in the direction of Mink Ledge. Lepreau Bay, on the northeastern side of Maces Bay, lies between Cranberry Point and the shore north of Point Lepreau, and runs in to the northward to a shallow bight, where small vessels occasionally anchor beyond the reach of any very heavy sea. The only danger on the western sideof the bay is off Cranberry Point, from whence a clus- ter of low-water and sunken rocks extend out 300 yards. The Brothers are two small islets connected at low water, and form the eastern side of the entrance of Lepreau Bay. The larger island is 78 feet high, and is distant from the nearest part of Cranberry Point J mile. Lepreau Ledges extend from about a mile below Lepreau Basin to the SW. for a distance of 2 miles, and terminate in a point, which dries 18 feet at low water, at a distance of a mile from the eastern shore of Maces Bay. A good clearing mark for all the dangers on the eastern side of the bay is the tangent of Lepreau Bay, opposite Stay Point, seen just open west of the Brothers. Tides.— It is high water, full and change, in Lepreau Bay, llh. 18m.; springs rise 24J feet, neaps 21 feet. Directions.— Vessels from the westward intending to use any of the anchorages in Maces Bay should avoid shutting in the northern point of Seeley Cove with Red Head until past Pope Logan Islet, and (If making for the western side of Mink Bay) when Notch Hill bears N. 2° B. steer for it, and by so doing the dangers inside Mink Ledge and off Mink Island will be avoided, and an anchorage may be selected in about 5 fathoms, with Point Lepreau shut in by Mink Island, or oft' the western bight in 3 fathoms, with Red Head midway between Pope Logan Islet and the western shore, and Cranberry Point just shut in by the south end of Mink Island. If intending to anchor on the NE. side of Mink Island continue to keep the north point of Seeley Cove just opt'ii of Red Head until Notch Hill is seen over the east end of Mink Island, when all the shoal water off Mink Island will have been cleared; when the sawmill bears north, steer for it, and anchor in about 5 fathoms, with Red Head shut in by Mink Island or in 3J fathoms, with Cranberry Point in line with the middle of the larger of the Brothers, and the middle of Pope Logan Island in line with the west end of Mink Island. If making for Lepreau Bay, continue with the north point of Seeley MACES BAY MUSQUASH HARBOR. 39 a point of Pope 1 series of rocky ies ^ mile to the om the shore of oing 3 fathomsi. d i mile to the led ledge, which Ledge. ay, lies between >aa, and runs in els occasionally only danger on 1 whence a olus- s. water, and form larger island is an berry Point J epreau Basin to »int, which dries eastern shore of } on the eastern jite Stay Point, Bay, lib. 18m.; use any of t he northern point I Islet, and (if II bears N. 2° E. Ledge and off be selected in k Island, or off ' between Pope just shut in by ind continue to jad until Notch ;he shoal water sawmill bears ith Red Head y Point in line niddie of Pope point of Seeley Cove just open of Red Head until Notch Hill comes over the east end of Mink Island, thence steer for Stay Point, and when Cranberry Point and the north end of Mink Island are in line the shoal ground off the former will have been passed, and a course should be steered into the bay, bearing in mind that the square house at the head of the bay open west of Stay Point clears Hunter's Patch, southward of Stay Point, after which anchorage may be selected where most convenient in about 2^ fathoms. A temporary anchorage for large vessels may be obtained in about 5 fatho.nis, with the north end of the larger Brother bearing S. 33° W., and Cranberry Point in line with the south end of Mink Island. Dipper Harbor affords good shelter for small vessels, with winds from S\V. round by north to cast; vessels should anchor rather on the western shore, as some ledges extend off" the eastern side. Plumper Rock, lies about midway between Point Lepreau and Dip- per Harbor, but close inshore, and m.iy be avoided by keeping J mile, off shore. Little Dipper Harbor should not be attempted without a pilot, as there are numerous dangers to be avoided. The place is only adapted for small craft. Chance Harbor is about J mile broad at the entrance, by about a mile in depth in a northerly direction, and is easy of access. A flat rock, which dries at low water, lies lOU yards east of the western point, and may be cleared on its northern side by keeping Beldon house (near the beach at the head of the cove) open north of the south point of Beldon Cove. Further in, uea-ly in the middle of the harbor, there is another rock, which dries at half tide. Beldon house seen open south of the north point of the cove leads south of this rock. The best anchorage for small vessels is, in about 2J or 3 fathoms, in Beldon cove; but this harbor, like the two former, affords but little shelter from winds from SE. round by south to SVV. Little Chance Harbor is a convenient place for small vessels to an- chor when waiting tor the tide, but affords no shelter whatever with the wind between SE. and SW. It is about J mile wide between the points of entrance, and about H mile broad in a northerly direction. The western point of entrance should not be approached on its eastern side nearer than 400 yards, but the eastern point may be rounded at 200 yards distance. Little Musquash Harbor, in all respects, is similar in character to and adapted to answer the same purpose as Little Chance Harbor. The entrance is about ^ mile broad ; but a mid-channel position should be maintained, as rocks dry off from either shore a considerable distance to which no good clearing marks can be given. Musquash Harbor, situated 2 miles east of Little Musquash Har- bor, is nearly a mile broad at the entrance, and about 2 miles deep, though but little of this space is available for vessels of moderate draft. 40 BAY OP FUNDY — NORTH COAST. Hi Musquash Head, on its eastern side, is steep-to and 80 feet high ; but Western Head, which attains an elevation of 139 feet, has a small detached rock, with only 3 feet of water, about 100 yards from its northern horn. Within this horn, to the westward about 400 yards, a rocky spur extends in a northeasterly direction for the distance of 300 yards. This harbor should be carefully avoided by large vessels, excepting as a temporary anchorage, though vessels in charge of a pilot might in case of necessity obtain shelter in the 5-fathom hole, about 2i miles up the river. Split Rock, nearly a mile to the eastward of Musquash Harbor, is 35 feet high. The Coast — From Split Rock to Negro Head the coast is bold, with higli rocky clifts covered with wood; and from Negro Head the laud to (he northward forms a bay, in which there is good anchorage for a small craft or vessels waiting tide. Partridge Island light-house is dis- tant 5J miles N. 47° E. from Negro Head ; and by steering on that course from a small offing off the head a vessel will pass outside Meog- enes Islands, which lie midway between and clear of danger. Whistling buoy.— A black whistling buoy is moored in about 16 fathoms off Black Point, with Partridge Island light bearing N. 26o W., distant 3^ miles. St. John Harbor lies at the head of the bay, into which falls St. John River, the largest in New Brunswick. The bay— upwards of 3 miles deep—lies between Meogenes Island and Mispeck Point, the latter, being distant from the former 5 miles N. 87° E. The harbor is safer, commodious, and always accessible; and in consequence of the great rise and fall of tide, added to the velocity of the stream, its navigation • even during the winter months is never impeded by ice. The soundings for several miles to the southward of Partridge Is- land range from 7 to 15 fathoms, and the bottom being muddy is ad- minibly adapted for anchoring whilst waiting for the tide. On the bar of the main channel, east of Partridge Island, the depth is about 2^ fathoms ; but within the harbor off the city there is anchorage in from 7 to 20 fathoms. A breakwater runs out in an easterly direction from the south end of the city peninsula for the purpose of protecting the harbor from the violence of the sea during the prevalence of southerly gales. The city of St. John, the most important in— though not the capital of —New Bruuswick,contains a population of about 50,000, and is regularly laid out on the rugged and uneven ground of a rocky peninsula project- ing into the harbor at the entrance of the river St. John, and from the sea presents an imposing appearance. On the western side of the entrance stands the town of Carletou included in tlie municipality; and a little more than a mile above the city are the falls, a narrow channel about 80 yards wide by about 400 ST. JOHN HARBOR. 41 80 feet high; 3t, has a small artls from its ut 400 yards, a listauce of 3U0 els, excepting pilot might iu ut 2J miles up Harbor, is 35 It is bold, with [ ead the laud ichorage for a t-bouse is dis- ering on that outside Meog- iger. d in about 16 iug N. 260 W., hich falls St. upwards of 3 int, the latter, vrbor is safer, e of the great its navigation - Partridge Is- muddy is ad- I. On the bar b is about 2^ 9rage in from i south end of bor from the es. the capital of d is regularly isula project- and from the 1 of Garletou le above the >y about 400 in length, where at low water the level of the river water is from 11 to 15 feet above the sea, and, as the ordinary tides flow from 23 to 27 feet, tho sea level at high water is from 8 to 12 feet higher than the waters of the river. Thus there are two falls during every tide, viz, one outward and one in- ward, and vessels can only pass when the waters of the ocean and the ri verare on a level,and this occurs only for the space of about 10 minutes during each ebb and flow of the tide; at all other times it is either im- passable or extremely dangerous. During great freshets, which gener- ally huppen between the beginning of April and the middle of May from the melting of the snow, the falls are absolutely impassable to vessels bound up the river, as the tide does not rise to the river level. There is sufficient depth of water for large vessels as far as the falls, and beyond them the river St. John is navigable tor small vessels as far as Fredericton, the capital of the province. Immense quantities of timber are rafted down from the forests of the interior to the city of St. John, which is also an entrepdt of the agricultural and mineral products of a wide extent of country. Anchorage.— The best berth for vessels of war in St. JohnHarbor is oi; '■^r west side, a little north of Sandy Point ; in this part a vessel will bi Co "f the strength of the tides, and will not swing to the flood until the . c 1 the harbor has risen to the level of the water in St. John Rivt. . »oout 3 hours after the commencement of the flood. In this berth ihe traffic of steam vessels and rafts will be avoided. Time Signal.— A time ball, painted black,with a gold band, is dropped daily, except on Sundays, at the observatory on the northern tower of the new custom house, 112 feet above the ground and 123 feet above high water. The ball is hoisted half mast at Oh. 46m. p. m., close up at Oh. 59m. and dropped at Ih. Om. p. m. according to the mean time kept at St. John. Fog.— From observations taken from 1865 to 1885 it appears that the fog signal at the entrance to St. John Harbor was sounded during a total average annual period of 180 hours in July and the same time in August ; during 144 hours in June and 96 hours in September. In the winter months, from October to April, the average time the signal was in operation was about 70 hours for each month, including the time sounded during falling snow. Ice.— The navigation of St. John Harbor has never been known to be impeded by ice, nor does field ice drift into the entrance of the harbor from tlie Bay of Fundy. Coal.— About 8,000 tons are usually kept in stock. Vessels are coaled slowly by lighters, but withont interruption from weather. Railway and Telegraph — St. John is connected with Halifax and Quebec by the Intercolonial Railway ; with Fredericton,New Brunswick, and the United States by other lines; a railway is also in course of construction which will give a shorter route to Quebec than the Inter- 42 BAY OF rUNDY — NORTH COAST. i /I colonial Railway. St. John is connected by telegraph with all parts of Canada and the United States. Steam Communication. — St. John has constant steam communica- tion with the United States. The United States is represented by a consul and vice-consul. Partridge Island.— Partridge Island is about \ mile in length and 80 feet higii ; it is distant i mile from Negro Point on the mainland, there being as little as 4 feet in mid-channel between. Should the bell buoy off the NE. end of Partridge Island be gone, Wesley chapel, in line with the middle of the stone barracks, bearing N. 12° W., clears the foul ground off Partridge Island. Charges — Harbor dues for vessels of 500 tons, and upwards $3.50, and 25 cents for every 50 tons such vessel may measure over that. Pilotage, inward, varies between $1.25 and $2.80 per foot; outward, $1.60 to $2.50, according to distance. Anchorage dues, from 50 to 100 tons $1, and 25 cents for each 50 tons additional. Health fees, 2 cents per ton. Ballast, discharging, per ton, 40 cents. Ballast, free on board, per ton, 80 to 90 cents. Cost of water, 1 cent per gallon ; cost of vessel stores are regulated by the market at New York. Towage for vessel of 250 tons $15; $5 for each 100 tons or part of same additional. Shag Rocks, which dry at low water, are J mile in extent, and their outer end lies about 4 mile from the shore between Sheldon and Negro Points; near their outer end a small rock dries 6 feet at low water. These rocks can scarcely be described as dangerous, inasmuch as they lie within the lino joining Sheldon Point and the north end of Part- ridge Island. Tides.— It is high water, full and change, in St. John Harbor at llh. 21m. ; springs rise 27 feet, neaps 23 feet. The great volume of water which runs through St. John Harbor dur- ing the fresliets from the melting of the ice and snow in April and May causes a continued superficial ebb, the velocity of which varies from 2J to 5 knots; underneath this outset— sometimes 5 fathoms deep— the tides ebb and How regularly. Abreast the city the tidal stream runs in an hour after the time of high water by the shore, in cousequeuoe of the difference of level already allude I to; here also as a rule the flood is weak, but the ebb runs rapidly down past Meogenes Island, Directions. — Unless in case of necessity strangers should never attempt to enter St. John Harbor without the assistance of a pilot, for the narrow and intricate channel is bordered with sharp rocks, and numerous accideuts have occurred to vessels attempting the navigation without local knowledge. To enter the harbor on the east side of Partridge Island, steer so as to pass close to the eastward of the bell buoy off that island in order to clear the ledges, and when Carleton Church comes in line with Cliff end steer for them until Stone Church, with a conspicuous square tower, comes in line with the end of the breakwater, bearing N. 15° VV., ■* ■■ 8T, JOHN DIRECTIONS — PILOTS. 4S h all parts of I commuuica- lousul. length and 80 linlaud, there ind be gone, icks, bearing jwards $3.50, e over that, ot; outward, :oin 50 to 100 fees, 2 cents "ree on board, cost of vessel } for vessel of lal. int, and their n and Negro t low water, nuch as they jnd of Part- arbor at Uh. Harbor dur- iril and May iries from 2^ IS deep — the stream runs iisequiMioo of ale the flood ind. houhl never f a pilot, for p rocks, aud ) navigation [, steer so as ind in order ne with Oliflf 10 us square g N". 15° VV., and with these marks pass east of the red buoy off Negro Point aud proceeds ou until past the Beacon ligbt-honse, steer up the middle of the harbor, aud anchor oft the wharfs of the city or in the anchorage recommended for menof-war. Should the ebb have commenced it would be improper to attempt to gain the harbor until the next half flood; under such circumtitances the vessel should remain outside and not attempt to anchor in the channel, where the ebb tide— especially during the freshets in the spring of the year — is so exceedingly rapid as to prevent any anchors holding. Large vessels should not attempt to leave the harbor later than H hours after high water, as it is the latest time that there would be suffi- cient water ou the bar. Pilots are always ou the lookout, and are sometimes fallen in with in the vicinity of Machias Seal Island ; during a fog by tiring a gun occasionally they will generally tind the ship. It is very desirable that vessels should take a pilot before entering St. John Bay, for instance at Point Lepreau, if not farther down, for during thick weather the rapid tides — particularly during the freshets — render the navigation of tiie bay unsafe to a stranger. Stea u tugs are always available off the harbor's mouth, and occasionally off Point Lepreaa. Cape Spencer, a bold headland, from 400 to 600 feet high, with steep rocky cliffs, is thickly wooded, aud lies about 3 miles from Mispeck Point, with a bay between, which only affords shelter witli uortherly winds. In the bay, however, there are several creeks, the largest of which, Ball Creek, about 150 yards broad, enables small vessels to ascend dur- ing the flood and lie aground in safety along the inner side of a small pier. On nearing the entrance of the creek bring the end of tb pier about midway between the two shores, in order to avoid a rocky spur which runs off nearly 200 yards from the eastern point. Black Rock. — Of small size and 10 feet high, lies :ibout ^ mile from Oonley Head, a point in the middle of tlie bay just described ; the rock is steep to all round, without off' lying dangers. The Coast — From Cape Spencer to Cape Enrag6, ou the north side of Chiguecto Channel, the la?:d is bold and thickly wooded, varying in height from 400 to 900 feet, and divided into hills by numerous valleys through which small streams And their way to the B.iy of Fundy. The mouths of these streams are very similar in appearance, being composed of a bar of shingle and gravel across the entrance, leaving a narrow passage at one side through which small vessels may enter at high water, and lay on the mud at low water, generally safe from all winds. Here vessels load with timber sawn by mills near the entrance, from logs brought down the streams. The shore between Cape Spencer and Black River is steep-to, ex- cepting in the immediate vicinity of a point about 3^ miles to the west- 44 BAY OF FUNDY — NORTH COAST. i Jk. ward of Black River, where rocks dry off 200 yards frotu the shore. There are also somo rocks exteudiug 400 yards S. 58° W. from the point next east of Black River. McCoy Head, about 8 miles to the eastward of Gape Spencer, is a rounded point about 200 feet high, and thickly wooded ; the coast be- tween the two points forms a considerable indentation, at the head of which is Black River, which dries across its entrance, but is accessible at certain times of tide for small vessels, though it is said to be unsafe at high water during heavy southwest gales. Sisters consist of a small cluster of rocks about f nile from the shore near Entmersou Creek, and about 2^ miles to the westward of McCoy Head. The outer rocks of the cluster uncover at 2 hours ebb, but the inner rock, about 200 yards further in shore, only shows at low water. There is deep water between these rocks and the shore. Red Head is composed of red cliffs about 50 feet high. Just within McCoy Head to the eastward, good, temporary anchorage may be ob- tained from northerly and westerly winds, in 5 or 6 fathoms, with Rog- ers and Red Heads just in liife. The entrance of Tynemouth Creek lies about a mile to the eastward of Red Head. Rogers Head is about 400 feet high, thickly wooded and steep-to, with high perpendicular cliff's on its western side, and a steep slope to the southward. Quaco Head, 250 feet high, is about 2 miles to the eastward of Rog- ers Head, being separated therefrom by a valley clear of trees, and by a sharp trend of the land to the northward which forms the western side of Quaco B^y. Bell buoy. — A bell buoy, painted black, is moored in 14 fathoms, southeastward of the shoal ground off Quaco Head, with Quaco Head light-house bearing N. 42° W., distant about ^ mile. This buoy is re- moved during the winter months. Quaco Shoal, on which there is as little as 9 feet water, is about a mile in length NNE. and SSW., and occupies a considerable portion of Quaco Bay. A can buoy marks the southern end of the shoal. It is removed and, if possible, replaced by a spar buoy during winter. Tides. — It is high water, full and change, in Quaco Bay at llh. 35 m. ; springs rise 30 feet, neaps 25 feet. With the exception of the first hour of Hood, the tide, both flood and ebb, sweeps round Quaco Bay, from the eastward, inside Quaco Shoal. Anchorage.— Vessels wishing to obtain temporary anchorage under Quaco Head should — on approaching the light-house from the west- ward — keep McCoy Head open of Rogers Head until the Roman Catholic church tower of Quaco is seen open eastward of the northern cliff' of Quaco Head, in order to clear the outer end of the ledge. There are no good leading marks into the anchorage, which is in 5 or fathoms, mud, with the light-house bearing S. 2° W. distant about ^ mile. The anchorage is unsafe with winds from XE. — round by east — ;'^i l *B^-5fe-j QUACO LODGE — SALISBURY BAY. 45 >ui the shore. W. from the Speucer, is a the coast be- t the head of t is accessible I to be uusafe Tom the shore ird of McCoy 3 ebb, but the at low water. Just withm e may be ob- ns, with Bog- ith Greek lies and steep-to, teep slope to ward of Bog- trees, and by 1 the western 14 fathoms, Quaco Head s buoy is re- r, is about a >Ie portion of shoal. It is iviuter. Bay at llh. ptiou of the ouud Quaco lorage under m the west- the Boman the northern ledge. ich is in 5 or taut about ^ id by east— to south. i\long Quaco Head many vessels are built as' well as in some of the creeks along shore. These and timber are the only exports from this part of the coast. Quaco Ledge is a most dangerous ridge of rugged rocks about J mile in length, witii deep water close to around ; the highest part un- covers half hour after half ebb, and dries 13 feet at low water, and shows a heavy tide rip when covered. This danger lies 8'^ miles S. 57° E. from Quaco lighthouse, and S. 87° W., U^ miles from the western end of Isle Haute. The tidal current runs about 2 knots in the vicinity of this danger. A red b. "I V is moored in 10 fathon" nhopt 200 yards NW. of the ledge. Found Head.— From McCumber Point, on the nortli shore of Quaco Bay, the shore between it and Found Head is clear of danger. Found Head is distinguished by its perpendicular red cliffs, from 300 to 400 feet high. Tuft Point, also known as Long Beach, lies about 5 miles to the eastward of Pound Head, and is formed by an earthy bank from 30 to 50 feet high partially cleared. About If miles westward of the point is Salmon Biver, and between the two, the 5-fathom line extends up- wards of 3 mile off shore, whilst the low-water line of the beach, just west of Tuft point, extends nearly ^ mile off. St. Martin Head, about 8J miles to the eastward of Tuft Point, is a small bare hillock 100 feet high, connected with the main shore by a narrow causeway of gravel and sand J mile long. When seen from a distance the head makes like an island ; it may be approached within J mile, save on its western side, where there is a small patch of rocks which dry 5 feet at low water — i( mile off shore, S. 53=^ W. To the westward of St. Martin Head, as far as Wolf Creek, and to the east- ward as far as Goose Creek, the 5-fathom line extends § mile from the shore. Matthews Head is a bold rounded point 150 feet high, at the dis- tance of 10^ miles to the eastward of St. Martin Head. Matthews head is partially cleared, but within it the land rises to an elevation of 700 feet, and is thickly wooded. Between the two heads there are no less than Ave creeks, but no off-lying dangers, and the shores may be approached to J mile. Salisbury Bay. — Between Matthews Head and Cape Enrage, the land recedes and forms Salisbury Bay, 3 miles in depth ; one of the salient points of the coast line of the bay is Owls Head, which is 700 feet high, and thickly wooded. Midway between Owls Head and Cape Enrag^ is Bed Head, composed of earthy cliffs from 50 to 100 feet high. Salisbury Shoal, about If miles in length between the 5.fathom lines, lies § mile within the line between Matthews Head and Cape En- rag6, with 3J fathoms on its shoalest part near the center, and can not therefore be deemed a danger to vessels of moderate draught. Within it there is a c^iannel a mile wide, having from 5 to 7 fathoms. The Ti li I I 3 ; If 46 BAY OP FUNDY — NORTH COAST. d^futhoui patuh lies S. 87° W., 3^ miles from Cape Enrag^ light- house. Anchorage. — During the summer mouths vessels may anchor along the whole length of the coast from Cape Spencer at a moderate distance from the shore, the best place for shelter from the prevailing westerly winds being Quuco Bay. Salisbury Bay is unsafe, in consequence of the frequency of westerly and southwesterly winds to which the bay is exposed, and of the sad* den shifting of the wind to these quarters. The tidal stream generally sets towards Giipe Enrag6 light-house. Cape Enrage is composed of perpendicular rocky cliffs about 100 feet high, and thickly wooded, excepting in the immediate vicinity of the light-house, which stands close to the extremity of the cape. From Cape Eurag6 a rocky spur, which dries at low water, extends in a southwesterly direction J mile. Chignecto Channel divides the shores of New Brunswick and Nova Scotia at the head of the Bay of Fundy, and leads into Oumberland Basin and the river Petit Goudiac ; it is free from off-lying dangers, and even in thick weather the gradual decrease of soundings on either side is sufficiently well defined to insure safe navigation. Abreast Grindstone Island Gape Maringonin divides the water into two branches, the northern of the two running in that direction towards the months of Petit Goudiac and Memramcook rivers, and the other flowing into Cumberland Basin. The laud on the New Brunswick shore is moderately high, thickly wooded, and intersected by numerous valleys ; the south shore is not 80 elevated, and the thick woods which generally prevail are interspersed •with cranberry barrens which abound with deer. Horton Flats. — The shores on either side of Ghignecto Channel may be safely approached to ^ mile, excepting in the vicinity of Horton flats, about 7 miles to the northeastward of Gape Enrag^. Between this po- sition and Cape St. Mary, flatt. extend in a straight line a considerable distance off the high line, which here forms a bay. Grindstone Island. — Grindstone Island, nearly ^ mile in length, lies on the northeast side of Chignecto Channel, and about a mile eastward of Cape St. Mary, the southern point of entrance to Shepody River. Grindstone Shoal, with 10 feet of water, is the shallowest part of a narrow bank of sand and mud, nearly 4 miles in length. The shoal spot lies -1^0 mile S. 6° E. from Grindstone light-house, with a passage between ; the high line of the south side of Grindstone Island may be approached to 200 yards. St Mary Ledge extends oft' Gape St. Mary f mile N. 42° E. ; its highest point covers at four hours flood, and when uncovered may be approached to 200 yards on its SE. side. Shepody River. — This river falls into Chignecto Channel immedi- ately to the northward of Gape St. Mary, between which and Stiles landing, on the northern side, the distance is 2^ miles ; but the river is CHIGNECTO CHANNEL — TIDES 47 Enrag6 light- anchor along erate distance iliug westerly ay of westerly [1 of the sad- aam generally iffs about 100 ate vicinity of e cape. ber, extends in rick and Nova Oamberland ring dangers, ings on either ;he water into ctiou towards lud the other high, thickly I shore is not a interspersed Channel may ^Horton flats, }ween this po- considerable in length, lies nile eastward )ody Biver. owest part of t. The shoal ith a passage sland may be f. 420 E.; its ered may be anel rmmedi- sh and Stiles at the river is not accessible except at certain times of tide, and not even then except by experienced local pilots. The Coast— From Cape Chignecto to Squally Point the shore is steep to and without detached dangers ; but from tlieuce as far us Apple Head light-house tlie shore should not be neared within J^ mile. Spicer Cove is a slight and shallow indentation immediately within Squally Point, but is only adapted for temporary anchorage for small vessels. Apple River, 2 miles larther on, dries a little within its points of entrance, which are ^ mite apart. Althougii several indentations occur along this line of coast, none are available for vessels save at certain times of tide. At the South Jog- gins there are several seams of coal, but the quality is inferior and not adapted for either steaming or domestic purposes. There are also some grindstone quarries along this coast, as well as on the Grindstone Island ; and at Cape St. Mary good building stone is to be obtained. Tlie anchorage off the coal wharf at South Joggins is bad and unsafe with westerly winds, especially during the ebb. Tides.— It is high water, full and change, at Spicer Cove at llh. 35m ; springs rise 37 feet, neaps 30^ feet. At Grindstone Island at llh. 47m. ; springs rise 41 feet, neaps 34J feet. From Cape Spencer the flood tides set to the eastward, generally parallel to the shore as far as Grindstone Island, at the average rate of about 2 knots, the ebb running in a contrary direction to the west- ward ; several eddies are formed behind the salient points of this coast. In the vicinity of Cape Spencer the tidal stream changes its direction about 2 hours before high and low water by the sbore ; but farther east, oft" Qnaco Head, this difference is reduced to three-fourths hour. Off shore the stream continues to run from one-fourth to three-fourths hour after the time of high and low water. Off Cape Spencer a rip, which is very heavy with westerly winds, is formed on the ebb ; it is caused by a strong eddy sweeping round to the bay to the westward of the cape, and impinging on the ebb tide at right angles. A similar rip occurs off Quaco Head, occasioned by the tide sweeping round the bay to the southward, and meeting the main streams of flood and ebb off the lighthouse. Off Grindstone Island the tidal current runs from 2 to 4 knots an hour. Cape Maringoiiinis the southern termination df a promontory divid- ing the northeastern arm of the Bay of Fundy into two branches, viz, the river Petit Condiac to the north and Cumberland Basin to the east. The cape attains an elevation of 220 feet, and from it an ex- tensive bank, formed by the d<^bris of the two branches, extends in a southwesterly direction ; the 3-fathom line being 1 J miles from the cape. Makingoviin Shoal is a sandy knoll with only a foot of water, and lies near the eastern edge of the above bank, about a mile from the shore of the cape. From it the east and west tangents of Cape Marin- 48 BAY OP FUNDY — NORTH COAST. goiiin bear N. o'P E. and N, 'J9° W., respectively, and (rrindstone Islaud light houNt' N. 76° W. 4 miles. River Potit Coudiac. — Abreast Folly Point tlie Coudiac is alwut a mile across, and from tbencie it trends in a general westerly direction for a distance of 15 miles, to abreast the town of Moncton, after which it takes a sudden bend to the westward, and so continiu.'s for a distance of 12 miles as far as the town of Salisbury. The eastern shore of this river is moilerately high and well wooded, ami between the northern point of She|)ody River and Oape Demoiselle on the western shore, a narrow strip of marshy ground fringes the high land, which arises abruptly to the well-wooded Shepody Hills, the highest of which attains au elevation of l,()oO feet. Maringouin Flats on the north side of Cape Maringonin are covered at ordinary low water; the outer flat is about 1} mile long, nearly par- allel to the shore, aMout a •ly direction iictoii, after tinm.'s for a tsterii shore tetween the the western land, which ast of which I are covered nearly par- l)out !{ mile j I avoided by rather more 58 from Cape 1 it becomes rard of Coles rn side. )s in a north ghest point rings. The and, and its »r more than )s Head, the lastern side; poidod. ine with 4 iug off Coles highest part ^ mile from int. 'oily Point, this danger It llh. 49ra. ; oint the tide le eastward, rip already md through mile of the light-house on Cape Biirag^ when on a N. 125^ E. bearing, in order to avoid the rocky ledge whicli extends off in a 8SW. direction. In malting either for Cliignecto Ciianiiel «>r CapeiJhigiiecto cure must be taken to make full allowance for the effect of the tides, which will considerably modify the course.^ obtained from the chart. Anchorages. — Temi>orary anchorage may bn obtained in moderate weather along the whole ♦•xtent of coast betwuen Capes Spencer and St. Mary, but when the winds — to which the coast is exposed-— blow with any force the anchorage is bad, especially in localities where the strength of tide is great. There is an anchorage to the north and west of Grindstone lalaud, between it and the mouth of Shepody Uiver, but it is somewhat difilcult of approach by a stranger j to enter it from a safe otHiig off Cape Enrag^, steer to bring Grindstone Light-house to bear N. 39° E., until about a mile distant, when haul a little to the northward, taking care not to shut in Cape Enrag6 Light-house with Cape St. Mary, nor ai)proach Grindstone Island nearer than 800 yards. When Grindstone Light- house bears S. 48° E., St. Mary Ledge will have been passed, and the vessel may be hauled up for the Shepudy Mountain ; anchor clear of the shoal ground north of the light-house, with the latter bearing about S 20° E.,and Cape St. Mary S. 36° W.; here there will be 4 fathoms, but the holding ground is not good. Another anchorage to the northeast of Grindstone Island which is frequently used is in about 3 fathoms mud, about ^ mile N. 36° E. from the eastern point of the island. Vessels in moderate weather may anchor anywhere off the mouth of the river Petit Coudiac below Folly Point according to their draft of water, but the best anchorage is between Folly Point and Stone Wharf, which is as high as vessels of any size can lay afloat at low water. Here, in about 3 fathoms mud, vessels may anchor with Folly Point bearing N. 64° E., and Indian Church K 21° W., but as the tide current runs from t> to 4 knots, there is a disagreeable sea when the wind is against the stream, and if intending to s^cp louder than a tide, it is necessary to moor in order to avoid fouling the anchor. Pilots. — If intending to proceed farther up the river the services of a competent pilot must be obtained, as the direction of the narrow shal- low channel is frequently changed. Though there are no regular pilots, men can be procured from Hillsborough who are acquainted with the river. River Memramcook. — The western shore is of a moderate eleva- tion and covered with trees, whilst its eastern shore is partially cleared. There is a small hole with 9 feet water to the SW. of Dorchester Island, but even small vessels should be moored, if it be intended to re- main afloat. Cumberland Basin lies on the eastern side of Cape Mariugouin, be- tween which and Boss Point the entrance is 1} miles across ; from this 5314 i n : I I 11 60 BAY OF FUNDY NORTH COAST. position the channel is straight and navigable for a distance of 8 miles to a little beyond Woody Point, on the northern shore, where anchorage may be obtained In the narrow channel in 4 fathoms about J mile ofiF the northern shore. This is known as Sackville Anchorage, where ves sela should moor, and their position be selected by means of the lead. Anchorage.— There is also another anchorage eastwanl of Peck's Point, on the north shore of the entrance, in about 5 fathoms mud, with the 8R. extreme of Cape Maringouin open of Peck's Point, bearing S. 33° W., and the end of the wharf in Peck's Cove S. 78° W. Vessels may anchor anywhere between the above places, excepting during strong westerly winds, which frequently occur, when the ebb stream, which attains a velocity of 4 or 5 knots an hour, causes a very disagreeable sea. It is advisable to moor at auy of the anchorages, especially with southwesterly winds and an ebb stream. Above Sack- ville Anchorage only small vessels can lie afloat at low water, but trad- ing craft lie aground on the mud. In Cumberland Basin there is a profitable shad fishery, which com- mences in June. The exports are coal from the South Joggins and river Eebert, as well as some agricultural produce, and a few small vessels are built. Tidea.— It is high water, full and change, in Cumberland Hasin at 11 h. 55ra. ; springs rise 45J feet, neaps 38 feet. The rise and fall being so great, the velocity of the tide is very great. Directiona. In running for Cumberland Basin care must be taken on approaching the entrance to open Minudie Point to the southward of the east tangent of Cape Maringouin, bearing N. 47° E., in order to clear Maringouin Shoal, after passing which a course should be steered to pass the east extremity of Cape Maringouin and Peck's Point not less than J mile, to which distance both can safely be approached. If intending to proceed beyond Pecks Anchorage, keep the east tan- gent of Cape Maringouin open of Pecks Point, bearing S. 44° W., and with these marks astern a vessel will be kept in the deep-water channel to abreast of Minudie Point, after which a more northerly course should be steered, in order to|avoid the mud bank, which dries at low water and extends to a considerable distance from the southern shore. Amherat, in the NE. part of Cumberland Basin, is the southern terminus of the ship railroad running through to Bay Verte, which is uow nearly completed. The distance, about 17 miles, will be traversed at the rate of 10 miles an hour, the maximum weightcarried to be about 2,000 tons. The receiving docks at each end are about the same size, 500 feet long, 300 feet wide, and will hold from 6 to 10 vessels. The lifting docks, which communicate with the receiving docks, are 250 feet long and 60 feet wide. icu of 8 miles ?re anchorage luut H mile off (je, wliere ves 8 of tli» leiul> ,\rd of Peck's ms mud, with iiit, bearings. ses, excepting ?hen the ebb causes a very e anchorages, Above Sack- ater, but trad- :, which com- gins and river small vessels land Hasin at and fall being must be taken the southward E., in order to uld be steered jk's Point not iroached. ) the east tan- 5. 44° W., and water channel course should 3 at low water t shore. i the southern erte, which is 11 be traversed led to be about I same size, 500 s. The lifting 3 250 feet long CHAPTER III. ' " BAY OP PlTNDy-SOUTII SHORE-nABRrNOTON BAY TO BASIN OV MINES. Harrington Bay has for its points of entrance Baccaro Point of the east and Capo Sable on the west. Near its head is an anchorage a-^ces- sible by two channels, viz, east and west of Sable Island, i'he western channel must be considered impracticable to a stranger, in consc.aence ot extensive Hats and numerous dangers, which narrow the channel and render the navigation always difficult and most frequently dangerous Bamngton.— At the head of theinJat, and extending a conr' '*>rable distance along the shore, is the straggling township of BaiWi.^ton winch exports flsh ; but few supplies of any other kind can l^e p/ocured' Directions—By referring to the chart the position of the various shoals in Barringtoa Bay will be seen, and the seaman must depend on his intelligence to avoid dangers, which it would be useless to describe in the absence of good landmarks. Approaching from the southward and being a mile west of Bantam Rocks (marked by a bell buoy) ; a N. 22° W. course will lead up the bav to a mid-channel position abreast Clam Point, from whence Light- house Rock should be seen, and by steering for it on a N. 48o w be-ir nig anchorage will be found in about 6 fathoms, with the NE. point'of Cape Sable Island bearing S. 77° W. On approaching the anchorage care m ust be tak. ^n avoid the exten- sive sand flats which surround Beach Point. Tho ^ .^t course to pur- sue when steering for Lighthouse Uock will be to borrow slighthon the island shore, towards which the water shoalr. gradually, and keen in about 5 fathoms, so that by porting the hela the water will deepen A heavy sea sets into Barrington Bay when blowing hard from between south and SE., and renders the anchorage unsafe. There is room for a vessel to turn into this anchorage by the eastern passage, and by paying careful attention it may be done without a pilot Cape Sable Island, about 7 miles in length and of an irregular form ,8 only separated from the mainland by J mile. The island is thickly wooded, singularly flat, and surrounded by dangers, especially on Its south and western sides. " ' * j Cape SaLle, at the south end of the island, is also the southwestern extremity of the province of Nova Scotia, and is the outer end of a small 61 I 62 NOVA SCOTIA — S. W. COAST. ? I ;, ( island whose hillocks of blown sand, varying from 15 to 28 feet high, are continually shifted by hard gales. Columbia Rock is a small pinnacle with 7 feet water ; it waa dis- covered bj' Her Majesty's surveying vessel (Jolumbia touching on it, and lies S. 37° E. one mile from Cape Sable light-house. Beyond this rock, in a southerly direction for a distance of % mile are the continuations of the rocky ledges which extend from Cape Sable; over these are heavy tide rips during the strength of the tides, caused by the stream rushing over the uneven rocky bottom. Horee Race, a rocky patch with 2 fathoms water, lies 4 mile within Columbia Rock, and causes a heavy tide rip. Southwest Ledge, so named from its relative position to Cape Sable, is about J mile in length, i^ear the northern end are two rocks which generally uncover at low water, and J mile further out is a rock on which the sea generally breaks ; this rock nearly uncovers at low- water springs. From the latter Cape Sable light-house bears N. 55" E. If miles, and beyond it for the distance of nearly a mile in a seaward direction heavy tide rips rush over the rocky tail of the ledge, though with 6 and 7 fath- oms water on it. Tides. — Strong northwesterly winds lower the surface of the water, and southeasterly winds have a contrary effect, though the times of high and low water are not materially affected by either. At Brazil Bock the stream turns about half an hour before high and low water at Cape Sable, towards which the flood stream runs about 2 knots an hour ; but seaward of Brazil Bock the rate diminishes in proportion as the distance from the shore increases, whilst over the rock the tides rush with great rapidity and create a considerable rip. Inshore around Baccaro Point and over Bantam Bocks the flood sets strong, and, from the point, trends towards Stony Island (on the east shore of Cape Sable Island), where the stream divides, the northern branch setting round Clam and NB. Points, and thence to the south- ward along shore towards Cape Sable, whilst the southern branch trends along the eastern shore of Cape Sable Island towards the same point. Outside Bantam Bocks the flood sets towards Cape Sable, round which, for a distance o&3 miles off shore, it attains a velocity of fully 4 knots during its strength. After rounding the cape the flood stream sets towards Seal Island, passing it and through the various channels to the northward between it and To-sket Island, in a general NW. direc- tion, at rates varying from about 2^ to 4 knots an hour. The flood as- sumes a more northerly trend along the main shore. The direction of the ebb stream is nearly opposite to that of the flood, and runs with equal velocity. Seal Island, about 17 miles west of Cape Sable, is about 2| miles in length, low, thickly wooded, and is the most off-lying in a southerly direction of a cluster of islands extending from Frenchman Point. The "91 mm SEAL ISLAND — MUD ISLANDS. 53 28 feet high, sr ; it waQ (lis- iiiug ou it, and ond this rock, •utinuatioiis of lese are lieavy itream rushiug 3 J mile within to Cape Sable, vo rocks which I, rock on which ■water springs. 3. If miles, and direction heavy ith 6 and 7 fath- se of the water, jh the times of )re high and low IS about 2 knots 5S in proportion e rock the tides IS the flood sets nd (on the east )8, the northern ce to the south- outhern branch wards the same po Sable, round jlocity of fully 4 he flood stream ;'arious channels iieral NW.direc- r. The flood as- The direction of , and runs with ibout 2| miles in 5 in a southerly man Point. The island is surrounded on its east, south, and west sides by shoals of a very dangerous description, and when navigating in their vicinity great prudence is required. Purdy Rock is of small extent, with 2^ fathoms on it and deep water all round, but it shows a rip during the strength of the tide, and breaks in heavy weather. From it Seal Isiaud lighthouse bears N. 78° W. 2J miles. Blonde Rock is about J mile in length, and a small portion near the middle uncovers about 2 feet at low water springs ; this part lies with Seal Island light house bearing N. 22° W. 3i miles. Tide Rip. — About a mile westward of Blonde Rock is a heavy break- ing rip during the strength of the tidal stream, but a sufficient depth of water was found through it. Elbow Shoal, about a mile in length, has on its shoalest part only 5 feet water on it, from which Seal Island lighthouse bears N. G^ W. IJ miles, and the eastern tangent of Seal Island is just in line with the rock on its south point. Zetland Shoal was reported to have only 17 feet over it, but on ex- amination nothing less than 21 feet was found. It breaks in heavy weather, and is marked by a rip during the strength of the tide ; from Seal Island light-house it bears S. 25° W., upwards of 1^ miles. Devil's Limb is a small rocky islet about 10 feet above high water springs, distant 1^ miles from Seal Island lighthouse in a X. 69° VV. direction. About \ mile south of the islet is a rocky shoal which un- covers at low-water springs, and uf.med Loch Foyne. Limbs Limb, upwards of a mile northward of Devil's Limb, shows one hour after high water, and is steep-to on its western side. There is a passage inside the Limb shoals for vessels of moderate draft, but it should only be attempted by those well acquainted. Anchorage.— There are temporary anchorages on both sides of Seal Island, but as the bottom is rocky, tides strong and irregular, anchors are liable '.ofoul; these anchorages should never be used unless the wind be off the island. Mud Islands are situated 2^ miles northward of Seal Island, and consist of four small islands, named Nodtly, Mud, Round, and Flat; of these, Mud and Round Islands may be approached within a moderate distance on their eastern side, but Noddy Island should not be ap- proached within ^ mile. From the northern end of Flat Island a shoal extends off j^ mile, ter- minating in a rock with only 7 feet water, over which the tide causes a considerable rip. Between Seal and Noddy Islands there is a safe deep water channel, but one-third of the way across from Noddy Island is a shoal reported to have 18 feet water, but ou examination nothing less than oj fathoms could be found. The flood stream sets strong through this channel at a rate of nearly 4 knots in a NW. direction, the ebb running to the SE. attains the li r r i I 54 NOVA SCOTIA — S. W. COAST. same velocity. When using the channel in thick weather it is better to borrow on deal Island shore, but as a rule — during fogs — it is advisable to pass southw^ard of Blonde Rock. If from the southward, with Blonde liock in sight, Flat Island seen just open east of Seal Island will lead between Blonde Rock and Elbow Shoal. Anchorages. — Temporary anchorage may be obtained on the east side of Mud Island in about 8 fathoms, with the east end of Mud Island in line with the middle of Round ^sland, and the SE. end of Mud Island in line with the middle of Noddy Island. A vess'^1 may also anchor on the NW. side of Flat Island, but it must be distinctly understood that the anchorages around these islands are not recommended, and should only be resorted to as a matter of con- venience in fine weather, or when driven by necessity during bad weather. Black Ledge, nearly a mile west of Mud Island, is always visible, excei)t at high- water springs, when its position is marked by a breaker. Mud Island Shcal, which is ^ mile in length, should be avoided by vessels of large draft, because the bottom being irregular it is prob- able the least water has not been obtained. From the depth of 4 fathoms on the eastern end of the shoal Seal Island lighthouse is seen just open west of Division Point bearing S. 15° E. 5 miles ; and the south end of Mud Island S. 89° E., a little over 2 miles. In steering between Noddy and Seal Islands a vessel should pass southward of this shoal. Soldier Ledge is a datigeroas patch of rocks about 2| miles N. 56° W. of the north point of Flat Island ; the passage between, though available, is not recommended, as it is possible shoals may exist in the parts only partially examined. A portion of the ledge, about 4 mile long, uncovers about 2 hours after high water and is very daugeroust but it generally breaks when covered. The SE. extreme of Frenchman Island seen open north of Bald Tus- ket Island bearing N. 23"^ E. leads westward of Soldier Ledge. Stoddart Cove lies just within the north point of Stoddart Island, which is 2^ miles from the west head of Cape Sable Island ; the cove in which there is not less than 14 feet water affords good anchorage in all weather *br small vessels. In entering keep on the Stoddart Island shore, in order to avoid a rock awash at low water springs about 350 yards off the west ,()int of Prospect Island. Shag Harbor, between Bon Portage Island and the main, is adapted for vessels of any draft, and though open to the southward, is said to be sheltered from any heavy sea by the ledges off Cape Sable. In 1805 her majesty's ships SplUn.v and Oannet used an anchorage west of Pros- pect Island in about 8 fathoms, with the western tangents of Green and Stoddart Islands in line, and the Baptist church of Shag Harbor vil- lage in line with the north end of Prospect Island bearing NE. This position is to the eastward — and beyond the influence — of the strength "^ ~«^MVS3^S^iSSMi 8HA0 AND PUBNICO HARBORS. 55 is better to 8 advisable 7ith Blonde lid will lead on the east Mud Island Mud Island but it must islands are tter of con- luring bad ays visible, r a breaker, avoided by r it is prob" depth of 4 tuse is seen !8 ; and the ihould pass Diles N. 56° sen, though exist in the boat 4 mile daugerousi if Bald Tus- Ige. lart Island, the cove in ichorage in dart Island ■8 about 350 , is adapted 1, is said to le. In 1805 est of Pros- r Green and Harbor vil- :NE. This he strength of the tidal streams, and the holding ground is laore tenacious tiian nearer the shore, but not being good, a long scope of cable should be given; the best holding ground is said to be above Conquer All. Southerly winds, though blowing hard at Cape Sable and Seal Island, did not blo^v home in September and October, 1805, though aground swell was experienced at the anchorage. When making the harbor from the southward or westward in toler- ably clear weather the entrance is easily distinguished, as Bon Portage Island makes out well, the white beach on the south point being con- spicuous under tiie dark trees. In entering with the floo«l a wide berth should be given to the south point of the island, as the tide sets di- rectly for it at the rate of 4 miles an hour. Cockerwit Passage.— At the entrance of Cockerwit or Wood Har- bor and between it and the Mutton Islands, there is a good anchorage in 5 to ")^ fathoms, mud. In the passage to this anchorage there is a rock which uncovers at low springs, having deep water close to. Rob- inson Ball station (built of stone) in line with the center of Little Stony Island leads on this rock ; but a house standing on the northern end of Stoddart Island seen just open eastward of a detached rock oflf Pros- pect Point leads eastward. Cockerwit Passage can only be used by vessels drawing 8 to 9 feet water, and steered by experienced persons. St. John Ledge, a dangerous shoal 3 mile in extent, has near its center a patch which generally shows except at high water springs. Pubnico Lighthouse open to the westward of St. John Island bearing N. 17° E. leads westward of the ledge. A red bell buoy is moored in 21 fathoms about IJ miles southwest- ward from St. John Ledge with Pubnico Light-house bearing N. 10° E. distant 0.^ miles. Directions.— Pubnico Harbor affords safe anchorage to ships of large draft, and from tlie comparative absence of dangers at the entrance is accessible at all times. On api)roaching the harbor with a leading wind, after passing St. John Island, bring the light-house to bear Jf. 39° E., bearing in mind that shoal water extends off St. Ann Point to the distance of J mile; pass 200 yards from the lighthouse, and steer to pass close on the east- ern side of tlie white spar buoy, marking the outer sxtremity of a rocky ledge — which uncovers at low water — extending from the western shore a little within Beach Point. After passing the buoy haul a little to the westward, and steer for the church, a conspicuous object on the west- ern shore, in order to clear a shoal on the eastern shore with 11 feet water (but on which it is possible there may be a less depth, as the bottom is sharp and irregular), and when the lighthouse bears south steer north and anchor in 9 or 10 fathoms, mud, abreast the wharves near Meres house, inclining a little to the western side of the harbor. Caution. — Vessels bound to Pubnico should be careful to keep well outside St. John Ledge, as the current sets directly over it, sometimes very strong. ■BBB i £ki» 1 M ii 1 1 1 Wi ' J:^ » HI \ 56 NOVA SCOT'A — 8. \V. COAST. IVater. — A fresh-water spring, close to the southern wharf, affords about 4 tons of good water daily. St Ann Shoal, I mile in length, with 2j fathoms on it, lies with St. Ann Point, hearing S. 62° K. Ij^ miles, and the southern Twin Island N. 22° E. upwards of IJ miles. Nearly abreast St. Ann Shoal is a rocky spit with 2^ fathoms, extend- ing ^ mile from the main shore. The passage between these dangers is deep and § mile broad. The Twin Islands in line bearing N. 13° B. leads in mid-channel between the spit and St. Ann Shoal. Twin Islands, about J mile from the shore and the same distance apart, are very small in size, with shoal water around them, leaving only a narrow deep water channel between. Off the northern Twin are two small detached shoals, one with 2^ fatlioms bearing N. 74° W. J mile, and the other with 7 feet water N. 23° W. nearly ^ mile. Within Twin Islands there is a narrow channel with upwards of 5 fatiioms. Abbott Harbor, with 3J fathoms water, is formed by the narrow channel between Abbot Island and the main shore, and though only 200 yards across at its entrance, is well adapted for vessels of small draft, being easy of access and completely sheltered from all winds. Argyle. — The scattered township of Argyle lies on the main land to the nortb-rard of Abbott Island. Off its shores are several anchorages but the channels leading to them are too intricate to be entered without a pilot. White Head Island, the southeasternmost of the numerous islands in the upper part of the bay between Abbott Harbor and Frenchman Point is situated 5 miles north of St. Ann Point; the island is about J mile in length, and conspicuous by earthy cliffs of a reddish color, nearly 70 feet in height on its southward side. TVhite Head Ledge, about ^ mile in length, uncovers near its cen- ter at low water, and after half ebb the position of the shoal is marked by kelp. From the part which dries the south end of White Head Island bears S. 76° W. ^ mile. West Shoal, about ^ mile in length, has only 12 feet water near its southern end, and from it the south end of White Head Island is dis^ taut ^ mile S. 02° E. Jones Ledge, nearly ^ mile in length, dries near its center, from which the south end of Jones Island bears N. 9° W. if mile. OuU Island, a low green island situated 2 miles westward of White Head Island, should not be approached on its southern side within J mile. From its northern end a long narrow stony bar, which dries at low water, extends § mile. Midway between Gull and Eastern Bar Islands is a rocky patch 400 yards long having only 4 feet on ltd southern end. Gull L''ilge lies 2 miles S. 6° E. of Gull Island and has only 5 feet "a Am^- JONES ANCHORAGE TU8KET RIVER. 57 [arf, affords ie8 with St. u Island N. tns, extend- 86 dangers g N. 13° B. ne distance Mn, leaving •n Twin are r. 74° W, J le. •wards of 5 the narrow hongh only sis of small II winds, lain land to anchorages red without ous islands Frenchman 1 is about ^ Idish color, )ar its cen- ,1 is marked nnte Head ter near its land is dis* lenter, from d of White le within J ch dries at y patch 400 only 5 feet on its shoalest part, from which the large barn on Sheep Island is on with the western high water line of Gull Island. Southwest Shoal is small, with 2A fathoms and deep water close to. From this shoal the west end of Gull Island bears N. 0^° E. one mile. Jones Anchorage — In case of emergency Jones Anchorage may be rendered available by proceeding as follows, viz: Steer for White Head Island on a N. 5° E. bearing, and keep along its eastern shore, with the center of Lear Island, 60 feet high, bearing N. 3° W. ; this course will lead between White Head Island and ledge, and also nearly in mid channel between Pumpkin Island and Pumpkin Ledge; tiie lat- ter has only 2 feet on it, but is marked at half tide by kelp. When abreast the north end of Pumpkin Island, or with the w.'st ends of Thrum and Hog Islands in line bearing N. 23° W., alter course for the east tangent of Jones Island, and steer along its ea»t shore about 300 yards oft", where good anchorage will be found in about 6 fathoms, mud, with the center of Ram Island in line with the south end of Lear Island. To pass west of White Head Island, bring the east end of Thrum Island in line with the west end of Pumpkin Island bearing N. 11° E., this mark will lead midway between White Head Island and West Shoal. After passing along the west of Pumpkin Island steer for the channel between Thrum and Jones islands, and proceed as before directed. Big Fish Rocks consist of a small cluster of rocks, which uncover at low water, about i mile NW. of Big Fish Island, with 3^ fathoms in the channel between. From these rocks the SW. tangents of Big Fish and Eastern Bar islands are in line, and the large barn on Big Sheep Island open of north tangent of Big Fish Island. Tusket River— Eastern ChanneL— Tusket River should not be at- tempted at low water by vessels over 15 leet draft ; it affords safe an- chorage, but the two approaches, being narrow and beset with dangers, require great caution when entering. If from the southward. Gull Ledge may be cleared by bringing the large barn on Sheep Island well open of the west end of Gull Island, or just open to the east eml of Gull Island. After passing the ledge keep to the NE. until Big Fish Island light-house is in line with the north end of Eastern Bar Island, bearing N. 47° W., and by steering this course the shoal water off Gull Island and the half-tide rock off Sheep Island will be avoided. On nearing Eastern Bar Island, when the east end of Sheep Island bears N. 19o W., keep carefully on this course and steer through the narrows between Wilson Point and Eastern Bar Island as far as the south point of Tucker Island, when alter course to bring Wilson Point astern, bearing S. 32° E., and anchor in about 6 fathoms, mud, off the west end of Sheep Island. Western Channel.— After passing Gull Ledge, open Tucker Island t ft i .1 memim 58 NOVA SCOTIA — 8. W. COAST. %^:. west of Inner Fisb Island, bearing north, which is a good luarlf for clearing the SW. shoal, and after passing it keep to the NW. until Big Fish Island light-house bears N.5o B., when continue on that course until the south end of Eastern Bar and White Head Islands are in line ; then steer N. 38° \V. for a short distance until the east end of Mike Island is apparently just touching the west end of Tucker Island, bear- ing N. 120 E. ; steer with these marks on, passing 200 yards west of Big Fish Island, until little Fish Island apparently just touches Big Fish Island, when by keeping these marks astern a vessel will clear Big Fish Rocks on their eastern side, and avoid the shoal ground north of Big Fish Island. When Inner Fish Island is seen open east of Big Fish Island, alter course for Pinch Gut Island N. 9° E., which should lead iu deep water between Tucker Island and its ledge on the west side of the channel, and when Wilson Point appears to touch the north side of Tucker Island a vessel will be clear of the shoal ground north of Tucker Island, and might steer to the eastward and anchor as before directed off the east end of Sheep Island. Vessels should not proceed beyond this anchor- age without local knowledge, as the channel is intricate and tide rapid. In the narrows abreast Plymoutli settlement the stream during the atrength of springs runs about 5 kn(»ts, and in the vicinity of Pinch Gut Island 2 knots an hour. Old Woman is the name given to a rock near the center of a shoal about 800 yards long north and south, which uncovers at 2 hours' ebb. Big Fish island light-house, bearing N. 5° E., leads eastward of this danger, as well as all the shoal patches and ledges, on the western shore of the western entrance to Tusket River. Old Man is the largest of a small cluster of rocks which uncover about an hour before low-water springs, and from it Bald Tusket Island bears S. 47° W. one mile. Owls Head, seen open east of Allen Island bear- ing N. 36° W., leads eastward. Bald Tusket Island is about 400 yards in extent, 50 feet high, and bare of trees ; it is the most off-lying and conspicuous of the Tnsket Group, but should not be approached on. its north, west, and south sides nearer than i^ milt, in consequence of shoal water. Little Bald Tusket Shoal, with 9 feet water, lies with the east end of Marks Island apparently touching the south end of Pease Island, bearing N. 12° E., and the north end of Inner Bald Island S. 50° W. about J mile. , Harriet Ledge occupies a central position on a rocky shoal i mile in length ; the ledge is about 200 yards long, covers at a third flood, and during the run of the tide shows a considerable tide rip. From the ledge Holmes Island is seen just open north of Spectacle Island, and the south point of Pease Island apparently touching the uorth point of liittle Half Bald Island. Cleopatra Shoal is a dangerous detached shoal 400 yards in length, PEASE ISLAND LEDGE — SCHOONER PASSAGE. 59 mark for Jf W. uutil iiat course ,i-e ill liue ; I of Mike aud, bear- est of Big Big Fish clear Big i north of land, alter [eep water annel, and !r Island a sland, and ft' the east lis anchor- tide rapid, luring the Pinch Gut of a shoal lours' ebb. Til of this item shore over about ilaud bears iland bear- t high, aud ;he Tusket south sides le east end ise Island, i S. 50° W. %\ ^ mile in [ flood, and f Spectacle luching the s in length, with 12 feet on its shoalest part, which is marked at low-water springs by a few long pieces of kelp. This danger has deep water all round it, and shows a rip daring the run of the tide. Half Bald Island seen ojjcu east of Bald Tusi^et Island leads eastward, and open west leads west- ward, of Cleopatra Shoal. Shoals — Between Cleopatra Shoal and Bald Tusket Island there are two small shoals with 2J and 3 fathoms, respectively, both being marked by rips during the strength of the tides ; there is a deep channel ^ mile broad between them and Bald Tusket Island, and a similar deep water passage between them and Cleopatra Shoal. Pease Island Ledge, about 200 yards in extent ; covers at one-third flood ; it is about 4 mile from the eastern point of Pease Island, with a deep-water channel between. The south point of Spectacle Island open of south point of Pease Island bearing S. 84° W. leads to the southward of the ledge. Marks Island Ledge uncovers at low-water springs and lies 300 yards off the west side of Marks Island; it shows a considerable rip during the strength of the tide, which runs over it with great velocity. Allen Rock lies 300 yards off the south end of Allen Island and shows a whirl in the strength of the tide. Schooner Passage Rock, with 9 feet water, lies nearly midway be- tween Owls Heatl and Turpentine islands, with a deep-water channel on either side. Bird Rock, at the outer end of a reef extending from the south end of Owls Head Island, always shows. Spectacle Ledge, about 400 yards long and very narrow, has 11 feet on it, and is marked by a large rip during the strength of the tide. From the shoalest spot Spectacle Island south end bears N. 5° E. up- wards of J mile. Tides. — The tide turns a little after high and low water respectively, and runs rapidly through the Tusket Island passages, the tide rips being numerous and heavy. Its general set is to the NW. and SB., but this is modified by the position and shape of the islands, which form con- siderable eddies, and by the main land, in the vicinity of which the tide follows its direction. The average rate is from 2 to 4 knots, and round some points its rate probably exceeds the latter; off" the north- eastern iioint of Ellenwood Island the stream runs 4 knots, and in Schooner Passage 3 knots, per hour. Directions for Schooner Passage.— To run through Schooner Pas- sage from the eastward keep Owls Head open of Allen Island bearing N. 350 W., which will lead eastward of Old Man aud Little Bald Tusket Shoals, and when the barn of Ellenwood Island appears to touch the NE. end of Pease Island alter course immediately to keep these marks on III order to pass westward of Pease Island Ledge, which should be rounded close-to on the flood, as it setsi strong towards the south point of Pease Island. '■i yf RSIBSPV 1 t I 60 NOVA SCOTTA — 8. W. COAST. Having passed the narrows, bring Candlebox Island midway between Allen and Haymaker Islands, and steer for it, this course will lead clear of Haymaker Ledge and Allen Rock, and after passing Allen Island keep to the westward until the east end of Murder Island is shut in by Candlebox Island, in order to pass west of Schooner Passage Rock. Pass Candlebox Island close-to on its west side, and steer out through the narrows of the northern entrance, with the south point of Candlebox Island apparently just touching Tur|)entine Island, until Owls Head appears just to touch the tangent of Haymaker Island, and with these latter marks on steer out between Murder Island Shoal and the shoal spit extending from the N\V^. point of Murder Island. For EUenwood Passage.— If intending to proceed through Ellen- wood Passage, after passing Pease Island Ledge keep the barn on EUenwood Island just open south of Allen Island bearing N. 57° W. to clear Allen Rock, and after i)assing it keep in mid-channel between Marks and Allen Islands, altering course to pass between Bird Rock and EUenwood Island. After passing this rock, bring it in line with the east point of Marks Island, which will lead through the deep water channel of the sand narrows, continue on until Owls Head and the western tangent of Haymaker Island are apparently just touching, when steer out with these marks on as before directed. Anchorages.— Good anchorage will be found in Schooner Passage ott' the north end of Allen Island in 5 to 9 fathoms, mud; and there is also good anchorage to be obtained in Ellen wooil Passage off the barn, about 300 yards to the northward of Bird Rock, in about 5 fathoms, gravel and sand. Care should be taken to anchor out of the strength of the tide in EUenwood Passage on the following bearings: Bird Rock S. 68° B., and barn on EUenwood Island S. 72° W. To approach this anchorage from the S W. keep the cliff on the south- western point of EUenwood Island open east of Spectacle Island bear- ing north, in order to clear Spectacle Ledge, taking care not to open out Holmes Island until past Harriet Ledge. When the south end of Pease Island is in line with the north end of Half Bald Island steer for the south end of Marks Island, and passing it on its eastern side steer through EUenwood Passage to the anchorage before described. Gannet Rock, barely 400 yards in length, is a narrow rocky ridge, having near its southern end apeak resembUng a sugar loaf, 50 feet high, with a lump on its northern end of almost equal elevation. From the peak Yarmouth light-house bears N. 4° W. nearly 9^ miles, and Seal Island light-house S. 23° E. 15| miles; both will be in sight in clear weather. North Rock, of very small extent, shows about half tide, and lies 4 mile N. 12° W. from Gannet Rock. South Rock, also small and showing at half tide, lies more than §ot a mile fr«»m Gannet Rock ia a S. 12° B. direction. ELLENWOOD PASSAGE — JEBOGUE LEDGE. 61 y between lead clear en iHland »hut in by I Rock, it through 'andlebox >wl8 Head Rrith these 1 be shoal igh Ellen- e barn on 57° W. to 1 between Bird Rock I line with leep- water [1 and the touching, sr Passage nd there is f the barn, 5 fathoms, le strength ngs : Bird the south- slaud bear- ,0 open out orth end of nd piivssing anchorage ocky ridge, >af, 50 feet ion. From miles, and in sight in 5, and lies 4 re than § ot Sootheast Rock lies nearly 1^ miles 8. 31° E. from Gannet Rock, and shows two distinct breaks in heavj' weather and a considerable rip during the strength of the tide. It is steep to on its cast and west sides, and from it Yarmouth light-house appears just touching the east- ern tiingent of Green Island. Q-annet Sooth Shoal lies 4^ miles in a southerly H being 2\ miles and its average set 8 miles. The slack is full one hour in duration. Coast. — From Cape Fourchu, in the immediate vicinity ofYarmoutb Coast, as far as Cape St. Mary, a distance of 17^ miles, the coast line is of an undulating character, varying in elevation from 20 to 100 feet, and Willi tiieexceptionof one off-lying danger, viz, Trinity Ledge, is remarka- bly exempt from danger; and as a rule may be safely approached even by large ships to the distance of ^ mile. Trinity Rock consists of three small heads close together, all of which uncover at low water springs, the highest being 2 or 3 feet above the water, and the others just seen. This danger bears S. 33<=> W. 6f miles from Cape St. Mary, and N. 31° W. 13.J miles from Cape Fourchu; it causes a great rip during the strength of the tide, and breaks heavily in bad weather ; the rock should not be approached nearer than ^ mile. The western side of the rock is marked by a red bell buoy. The tidal stream runs with great streugth at the rock, attaining a velocity of 2 knots ; the ebb sets about S. 30° E., and the flood N. 30° W. St. Mary Bay is of peculiar formation, its western shore consisting of a mere strip of laud, upwards of a mile in breadth, and forming a natural breakwater for adistauce of 30 miles, with a varying elevation between 430 feet at its neck and 100 feet on Bryer Island. Through this natural barrier are two narrow navigable channels, known as Grand and Petit Passages, through which the tide rushes with great velocity ; the latter is the shortest route between St. John and Cape Fourcliu, and being entirely free from danger is available for steam vessels, or sailing vessels with favorable wind and tide. The St. Mary shore of Long Island is bold to, and a vessel can pass tolerably close along it, except in rounding Dartmouth Point, off which some ragged rocks lie nearly 300 yards distant. After passing Petit Passage, the western coast of St. Mary Bay is generally bold and straight ; it may safely be approached to 200 yards as far as 4 miles beyond East Sandy Cove; after which the water gradu- ally shoals to the head of the bay. The princii)al trade at St. Mary Bay is in ship's and cord wood. St Mary ShoaL — To the northeastward of East Sandy Oove lies St. Mary Shoal, which is the onlj' detached danger in the bay. It is of large extent, and has a deep channel on both sides. A rock with only 5 feet water rises from the shoal about a third of the distance across the bay from the western shore, and from it the east point of East Sandy Oove bears 8. 62° W. 3 miles, the NW. point of Gilbert Cove S. 75° E. 2^ miles, and the south tangent of the remarkable red cliff at the bead of the bay N. 48° E. 6 miles. 8T. MARY BAY — ANCHORAGE. 65 ences at tides it les, iu a greatest » slack is armouth St line is feet, and reraarka- hed even er, all of aet above 13° W. 6J Foarchu ; :8 heavily an ^ mile. staining a N. 30° W. sonsisting forming a elevation Through cnown as ith great and Cape for steam can pass off which try Bay is 200 yards ber gradu- 'ood. Cove lies It is of with only ice across It of East >ert Cove ed cliff at TiAe*. — At tiie head of the bay tlid hei;j;lit of tlui tide is affected by the winds ; tliose from the 8VV. keeping the water above its mean iieight, and ttiose from the NE. below that point. The stream sets parallel to the yoast from a half to two-thirds of a knot per hour. DirectionB. — When off Cape St. Mary, and bound up the bay, the coast may be approached within ^ mile until near Moiitej^an, wiiere it becomes low ; beyond this, rocky ridges extend off the coast, as far as Como wharf; and the shore should be given a berth of at least a mile. Beyond Como wharf the shore becomes cleaner, until within a short distance of the entrance of the iSissibou River, where a shoal extends off. Keep about a mile off shore, and when the remarkable notch iu Kast Sandy Cove, on the Digby Neck shore, shows open, steer towards the entrance of the river where good anchorage will be obtained in about oj fathoms, mud, about ^ mile from the shore. Sisaibou River can only be entered by boats at low water, when only small vessels can lie afloat in it. About 4 miles NE. of the river is Gilbert Cove, affording the best anchorage in the bay, and the coast between can be approached to about ^ mile, except at a point which lies 1^ miles southwestward of Gilbert Point, where a shoal extends nearly ^ mile from the shore ; a road from the interior to the shore points out the direction of the shoal. After passing this shoal a vessel may steer towards Gilbert Point, beyond which good anchorage will be found in about 4 fathoms, over muddy bottom. Fresh water can be obtained fh)m a stream running over the rocks near an old mill. Beyond Gilbert Cove the water shoals to the head of the bay. Anchorage. — Large vessels may anchor in any part of St. Mary Bay between East Sandy Cove and Sissibou River, in 10 to 12 fathoms water, and with good ground tackle may ride out any gale, as the sea at this anchorage, even with southwesterly winds, to which it is exposed, be- comes exhausted. There are three auc!xorages on the western shore of the bay, viz. Lit- tie River, Mink Cove, and East Sandy Cove; the last, being the largest and most sheltered, is most frequented. In it vessels of 12 feet draft can hud good shelter from all winds between south roand by west to NNE., and if distressed by a southeasterly wind they can find security by running on the mud. Fresh water can be obtained at the head of the cove when the tide is up, except during dry seasons. Bryer Island Southwest Ledge has only 13 feet on its shoalest part, which lies with Dartmouth Point, seen just open westward of Gull Rock, and is distant from the latter nearly 2 miles S. 45° W. Be- tween this ledge and Gull Rock there is a channel 1^ miles wide, and the rock can be approached to ^ mile on its sea side. Bryer Island Northwest Ledge is of large extent, and lies to the NW. of Bryer Island, with deep water close to its N W. side. There is a good passage between it and Rryer Island, the northwestern shore of which may be approached to J mile. 5314 5 "^-KSt&hf^KC... 66 NOVA SCOTIA — S. \V. COAST. Northwest Rock is small with ouly 6 feet water, and from it Bryer Island light-house bears S. 8° E. nearly 'k\ miles. Mourilyan mark (a lar^e granite bowlder) on a bill on Long Island in line witb tbe north point of Bryer Island bearing S. 50° E. leads northward and eastward of tbt8 ruuk, and tbe whole ledge. A bell buoy painted red and black in vortical stripes lies 400 yards N. 47° W. of this rock. Beatson Rocks consist of tvro small rocks, 200 yards apart, with 12 and 13 feet water. The northeastern, with 12 feet, lies with the North- west Bock, bearing N. 51° E. one mile (the passage between having not less than C fathoms) ; and Bryer Island light-house 3. 21° E. 3^ miles. The Northwest Ledge extends some distance southward of Beatson Rocks ; during the strength o*" the tide it shows a heavy tide rip along its whole length, and breaks h«. ivily on its shoal parts when there is much sea. Gull Rock, seen well open of Whipple Point bearing S. 18° E. leads SW. of Beatson Rocks in 10 fathoms, and Gull Rock in line with Whip- ple Point, bearing S. 14° E., leads between Beatson and Northwest Rocks. Frenchman Elbovr is a long rocky strip, having on its shoalest part 5^ fathoms; and lies between Northwest Rock and the north point of Bryer Island, being about one mile distant from the former. Tides. — The tidal stream runs very strong over the Northwest Ledge, the ebb taking a southerly and the flood a northerly direction, at the rate of about 4 knots at half tide. The stream changes about three- quarters of an hour after that in Grand Passage, or nearly about the time of high and low water there. Oral id Passage and Westport.— Grand Passage, between Bryer and Long Islands, is narrow and contains several dangers, but the prin- cipal difficulty connected with its navigation is the great velocity of the tidal streams through the channel. Supplies. — Wet^tport carries on a considerable trade in fish, and from it limited supplies may be obtained. A small supply of fresh water may also be procured from wells. Pilots. — Pilots for St. John, New Brunswick, can be obtained at West- port. Passage Shoal, with 5 feet of water, shows a tide rip; it lies in the middle of the passage, N. 14° W. from the light-house on Peter Island, and ^ mile from its nearest shore. Cow Ledge extends 300 yards ott' the Long Island shore of the northern entrance of Grand Passage ; its highest part uncovers soon after high water. Cow Ledge Shoal, with 14 feet water, lies 4 m'.lo northward of the highest part of Cow Ledge, and S. 67° E. 600 yard^i from the north point of Bryer Island. Tides. — The stream commences running to the southward full half an hour before high water by the shore, and runs with great velocity PETER ISLAND — DIRECTIONS. 67 m it Bryer ,n mark (a the uorth I eastward aud black irt, with 12 the North- haviug not E. 3% miles, of BeatsoQ le rip along an there is 8° E. leads with Whip- Northwest hoalest part th point of west Ledge, tion, at the kbout three- y about the ween Bryer mt the prin- velocity of sh, and from li water may led at West- t lies in the *eter Island, shore of the icovers soon iward of the B north point ard full half ;reat velocity through Grand Passage, especially through the two channels at its southern entrance, where it attains a rate of from 4 to 5 knots per hour. Directions.— West of Peter Island.— At the southern end of Grand Passage there is a channel on each side of Peter Island, the one on its western side being the shorter and narrower of the two, with 16 to 20 feet water and clear of danger. If making for the western entrance, keep in mid-channel, and if the flood be running bear in mind that the tide sets with great strength directly on the south point of Peter Island. The anchorage off the town of Westport is in 5 to 7 fathoms water, with the Episcopal church bearing S. 33° W. and the Baptist chapel S. 760 w. If bound through Grand Passage, after passing through the western entrance, avoid opening Dartmouth Point, east of Peter Island, until the Episco))al church bears S. 31° W., when a course may be steered for the northern entrance, through which Peter Island light-house bearing S. 2° E., or with the island open its own breadth west of Sand Point, leads in the deep-water channel west of Cow Ledge and Cow Ledge Shoal. When the north point of Bryer Island bears K 75° W. the vessel will be clear of Cow Ledge Shoal, and by keeping Peter Island light- house in sight will pass a long way to the eastward of Northwest Ledge. After passing Cow Ledge Shoal, Long Island may be approached to 200 yards, but the north point of Bryer Island should not be rounded within . J mile. East of Peter Inland.— On nearing the passage give Dartmouth Point a berth of J mile and pass along the east shore of Peter Island, which may be safely approached to within 200 yards. When Peter Island light-house bears S. 2° 37' B. follow directions already given for northern entrance. If intending to anchor at Westport, after passing Peter Island, steer sharp round the north end of the island when the Episcopal church bears S. 67° W. and pass between the shoal spit off the north end of the island and Passage Shoal, on which the flood sets with great strength. Caution.— The foregoing directions for entering Grand Passago from the southward are adapted for flood tide and a leading wind, and any departure therefrom must; be contingent on the state of the tide and direction of wind. Strangers should not attempt the anchorage off Westport without the assistance of local knowledge, as the tides in the entrance, with a velocity of 5 or 6 knots an hour, form eddies and whirlpools likely to bring a vessel round against her helm and cause her being stranded. Petit Passage, between Long Island and Digby Neck, though nar- row, is available for steam vessels, and for sailing vessels also, if the latter have a favorable wind aud tide. 68 BAY OF FUNDY — SOUTH COAST. The passage forms the shortest route between St. John Harbor and Gape Fouruhu, and is almost entirely free from dangers, the exception being a small rock, with 8 feet water, lying N. U° E. from the light- house, nearly 400 yards from the nearest part of Boar Eead. There is a passage with 4 fathoms between the shore and this rook, which shjows a tide rip during the strength of the tide and breaks in heavy weather. On the western shore of the passage an eddy is formed to the north- ward of Eddy Point, where small vessels may anchor close inshore, but they require to be moored head and stern. Tides. — The stream runs through the i)as8age at the rate of 6 or 7 miles an hour; the ebb from the northward and the flood from the southward. Directions. — When entering the passage keep a mid-channel course until approaching Eddy Point, which projects into the passage, when close the western shore, which is sieeper-to tban the eastern side in the vicinity of Sandy Poi)it. OS the south point of Digby Neck are some rocks which cover at half flood and extend about 200 yards offshore in a southerly direction. When off Cape St. Mary and running for Petit Passage on the ebb, steer for the middle of Long Island until the strip of tide running from the passage towards the cape is passed; and when within it a feeble eddy will be found on the Long Island shore setting towards the pas- sage, increasing in strength and decreasing in breadth as it nears the passage, where it extends as far as Eddy Point. When in the Bay of Fundy and wishing to enter Petit Passage on the ebb, make the Digby Neck shore to the eastward of the passage, and skirt it along until in the passage in order to avoid being swept ' past the entrance. The Digby Neck shore is steep-to, and may be ap- proached in safety to 400 yards. Coast. — The Bay of Fundy shore of Long Island is steep- to antil approaching Boar Bead, when the 8 foot detached rock already re* ferred to must be avoided ; only small vessels or steam vessels with local knowledge should attempt to pass inside it. The land on Digby Neck is partially wooded, more thickly on the side of Fundy Bay than that of St. Mary, and slopes gradually towards the Bay of Fundy shore. At West Sandy Cove and Gulliver Hole there are tolerably high cliffs, and the hollows through the neck at each of these places present a remarkable appearance. West Sandy Cove affords good anchorage, being sheltered from all winds between NE. round by south to SW. Care must be taken to avoid a ro,ck with 6 feet water lying N. 28° E. 600 yards off the western point of Western Sandy Cove, with a deep channel between it and the shore. Tides. — It is high water, full and change, at West Sandy Cove at lOh. 47m. ; springs rise 23 feet ; neaps 19 feet. Gulliver Hole is free from danger and also affords good anchorage, with all winds from NB. round by south to west. mm. DIGBY GUT — DIRECTIONS. 69 irbor and jxceptioa bhe light- There is ich shjows weather, the north- shore, but or 7 miles >uthward. oel course age, when lide in the : are some jftshore in 1 the ebb, ning from it a feeble Is the pas- nears the assage on e passage, jing swept • nay be ap- )p-to until Iready re- issels with kly on the ly towards liver Hole )ck at each tered from )e taken to he western it and the ly Cove at anchorage, Digby Gut is a narrow OT)eniag J mile in breadth, with steep acclivi- ties on each side, and a deep-water channel leading into Annapolis Basin, ou the western side of which stands the town of Digby. The inhabitants, numbering about 2,000, are engaged in lumbering and fishing. Charges.— Pilotage, $10 or $12 according to agreement; hospital dues, 2 cents per ton; labor, $1.50 per day; lumber is delivered to vessels loading, free, alongside the wharf. The United States is represented by an agent. Within Prim Point, ou the western shore of the entrance, is Man-of- war Eock, distant about 200 yards from the high-water line, and steep-to on its eastern side. Tides.— Along shore the tidal stream runs nearly parallel to its trend at the rate of ij to 2 kjiots, turning inshore a little before the time of high and low water respectively, and offshore a little later. Through the gut the stream of ebb and flood sets with a velocity of 4 to 5 knots an hour, causing various eddies and whirlpools ; the truest stream will be found on the eastern side. DirectionB. -Vessels wishing to obtain temporary anchorage m^y find it at the entrance of the gut, on the western side, about J mile within the light-house. Here the anchorage is good in about 7 fathoms, mud, about 200 yards from the shore, and sheltered from all winds ex- cept between WNW, and NE. In approaching the land in thick weather, great caution is necessary when in less than 35 fathoms water. If proceeding to the anchorage near the town of Digby, steer a mid- channel course through the entrance, and then bring the eastern point of entrance to bear N. lio w. and keep it astern ; this course will lead between the outer shoax tongue of an exfasive spit at the extremity of which there is a black buoy, and the western shore, and when Bear Island appears midway between the points of eutram - m" Bear River, anchor in 6 to 8 fathoms. When proceeding through the narrows sudden gust i of wind are fre- quently experienced, caused by the almost precipitous nature of the hills overlooking the gut. Vessels bound up the river to Annapolis should obtain the assistance of local pilots. Anchorage.- The anchorage off Annapolis is bad, owing to the numerous eddies, which in a short time cause a ship fco foul her anchor. Vessels should moor with a swivel, or head and stern. Pilots.- As pilots for Annapolis are difficult to obtain, application should be made to the comptroller of customs at Digby. The United States is represented by an agent Coast from Digby Gut to Cape Split — The land is undulating and thickly wooded, but with partial clearings, and from the shore assumes a gradual ascent until it attains an elevation of 400 to COO feet at the distance of 2 or 3 miles from the sea. To the eastward of Chute Cove this regularity of formation is diver- ii BAY OF FUNDY — SOUTH COAST. sified by perpendicular cliflfd uboat 100 feet Uigh, and forming small bays, on the points of which settlements have been made, and piers built to frtcilitiite shipping cordwood, which at present is the chief export. Small vessels can lay alongside the eastern side of these piers, which act as breakwaters, where they ground every tide. Water. — The joast from Digby Gut to the eastward abounds with fresh water, which runs in streams down the slopes of the hills into the Bay of Fundy. Boats can obtain good water from the mouths of the streams after half flood. Chute Cove. — A pier or breakwater extends off from the middle of the cove, and there is also a post-office, which is in communication with Bridgetown by means of a road by the hill. St. Croix Bay, about a mile to the eastward of Chute Cove, is sepa- rated from it by a low green point; this bay affords the best anchorage along the coast eastward of Digby Gut. Anchorages. — Off Chute Cove anchor with the breakwater 8. (54^ B. distant 000 yards, and about 400 yards off" shore, in ^ fathoms mud. In St. Croix Bay anchor with its west point bearing S. 66<^ VV. at the distance o[ ^ mile offshore in 4 fathoms, muil. Port George lies nearly 5 miles to the eastwart' of Marshall Cove and exports live stock, potatoes, and cordwood ; there is a post-oflflce at this place. Wilmot Rock uncovers at half tide, and lies about 250 yards east of the small pier at Port George, and 300 yards from the high-water itoargaretville. — Care must be taken in approaching Margaretville to avoid a shoal a mile in length and parallel with the shore, from which it is distant about J mile ; the shoalest part, with 2 feet water, lie8§ mile from the small pier near thQ lighthouse. Between the west end of this shoal, with 2 fathoms, and the break- water there is a 3fathom channel ^ mile broad. Morden or French Cross may be recognized by the square tower of its Episcopal churcii. There is also a post-office, as well as a small pier, alongside of which vessels lay aground, and ship agricultural produce and cordwood. About )( mile eastward of Morden Breakwater, and 400 yards off- shore, there is a small bank which dries at low water. Vessels should keep outside until there is sufficient water to pass over it. About a luile eastward of Morden is Joliffe Head, a high perpendicular cliff of a reddish color, and farther on are two small piers, known as Ogilvie and Gibbon Breakwaters, the latter being 6J miles from Mor- den. Anchorages. — The best anchorage near Port George is in about 5 fathoms, at the distance of one mile eastward of the pier. Off Margaretville vessels shoidd anchor within the shoal in about 5 BLACK ROCK — CAPE SPLIT. 71 Dg small iers built f export, vhioli act iiids with s into the ;h8 of the niddle of ition with ;, i8 sepa- luchorage 8. 64° B. ims iniul. W. at the hall Cove t-offlce at ranis eattt igh- water garetville lore, from eet water, he break- le square i well as a fricultural yards off- jls should i)endioular known as from Mor- n about 5 iu about 5 fathoms, sand, at the distance of { mile from the shore, with tlie high- water Hue of Port George in line with Margaretville Point. The anchorage near Morden is in about 6 fathoms a short distance eastward of the breakwater. Black Rock, from which the locality derives its name, is 21 feet above low-water springs, and covers about half flood ; it bears fcom the light-house N, 47° E. nearly J mile. At low water the rock dries about 200 feet outsiile its apex. Small piers extend out abreast Canada Creek, Chapman Brook, and Hall Harbor, all to the eastward of Black Rock light-house, from winch they are respectively distant one, 4, and 6^ miles. Outside Canada Wharf, at the distance of ^ mile offshore, is a shoal spit having only 11 feet water. Off Shoal Point, about 1^ miles east of Elall Harbor, some rocks ex- tend offshore J mile. Anchorages between Digby Q-nt and Cape Split. — Vessels can anchor all along this part of the NW. coast of Nova Scotia, with winds from east, round by south, to SW., iu about 12 fathoms water, free from rock, at distances varying from i to ^ mile offshore. In some of the bays a closer anchorage may be obtained, with soft bottom aid greater siielter; but when the wind is strong from SW., or more westerly, the ebb tide, which runs at the rate of from 2 to 3 knots along shore to the westward of Morden, renders the anchorage along the coast unfit for small vessels, and they are advised to stand off and or. during the ebb. Scotsman Bay. — Vessels bound to the Basin of Mines arriving off Cape Split and unable to proceed through on account of the strong ebb tide, may anchor on the west side of the cape, about one mile from its extremity, and 400 yards offshore, in about 10 fathoms , with the outer hill of Cape Split in Hne with the nearest point bearing N. 39° W. In the fall of the year, when gales frequently commence from the eastward and suddenly shift to the westward, the anchorage in Scots- man Bay IS dangerous. Tides.— It is high water, full and change, at Black Rook Point at llh. 29ni. ; springs rise 36 feet, neaps 31 feet. Isle Haute, about 1| mile in length and ^ mile in breadth, attains an elevation of 3 -'0 feet, is thickly wooded, and is surrounded on all sides, excepting the east and west points, by perpendicular cliffs. Its western point is formed by a steep, grassy slope, and off its eastern point is a stony si)it which uncovers at low water al)out ^ mile out. Excepting off" this point :he island is steep-to, and may be approached in safety within J mile. Anchorage. — Vessels may anchor on the XE. side of Isle Haute in about 12 fathoms, within the eddy about 250 yards from the east point of the island. Cape Split is the termination of a tapering promontory, forming the 72 BAY OP FUNDY — SOUTH COAST. i. southern point of eiitraitce to the Basiu of Mines, and consists of per- peudicuhir cliffs about 200 feet high, which are divided by several deep fissures or splits, hence the name. Two small detached rocks, which just uncover at low-water springs, lie off the ditch of Cape Split in a N. 53° W. direction, at the respec- tive estt •',■' gales, no vessel should attempt to enter without local knos\ ;;:dge. 8hoal. — About ^ miU: east of Cape D*" . the shore trends to the northward toward Horsi .lioe (Jove, and forms a point, off' which lies a detached stony shoal which dries at low water. Cape Spencer may easily be recognized by a remarkable sugar-loaf rock isolated at high water, above which it rises 20 feet. The cape should not be approached nearer than 400 yards. Spencer Island is small, thickly wooded, and 180 feet high ; it is separ ted from the mainland near Cape Spencer by a channel about- 1 mile broad in which there is as little as 6 feet water. 1 WM /^-./•LtL ADVOCATE HARBOR — BASIN OF MINES. 73 s of per- )ral deep springs, respec- lie rocks, dp a very ttinediate J thickly land falls Advocate lose-to. bignecto, ted from liifyli, and d uear its I must be ;he south- ows hard El natural maimer about 10 Dcate Set- y bottom, y at high de, where itoiiy wall ill craft — he harbor tempt to Lis to the ich lies a ui gar-loaf The ca4)e i possible ictions, in lufi' at the ty Hants, it lies 30 ul. uJi" at Ob. orijf, very \in south il tuvirly a from the latward of eft's ho re ; [back and le extends just to the eet, neaps BASIN OF MINES — AVON RIVER. 75 Cape Sharp derives its name from a remarkably sharp eminence, 300 feet high, with which it terminates; it is .H miles from Fox Point, and with the shore of the Cape Split promontory, from which it is dis- tant only 2§ miles, forms the narrowest part of the entrance to the Basin of Mines. Black Rock, with an elevation of 15 feet above high water, and of small extent, lies J mile from the nearest shore, and N. 8(3° VV. ^ mile from Cape Sharp. A deep-water channel exists between the Black Rock and the shore, but as the streams of tide set directly on the rock this passage should never be attempted. West Bay is about 2^ miles across between Cape Sharp on the west and Partridge Island on the east. Nearly the whole of the bay is occu- pied by a shoal bank of sand and gravel, the shoalest part, having 1^ fathoms, lies a little on the east side of the middle of the bay and ^ mile off shore, with Cape Split just shut in with Cape Sharp. There is not less than 3 fathoms on other parts of this bank, whilst within it, about J mile from the shore, is a narrow belt of deeper water with 5 or 6 fathoms. Anchorage. — West Bay affords good anchorage towards its western side in about 6 fathoms, mud, with Cape Sharp bearing S. 40° VV. ^ mile distant, protected from all winds, save those from NE. to south. The tide current, except r about one hour after low water, sets towards Cape Sharp. Tides.— It is high water, full and change, in West Bay at 12)i. 4m. ; springs rise 45 feet, neaps 35 feet. Partridge Island attains an elevation of 240 feet, and is connected by means of a gravel neck to the shore. The anchorage east of this island is not good. Frazer Head is 390 feet high, and, with the exception of tAvo hard- wood trees close together, is quite bare; the south rounding of the head should not be approached within J mile. The Brothers are two small, thickly wooded islands about H miles eastward of Frazer Head, and are both included within tlie low-water line of the main shore. A small patch of rocks, which uncover, lie S. 61^ E. about J mile from the south extreme of the southern Brother Island. rive Islands extends in almost a straight line S. 76° W. from the western end of Fed Head, the westernmost being 3J miles distant. The eastern island i^ much the largest of the group, thickly wooded, and attains an elevation of 350 feet, with ateep earthy cliffs on its southern Hhore; these islands are nearly joined to each other and tha main at low wat^^r. Between Five Islands ana Economy Point the cliffs bor- «'ering the ««•« attain in some parts considerable heights, and are remarkable from being red. White Rock, so called from its appearance, is 10 feet above high water, and is in line between the eastern cf the Five Islands and the SW, tang^Mt of Economy Point, being 3^ miles from the latter. m :l. 76 BAY OP FUNDY — SOUTH COAST. Brick Kiln Island, very small in size aud about 50 feet higU, with red cliffs, lies about li luilea west of Economy Poiut oa the margin of the low water lino. Brick Kiln Ledges are two in number, with their centij.vo bearing S. 70° W. of Economy L'oint, from which the western ledge — which un- covers 2 hours before low water — is 3 miles distant. Between tins ledge and White liocit are numerous rocks, and strangers are advised to avoid their locality. Economy Point, on the northern shore, is nearly 21^ miles east of Cape riiiarp, aud 4 miles N. 63° W. from Burncoat light-house. Between the liglit-hoiist; aud Economy Point is the eastern hmit of what may be termed general navigation, nor shouh. this line be passed by any vessel unless in charge of a local pilot, as further up the basin are many shoals formed of loose shifting sarid, which are constantly altering their posi- tion. Economy River. — Vessels of 15 feet draft can proceed to the saw- mill in Elconomy Kiver at high water every day, and those of 19 feet draft at high water spring tides. Tides in the Basin of Mines. — As the great rise and fall, as well as the velocity of the tides, form such important elements in the navi- gation of the Basin of Mines, it is essentially necessary that both should be carefully studied by i^eamen entering the basin. In the passage tc the Basin of Mines near the Cape Split shore the tidal stream att?,tns ii velocity of 7 to 8 knots an hour, but in the center aud mar the uortbora shore it decreases to 5 or 6 knots. Between Gape Split and lie head of the basin the strength varies from about 3 kaots in the wider parts to 4 knots where the channel is contracted, its direc- tion being motUfled by the trend of the land. Directions.— In navigating the Basin of Mines seamen must bear in mind that the various banks and bars are as a rule composed of loose shifting sand, and that rapid tides and strong winds cause them to alter their positions, especially after heavy gales and in the spring on the breaking up of the ice. Vessels tiesirous of reaching the anchorage at the entrance of Avon River without the assistance of a pilot should bring Cape Blomidon to bear N. 30° W., and keeping it astern on the above bearing, pass be- tween Cross aud Western Bars (this course, however, will lead over IJ fathoms at low water), until Horton light house bears S. 11° E. ; then steer for it on tbat bearing and when the wooded point east of Horton River is in line with the highest point of Long Island anchor in about 7 fathoms. From the fairway between the tide rip off Cape Split and Pox Point steer S. 78° E. until abreast Cape Sharp, from whence if bound to Parrs- boro River steer to round Partridge Island at a moderate distance; keep Cape Split in sight until Parrsboro lighthouse bears N. 22° W., when steer for it, and pass close round to the eastward of the spit on BASIN OP MINES — DIRECTIONS. 77 gU, with fia of the :, bearing vhicb un- this ledge -I to avoid es east of Between It may be my vessel ,ny shoals ;heir posi- > the saw- of 19 feet 1, as well the navi- ith should shore the he center ^een Gape It 3 knots its direc- st bear in d of loose )Qi to alter Qg on the e of Avon omidon to , pass he- ld over IJ E. ; then )f Horton r in about Pox Point 1 to Parrs- distance ; !f. 22° W., he spit on which the light-house stands. This river can only bo entered about one hour before high water, and when within the lighthouse, vessels can lay on the mud at low water in perfect safety. If bound up the basin, after passing Partridge Island steer about east, and when Parrsboro lighthouse bears N. 72° W, keep it on that bearing, and steer S. 72° E. until Burncoat lighthouse bears east, when steer for it on this bearing— which will lead southward of Brick Kiln Ledge— until abreast Economy Point, beyond which the services of a pilot should be obtained for reasons already assigned. In moderate weather vessels may anchor iilonjftue shores of the Basin of Mines, but on the northern shore the bot»^ is hard, and therefore the anchorage is inferior to that on the soul Vessels may also ascend various small rivers, but the latter cj' '.« entered at high water, and as a matter of course vessels are lr.\ ..t low •/ atar. Off Cornwallis River the best anchorage is in 5 to 6 fathoms, sand, with Horton lighthouse seen just open east of Boot Island hearings. 36° E. and the northern tangent of the south point of Pereau Creek S. 85° W. This anchorage may be considered good with all but north- easterly and easterly winds, and when approaching it care should be taken to avoid shutting in the west point of Partridge Island with Oape Blomidon. C H APTE R IV. NOVA SOOTIA., SOUTHEA.ST OOAST. — POBT LATOUB TO 8AMBB0 HABBOR. Coast — The seaboard of the SB. coast, between cape Sable to the SW. and cape Ganso to the NE., is no less than 230 miles in a straight line; the general trend being about NE. and SW. Throughout the whole extent of this rocky coast are numerous indentations, varying in size and utility, from the narrow creek in which boats seek shelter to noble liarbors, of which Halifax is the largest, most accessible and safest. The coast is fringed by numerous islands and sunken dangers which, by breaking the sea, tend to facilitate the progress and promote the safety of the local coasting trade ; but to insure its successful prose- cution, local knowledge of the coast and its dangers is indispensable; the more so as the fogs— of s> density seldom experienced elsewhere — are very prevalent during the s^i iter ;» '.rt of the year. Port Latour is a bight opuu to the southward, but in consequence of its numerous dangers, sb-'i^w water, and bad anchorage, is only used by small fishing vessels. I'iiu only safe anchorage Is east of John Island, but it is small and studded with rocks, and should not be attempted by any but those possessed of good local experience. Baccaro Outer Ledge, about ^ mile in length, and 3^ fathoms on its shoalest part, lies with Baccaro light-house N. 66° W. nearly IJ miles, and Blanche^ Is'Iand south point N. 50° E. 2^ miles. South Ledge consists of several rocks, the south westernmost of which is always seen, and from it the northern rock — which uncovers at a quarter ebb — bears K. 6° E. 300 yards, and Baccaro light-house S. 67° W. 1^ miles. Stone Horse, at the eastern end of the South Ledge, has only 4 feet water, and is ^ mile distant from the southern rock of South Ledge in a S. 79° B. direction. North Ledge, about 4 mile iQ length, has on it" northern end a rock 3 feet above high water, and on its SW. end is a small rock which is awash at low water. From the latter rock the high water line north of Baccaro Point is distant f mile, and Baccaro light-house bears S. 50° W. 1 ,^ miles. Cuckold Rock, awash at low- water springs, is a small detached rock between the South Ledge and Baccaro light-house, which latter bears from the rock S. 65° W. * mile. 78 mm O HARBOR. able to the t a straight ughont the , varying in c shelter to ) and safest, gera which, promote the issful prose- [ispensable; I where — are sequence of )nly used by ohn Island, ;tempted by thorns on its •ly 1 J miles, ternmost of ch uncovers ght-house S. ,8 only 4 feet h Ledge in a n end a rock ock which is line north of bears S. 50o etached rock I latter bears ^SSSieSSSKIfS M?,$;'itt ?^--^ ? ff, '; ^^taa-iMW^feMaSgK-f-i« being i" 'J» P- J"-,,, „, ,,, .^,er„ pa. There arc several other dangers on mo . ^ u> the shallow »ge, snob ^^^J^ZZTl^^LXT^^i--^ -- "' rifhVaZrthrwrsSrn'sm: of the entrance, but there are no good cross marks for f»se dangers. ^^^ Dil.otlon»-Ba.t»m =»^^°*-, '" "r^od „, Negro Island to within 200 yards, alter whu g '"» "J^"^™;C,ks fstern. Tbi. rrri:::irmr----BndgetL.and the rocks- r9'Wgr^«-r=rr:itd^^^^^ Bast Point, Budget kock w m u.* route— but over a be altered to N. 78o W., which will »«/j^ ^^^^^^^^^t ; when Davis 3.fatho,n patch-for a g-^l P^rsteer fo t^^^^^^ on theeast- Island east Poi"t bears N. 40° W., steer tor ,t, a ^ i^i^^d em shore in about 3J fathoms, mud, ^'^htheNE. point apparently .justtonching,^rs^^^^^^^^ We8ternSntrance.--Approachmg tro ^^ ^.^^^ 1 : ;-^^^i»siefl^s^sE^^^t^A-5^"-^ NEORO AND 8HELBURNE HARBORS. 81 I western taut from luiel; the 1 rook bas hero rock t the cape. ,e Triangle whilst the : is about ^ e nearly all above high (Fith >i mod- Bast Point the actual 90 yards by , north side Ic there is » ending from loald not be Rock, and is uch reliance eastern pas- the shallow list covers at are no good lay be passed (gro Island to astern. This the rocks oflf last tangent of course should te— but over a when Davis or on the east- f Negro Island I give the south Boseway light- proceed on that bearing until Purgatory Point appears Ju.st touching Mackerel Rock N. 46° VV., when ateer on the latter course until the SW. point of Negro Island bears S. 85° E., then steer N. 68° W. between Mackerel and Tri- angle Rocks, and when Shag Rock bears south, steer north until abreast Purgatory Point, and proceed for the anchorage as before directed. If desirous of passing south of Triangle Rocks', and having Cape Roseway light-house just open of Cape Negro as before, bring Shag Rock to bearN. 79° W. and steer N. 74° W., which will lead in inidchanuel between the southern Triangle Rock and Shag Rocks, and when the latter bears 8. 44° W., alter course to N. 18° W., and proceed past Purgatory Point for the anchorage according to previous directions. Cape Negro open of the high water tangent next west the cape is a good mark for keeping south of the southern rock of the Triangle group. Shelbume Harbor lies 6 miles northward of Negro Harbor. Be- tween the two harbors are several indentations, as well as Grey Island and Gull Rock ; but they need no description. It is situated in the eastern arm of an inlet to which navigable entrance lies between the mainland and the eastern side of McNutts Island. The harbor is safe and commodious, and being easy of access is admirably adapted for vessels seeking shelter. Fresh water of an excellent quality is to be obtained. The United States is represented by an agent. McNutts Island is nearly 3 miles long by about half that distance wide, and near its center attains an elevation of 130 feet. Between the eastern side oJ the island, which is steep-to, and the mainland, is a broad clear channel leading to Shelbume fifarbor ; but the passage on the western side is rendered impassable by an extensive shallow bar, on which in some places there is only one foot at low water. Cape Roseway. — On the southeastern extremity of McNutts Island is Cape Roseway, a remarkable white granite cliff, on which stands the light-house 77 feet high (forming a prominent day mark). Jig Rock, with 7 feet water, breaks in a heavy swell and lie8.| mile S. 20° £). from the south point of McNutts Island, there being 4 fathoms over rocky bottom in the channel between. Bell Rock, a few feet above high water, lies with Cape Roseway light-house bearing S. 54° W. 2^ miles, and Blue Gull Island N. 15° E. 1^ miles. Btraptub Rock lies on the south end of a shallow spit extending from Bony Point on the main shore. The rock uncovers at low water, and from it Bell Rock bears S. 49° E. I mile. Adamant Shoal, about j| mile in extent, lies nearly in the middle of Shelbume Harbor ; the actual dangers are confined to two rocky patches, the eastern of which, known as Adamant Rock, has 10 feet water, and the western, or Man-of-war Rock, distant 300 yards west, has only 4 feet water. Middle Rock, with 2^ fathoms on its shoalest part, lies east | mile 5314—6 mi 82 NOVA SCOTIA — 8. E. COAST. from Surt Point, on which is a remarkable bowlder, and i mile from the nearestshoreSW, of Sand Point. ^. , ,,^ a «ff Hnrf Hart Point Rock, with only 9 feet, lies about 400 yards oflf Hart Hero Shoal, witli 2* fathoms on it, lies on the western shore near the head of the harbor. A white house on an elevation NB. of tlie town of Shelburne on with Shelburne south church, leads 200 yards east- ward of the shoal. , Directions—On nearing McNutts Island steer along its eAstern shore, which is steep-io, at a uioderate offing, and when drawing near Middle Rock bring the NE. bluff of the island to bear S. 46° B., and steer N. 46° W. until abreast Surf Point, which can be passed within 200 yards, thence steer to pass in mid-channel between Sand Point and the land on the western shore. From this latter position, if desirous of passing east of Adamant Shoal, steer to the northward, being careful on ap- preaching the shoal to keep Grey Island open of Surf Point Bowlder bearing S. 10° B., and after passing the danger select an anchorage as most convenient on the eastern side of the harbor S. 12° E. If wishing to round the Adamant Shoal on its western side, and being in a mid channel position abreast Sand Point, steer along the western Bbore with Surf Point Bowlder apparently just touching the SW. high- water line of McNutts Island bearing S. 23° B., and when Churchover church tower comes in line with the end of the Durphy Wharf alter course to N. 44° B., bearing in mind that the white house before alluded to open SB. of the Episcopal church tower bearing N. 22° B. clears Hart Point Rock, and all dangets on the western shore between Hart Point and the town of Shelburne. Jordan River is a deep indentation with a general trend to the north- ward and is upwards of IJ miles in breadth at its entrance. The place is easy of access and comparatively free from danger, but can not be deemed a good anchorage, in consequence of the heavy seas which tun in during southerly gales. , . ^ ^ Blue GuU Island, about i mile in length, and 45 feet high, forms the western point of entrance to Jordan River. Between this island and Jordan Point there are numerous rocks, some of which uncover at low water. „ , , x i t>-„.„ Green Island, which is common to Green Harbor and Jordan River, is 70 feet high and i mile in length, and about the same distance from Patersou Point, the channel between carrying a depth of 15 feet water. The Sisters are a cluster of rocks about i mile from the western shore. Two of the rocks uncover at half ebb, and generally show a break with much sea. j i, • ^.u Directions.— Approaching Jordan River from seaward, bring the west end of Green Island to bear N. 17° W., and after passing it at a moderate offing, steer boldly up in mid-channel, by which the Sisters Rocks will be avoided, and anchor in about 3^ fathoms on the western 1 RUGOED ISLAND HARBOR. 88 I from the off Hart lore uear : the town jrds east- teru shore, jar Middle d steer N. 200 yards, I the laud of passing )ful on ap- it Bowlder ichorajje as ), and being he western jSW. high- Uhurchover Vharf alter fore alluded clears Hart Hart Point to the north- The place t can not be 8 wbiuh I an high, forms this island uncover at ordan River, istance from 6 feet water, the western rally show a •d, bring the assing it at a the Sisters the western shore, with western head just open of the high-water line about Pater- son Point bearing S. 40° E., and Jordan Point in line with the west tangent of Blue Gull Rock about S. 12° E. Green Harbor. — None but the smallest description of vessels can find shelter from southerly and southeasterly gales, which send in a heavy rolling sea. Anchorage can be obtained witl^ winds from west round by north to east. Rugged Island Harbor derives its name from the rugged appear- ance of the coast in its immediate vicinity. Black Point, on the east- ern side of the entrance, is 1^ miles distant from Ram Island in a west direction, and between this point and Western Head there are numer- ous ledges and sunken dangers, rendering the approaches to the har- bor difficult and dangerous. This place is seldom resorted to, e:!ccept by fishermen, although within the harbor the anchorage is good. Dur- ing southerly gales the uneven rocky ground at the entrance causes the sea to break from side to side. Buoy — An automatic whistle buoy, painted red, with the letter L in white on it, is moored with Gull Rock. light-house bearing N. 62° W., distant 3^ miles, and eastern extreme of Ram Island north. From this buoy a N. 40° W. course leads nearly midway between Blow Breaker and the 4^-fathom patch sun th westward of it, thence to the southern end of Cranberry Island, which can be approached with comparative safety, with the careful use of the lead in foggy weather. Gull Rock is a small rocky ledge about 15 feet high off the entrance to Rugged Island Harbor. Long Shoal, with 3^ fathoms, lies with the highest part of Green Island in line with the outer end of Western Head bearing N. 50^ W., and Gull Rock light-house N. 24'^ E. nearly a mile. Bull Rock, the outer of two dangers off Western Head, has only 3 feet water, and its position is generally marked by a break. From it the western extremity of Western Head bears N. 7° E. 1^ miles ; and Gull Rock light-house N. 47° E. about 2 miles. Within Bull Rock, \ mile distant, is another detached shoal, having 10 feet, with deep water between and around the two. Chain Ledges consist of a narrow broken ridge of rocks nearly a mile in length north and south ; the highest part of the ledges stands about 10 feet above high water, and on the southern extreme is a small rock which uncovers at low water, and generally shows a break. From this latter rock Gull light-house bears S. 23° E. over f mile, and the extreme of Western Head S. 47° W. The northern end of the ledges terminates in a rock with only 3 feet water, at the distance of a good ^ mile from the highest part of the ledge ; and between it and the south end of some rocky ledges south of Cranberry Island and Sam Rock, detached with 10 feet water; but though deep water channels exist on either side of it they are too nar- row to be available for navigation except by small coasting vessels. I I 5; i U ' It' r w 84 NOVA SCOTIA — S. E. COAST. Middle Ground is an extensive shallow spit studded with rocks, several of which nncover at low- water springs; the shoal extends from the west side of Gooseberry Island, more than lialf way across to Cran- berry Island on the western side of the entrance to Rugged Island Har- bor. A yellow house on the eastern shore of the harbor open west- ward of Shag Rpck bearing N. 19° E. leads westward of the Middle Ground. From the Middle Ground to the northward a bank of 3 fathoms ex- tends from the eastern shore nearly across the harbor, leaving only a narrow channel about 200 yards wide, with 3i fathoms, abreast of Car- ter Island, thus rendering it unadvisable to attempt the anchorage within with vessels drawing more than 15 feet. Whale Rock is the highest part of an extensive rocky shoal north- east of and almost joining Gull Rock. The shoal is nearly a mile in length north and south between the 5fathom lines, but the most dan- gerous part is the southern, where, i» addition to the Whale Rock, which uncovers at low water and generally shows a break, are several sunken dangers, the southernmost of which is Kelp Shoal with only 3 feet water. Trinidad Rock is a small detached patch, with 10 feet water, near the north end of the shoal of which Whale Rock is a part, and from it Gull Rock light-house bears S. 4° W. -^o mile. South Ledge is a small detached shoal with 3 fathoms water. From it Gull Rock lighthouse bears N. 23° W., the nearest point of the rock being J mile distant, and the highest part of Blue Gull Island on with the outer end of Western Head bearing N. 77° W. Eastern Bull, known also as Blow Breaker, is a small rocky patch with only 4 feet water. From it the north end of Ram Island appears touching the south end of Black Rock bearing N. 52° E., and a white house near Gumming Point is in line with the west end of Gooseberry Island N. 26° W. Black Point Rock uncovers at low water, and is the outer and highest point of a spit extending from Black Point in a southerly direc- tion. The white house near Gumming Point in line with the west end of Gooseberry Island bearing N. 26° W. leads westward of Black Point Eock, and Black Rock its apparent length open north of Ram Island leads between the rock and Eastern Bull. Tides. ^The tidal current along shore between Ram Island and Baccaro Point is governed by the Bay of Fundy tide, the flood setting to the westward and the ebb to the eastward. The velocity increases in proceeding westward .'vom Ram Island, where the strength varies from half to one knot an hour. There is also a current ofif this shore, and though the general trend is to the west ward, its strength and direction are greatly influenced by winds. After easterly gales the current increases its westerly set, and it is retarded in proportion by westerly gales. RUGGED ISLAND HAKUOR — DIRECTIONS. 85 th rocks, luds from to Cran- aud Har- )eii west- e Middle thouiB ex- ng only a st of Car- mchorage oal north- a mile in most dan- lale Rock, re several nth only 3 Fater. near »nd from it ter. From )f the rock nd on with ocky patch id appears nd a white Gooseberry outer and jerly direc- le west end Jlack Point tarn Island sland and ood setting increases igth varies ;y neral trend flueuoed by irly set, and From the Westward. — After passing Western Head at a moderate distance, bring it in line with Cape Koseway lighthouse aud continue with these marks in line until Gull Rock lighthouse bears S. 46<^ E., when steer N. 7° E. for the west side of Clam Island. Rounding Chim Island at about 20U yards distance, anchor in 2,^ fathoms, mud, with the west end of Clam Island bearing S. 4° W., where the liolding ground is good and the anchorage safe. There is also fair anchorage on the east side of the bay betwe'^n Shag Rock and a position ^ mile south of Clam Island in 'i^ to 4 fathoms. Care shouUl be taken on passing Shag Rock to avoid a shoal with only 6 feet on it, about 200 yards to the NW. The anchorage within Locke Island is only adapted for vessels of small draft, but it can not be deemed secure, as the holding grouud is bad. Directions from the Eastward. — Vessels with a leading wind can pass between Emulous aud Farm Ledges in 5 fathoms by bringing the Gull Rock light-house in line with the oater end of Western Head bear- ing 8. 83° W. ; or outside Farm Ledge by bringing Government Point at the entrance of Shelburne Harbor in line with the outer end of Western Head bearing west. With either of the above marks in line proceed to the westward until the white house near Cumming Point is in line with the west end of Gooseberry Island bearing N. 27° W. (the marks for leading over the Eastern Bull), thence steer for the south end of Cranberry Island, and when the yellow house is in line with Shag Island N. 15° E. steer for the west side of Clam Island aboat N. 7° E., and proceed as before directed. From Seaward. — Bring Gull Rock lighthouse to bear N. 4° E., and on approaching it pass about ^ mile west of the rock, and when abreast the lighthouses teer N. 7° E. until approrching Cranberry Island. When a yellow house is in line with Sha\ Rock, proceed as before directed. Ram Island, a long ^ mile in length, with an elevation of 21 feet, lies off the pitch of Hemeon Head, from which it is distant ^ mile, but the channel with 3^ fathoms is narrowed to the breadth of 300 yards by shoal spits extending from the island and main shores. A dangerous rocky shoal extends in a southerly direction from the south end of Ram Island for the distance of a mile, terminating in Emulous Ledge which UL^-overs at low water. FaiTn Ledge is a small detached shoal, with 31^ fathoms water, ^ mile outside Emulous Ledge, the channel between having depths of 5 to 7 fathoms. From the ledge the tangents of Black Rock and Ram Island appear nearly touchiug bearing N. 15° E. and the extremity of Western Head just 3hnt in by Gull Rock. There is also a small patch with 5 fathoms water at the distance of i mile S. 10° W. from Farm Ledge. Black Rock, about 10 feet above high water, is divided in t«vo, and 86 NOVA SCOTIA — 8. E. COAST. at a little distauoe resembles two rocks ; the rock is about \ mile from the shore of Hemeon Head, with a narrow deep-water channel between. Bantam Rock, of small extent, uncovers at low water, and lies S. l6o W. I mile from Harding Point ; it is the highest point of a cluster of rocky patches which occupy a space g mile in length north and south. From Bastard Rock, the southeaaternmost of the group, with 3^ fathoms water, the summit of the dark hill of Richardson Head is seen over the high-water tangent within Green Island, bearing N. 30° B. Although there is a deep-water channel between Bantam Rock and the entrance points of Sable River, large vessels should keep outside these patches. Sable River.-— At the distance of 1!^ miles SW. of Green Island is Harding Point at the eastern entrance of Sable River; but as a bar with only 3 feet water (which breaks heavily in southerly gales) extends across the river entrance, none but very small vessels in charge of men possessing local knowledge can make the navigation of this river available. Oreen Island, about 20() yards in extent and 45 feet high, lies about J mile from the nearest shore, the passage between being rocky, shal- low, and uneven. Port Hebert— The entrance to the port may be easily recognized by the dark hill of Richardson Head, thickly wooded and about 130 feet high, with a very abrupt fall towards the east. Within Richardson Head, and stretching across the river, is a bar with only 2 fathoms water, which breaks in heavy weather. Hebert Rocks, which uncover at low water about J mile from the shore, form the outer part of a spit extending from the western point of entrance to Port Hebert. Tides.— The tidal current through the channel changes a little after high and low water by the shore, and during springs attains a velocity of one knot per hour. Directions.— Port Hebert affords safe anchorage, but only to small vessels on account of the bar and narrow channel. Strangers should never attempt the port without a leading wind, and even then the services of a pilot should be procured. Bring Shingle Point in line with a white house bearing N. I o W., and when approaching Shingle Point pass it about 100 yards, and anchor in 4 fathoms water off a water course on the south end of a shingle beach north of Shingle Point, distant J mile. Port Jolie, an indentation 5 miles deep, is only available for small vessels, and even for those there is no safe anchorage ; the so-called port should be avoided by strangers. Little Hope Shoal, distant 2 miles S. 61° W. from Little Hope light- house, is if mile long between the 5fathom lines, and has on its shoalest point only 10 feet water, from which Lesser Hope Rock, off the western point of Port Jolie, is in line with Thrum Point on the eastern side of PORT MOUTON — BRAZIL ROCKS. 87 aile from between. Dtl lies S. a cluHter ,iid south. I fatlioms 1 over the ttock and '|) outside Island is as a bar i) extends ge of men this river lies about >cky, shal- agnized by lit 130 feet uichardsou 2 fathoms e from the rn point of little after i a velocity ly to small ;ers should 1 then the N. I o W., ^ards, and a end of a e for small called port Hope light- its shoalest ;he western ern side of Port Ebert bearing S. 82° W., and the eastern tangent of Jolie Point N. 7° W., the distance off the pitch of the point being 1;^ miles. Little Hope Islet, 15 feet high, is composed of small bowlders, thrown np by the sen, on a rocky foundation, and from it in a northerly direc- tion shoal water extends ^ mile, whilst on the south side the 5 fathom line is nearly J mile distant from the shore of the islet. A lino S. 35° W. from the south point of Mouton Island apparently touches Mouton Head and Jolie Point on the mainland. The distance between the two latter points is nearly 3.^ miles, with Little Jolie and Cadden bays intervening; Black Point, off which sLoal water extends about It mile, being common to both. Port Mouton. — There are two channels leading to the anchorage; the one north of Mouton Island is available for large vessels, but the western channel is narrow and difficult, and not adapted for vessels drawing more than 15 feet water. The principal occupation of the set- tlers along the shores of the port is fishing. Mouton Island, 110 feet high, is 2 miles long north and south, and 5 mile broad. From its north point a spit extends nearly a mile in a NW. direction, on the outer extremity of which there is a shoal with 2f fathoms; between this shoal and a similar depth near the island there is a channel over the spit with 3^ fathoms. There is also a detached shoal with 3^ fathoms water a short ^ mile N. 24° E. from the NE. point of Spectacle Island. Lifeboat— There is a lifeboat at the northwestern end of the island. South Rock lies 400 yards off the south point of Mouton Island, and uncovers at low water. Bull Rock, 4 feet above high water, lies 300 yards off Bull Point on the mainland within Mouton Island, and from its position is useful as a guide for the narrows. Middle Rock, with 7 feet water, occupies a central position in the narrows of the western channel, between Bull Rock and the rocks ex- tending in a southerly direction from Jacket Island. Devastation Shoal has only 2 fathoms water on its northern end, which lies in an easterly direction f mile from the south point of Mou- ton Island. There is a deep-water channel between the island and the shoal, and Round Rock bearing N. 4° E. will lead through the center in 5 fathoms. Brasil Rocks form a cluster about ^ mile in length ; several of the rocks uncover, but one known as the Bound Rock is always above water, and is consequently of great service in entering the port by the eastern channel. From the Roand Rock the north tangent of Moutou Island bears 8. 72° W., and it is distant from Halibut Head about a mile, the channel between being deep and free from danger. A de- tached rock, with only 3 feet water, lies at the distance of 800 yards iti a SE. direction from the Round Rock. White Point Rock, with 2$ fathoms water, is of small extent with *; 88 NOVA SCOTIA — 8. E. COAST. deep water close-to; from it White Point bears N. 33° W. distant 1^ miles, and tlie hi|;liest Brazil Hock in line with Halibut Head 8. 02° W. White Point Shoal, with 6 fathoms water, lias 10 and 13 fathoms close around. This shoal should be avoided by large vessels because the rock rises so abruptly that the lead may possibly have missed the highetn Island angent of marks on W., and lids about a year and tlv s'nall draft to anchor in Herring Cove. Front Eastern Uead to the westward for the distance of a mile the slioru is foul, and an otUng of ^ mile should be maintained. The town of Liverpool, at the head of the bay, is hidden from view on approaching from se^iward. It carries on in connection with Mill- town an extensive trade with Halifax, the United States, and West Indies. The exports are principally lumber, cordwood, fish, and farm produce. Shipbuilding is carried on to a small extent, and a considerable amount of tonnage belongs to the port; there is a foundry where small repairs can be effected. Provisions and water can always be procured. The United States is represented by an agent. Automatic Buoy. — An automatic whistling buoy painted black and white in vertical stripes, is moored, in 20 fathoms water, in the fairway to Liverpool Bay ; with Coffin Island light-house bearing N. 17° W., distant IJ miles; Fort Point light-house N. 68° W., and Western Head S. «2o W., 2i miles. Fort Point Ledge extends off Fort Point in a NE. direction; the outer end of the ledge is distant from the light-house 200 yards, and is marked by a buoy on its NE. end in 2 fathoms water. Directioiui. — In proceeding up Liverpool Bay a mid-channel course should, if possible, be preserved. The anchorage mark in Herring Cove is Moose Point in line with the SE. point of the cove, in about 2 fathoms, mud; the holding ground is good, but a considerable sea rolls in during heavy gales between south and east. Safe anchorage can be obtained at the entrance of the river abreast the town, but it is only adapted for small vessels, as a bar with 4 feet water extends across the entrance ; the services of a local pilot are necessary. Coffins Island, thickly wooded, lies on the north side of Liverpool Bay. The northern end of the island is distant § mile from the mainland, and is connected by a shallow bar on which in some places the depth is only 3 feet. Port Metway. — The eastern side of the entrance consists of a series of small islands extending from the mainland to a distance of about 3 miles in a southerly direction, and terminating in Frying-pan Islet, a small rocky islet 10 feet above high water. In Port Metway safe anchorage is to be obtained, but in the channel leading thereto are several rocks, which render it difficult of access to strangers, who should obtain the services of a local pilot. Above the town, to the NW., are several mills where lumber is sawn ; this and fish form the principal articles of export. Metway light-house stands on the shore of Metway Head, a dark wooded headland forming the western point of entrance into Port Met- way. Southwest Breaker is a dangerous patch with only 6 feet water, on I I 90 NOVA SCOTIA 8. E. COAST. the south euJ of a rocky shoal off the entrance of Port Metway. Be- tween it and Frying-pan Island there is a deep-water channel nearly ^ mile broad between the 5-fathom lines. A red bell buoy, marked " SW. Breaker," in black letters, is moored ^ mile 8. 25° W. of it. Stone Horse is a detachetl rock which uncovers at low- water springs, and from it Metway light-house appears, almost touching the south tangent of Frying-pan Island ; from the latter the rock is distant about ^ mile. Rugged Rock is a detached patch lying off the extremity of a spit extending from the shore a little south of Metway Head. This rock has only 7 feet water, and is marked by a breaker in heavy weather. Stony Ridge, consisting of bowlders, with 1^ fathoms on its shoalest part, is distant about 200 yards from the nearest high-water line north of the light- house. Middle Island Rock, with 9 feet water, breaks in heavy weather ; this rock lies on the eastern side of the channel abreast Neils Point. Middle Ledge is a shoal patch about J of a mile in length and hav- ing on it several rocks which uncover at low water. Nautilus Rock is on the outer end of a large flat extending from the shore between Neils Point and the town a distance of H miles in aNW. direction. The flat extends upwards of J mile from the shore, and is connected by a narrow neck with the shoal water on the northern part 01 the bay. The south tangent of Bass Island apparently touching the outer wharf of the town bearing S. 78° W. leads over the neck in about 15 feet water ; and Bass Island north end apparently touching the south end of Foster Island S. 75° W. just clears the southern edge of the bank extending from Foster Island in an easterly direction. Directions. — Vessels entering Port Metway should leave the bell buoy ott" SW. Breaker to the eastward. From it a course N. 17° W. will lead up to the iron-can buoy oft" the flats northward of Neils Point. When the northern wharf of the town bears west, bring Dry Ledgo to bear N. 19^ W., in order to keep well clear of Middle Ledge, and when Bass Island opens out north of the outer wharf of the town bear- ing S. 79° W., alter course to bring Bass Island in the middle of the opetiing between the outer wharf before mentioned and the south side of Foster Island; with this mark on proceed, and when the noith end of Toby Island is in line with Neils Point bearing S. 60° B. anchor in 5 fathoms, mud. If from the eastward, and wishing to pass between the Stone Horse and Southwest Breaker, open Metway lighthouse well to the south- ward of Frying-pan Island, and when the lighthouse bears N. 68° W. steer for it until the bell buoy bears S. 17° E. and proceed as previously directed. O-reen Bay, is about 3^ miles in depth, with gradual soundings and sandy bottom. The bay is not a safe anchorage, for not only is it ex- PORT METWAY — LA HiVE BIVEK. 91 itway. Be- lel nearly ^ irked "SW. ter springs, r the soath stant about ty of a spit liis rocic has Lther. its sboalest r line north y weather; ils Point, th and hav- ng from the es in aNW. ihore, and is )rthern part outer wharf » feet water ; id of Foster i extending ive the bell e N. 17° W. Neils Point. Dry Ledge Ledge, and } town bear- iddle of the e south side le north end 3. anchor in Stone Horse ) the south- 8 N. 680 W. IS previously uiidings and only is it ex- posed to southerly winds, but is also objectionable during easterly gales, which generally draw round by way cf south. Anchorage. — Small vessels will find secure anchorage within the en- trance of Crooked Island Channel, to enter which bring the wharf on Johnsons Island in the middle of the opening bearing N. 53° E., and steer on this course in the middle of the channel. After passing the rocky entrance keep between the mud banks on either side, which may be distinguished by the grass which grows on the mud flats, and anchor when about 200 yards from the wharf. Qreen Point Rock, a small isolated patch having 10 feet water on it, lies J^ mile from Green Point in a N. 78° W. direction. Q-reen Ledge, ^ mile in extent, has a small portion wliich uncovers at the last quarter ebb; from this part Long Point bears N. 20° W. §■ mile, and Green Point S. 76° B. 1 J miles. Entering Green Bay east of the Half-way Bock and Green Ledge, on passing Indian Island, avoid bringing the SW, end of Indian Island to bear eastward of S. 28° E., or southward of S. 12° E. in order to clear Green Point Hock. Half-way Rock, so called from its being nearly midway between Indian Island and Long Point, on the western side of Green Bay, has 2f fathoms on it, and lies with Cape La Have a little open south of Green Point, the latter bearing If. 81° E. IJ miles distant, and the SW. end of Indian Island S. 42° E. Indian Island, about ^ mile in length, is distant one mile south- ward from Green Point, with a clear, deep channel between, f mile wide. Bantam Shoal, a small rocky patch with only 3 feet water, lies off the center of Bantam Bay, and from it Green Point bears N. 87° W. J mile. La Ha^e River— From West Ironbound Island on the east to Cape La Have, an abrupt cliff with a reddish face, 95 feet high, forming the western point of the river entrance, the distance is 4 miles. From its entrance the river takes a general trend to the northward, and is navi- gable for small vessels as far as Bridgewater, a settlement on the right bank of the river, nearly 15 miles from West Ironbonnd Island. On the inside shore of Cape La Have are numerous islets, which by retaining the debris of the river are now connected with each other and the main shore by a series of shallow banks, with occasional deep- water holes and channels. A bell buoy is moored in 22 fathoms, with West Ironbound Island light-house bearing N. 2° E., distance 2|- miles, and Moshers Island light-house N. 32° W., distant 3 miles. Black Rock, small in extent and 5 feet above high water, lies S. 69° E. one mile from the pitch of Cape La Have. Small vessels may ap- proach this rock tolerably near on all sides, but large vessels should not approach its south side nearer than J mile, on account of two small shoals with 4^ and 4J fathoms respectively. 92 NOVA SCOTIA — 8. E. COAST. The east tangents of Point Enrag^ and West Ironbound Island in line bearing N. 28° E. leads southward and eastward of these shoals. Cape Rock is small, with 3J fathoms, J mile from Cape La Have in a southerly direction, with deep water all round. Moshers Island, 135 feet high, is 1^ miles long east and west and ^ mile broad, and is connected with East Spectacle Island at J mile north of it by a bar with general depths of 2^ fathoms. Shag Rock, which covers at high water, lies N. 69° E. 4 mile from the north end of West Ironbound Island. Ironbound Breaker is a small rock on the outer extremity of a spit extending J jnile from the west point of West Ironbound Island. ' French Rock, witli 7 feet water, and 2 to 3 fathoms close around, lies on the bar between West Spectacle and Moshers Islands ; within this bar there is a safe anchorage in 3 to 4 fathoms, mud. West Iron- bound Island lighthouse, just seen clear of the NE. end of Moshers Island, leads southward of French Bock. Moshers Ledge, lying nearly midway between the west end of Moshers Island and West Spectacle Island, has only one foot water. Cockawee Shoal, ^ mile in length, lies between West Spectacle Island and the western shore of La Have River, and has only 4 feet water on its shoalest part. The SW. end of West Ironbound Island, appar- ently touching the NE. end of East Spectacle Island bearing 8. 69° E. leads SW.; the house in the sandy cove on the NB. side of Moshers Island open of East Spectacle Island bearing S. 37° E. leads eastward ; and the Episcopal church bearing N. 9° W. leads westward of Gocka- w« e Shoal. Ozners Rock, which dries at low water, is the highest part of a shoal extending olf Oxners Head for some distance along shore. Bull Rock. — From the shore near the Episcopal church there ex- tends in a southeasterly direction a rocky shoal, the highest part of which, known as Bull Bock, is just awash at high-water extraordinary springs, and is therefore generally visible. About 200 yards from Bull Bock, in a SE.direction, there is a shoal with only one foot water; and another with 3 feet water lies nearly 200 yards from Bull Bock, in a north- easterly direction. Krout Point in line with middle of Parkes Island N. 5° E. leads eastward of the shoal. Directions.— Approaching La Have Biver, two passages are avail- able, one on each side of West Ironbound Island ; the only danger to be avoided on passing outside the island is Ironbound Breaker. The passage inside West Ironbound Island is narrow ; Shag Bock is nearly always seen, but should it be covered the SE. tangent of Cross Island in line with Point Enrag^ bearing N. 48° E. will clear the Shag Bock and lead through between the island and Gaff Point. There are several available anchorages at the entrance of and within La Have Biver. With westerly winds vessels may anchor in safety along the north shore of Moshers Island outside the French Bock, which LA HAVE RIVER — DIRECTIONS. 93 Island in se shoals. la Have in west and ^ mile north mile from ly of a spit land. ■ se aronnd, is ; within Vest Iron- )f Mosbers )8t end of >t water. Spectacle : feet water nd, appar- g S. 69° E. )f Mosbers eastward ; of Gocka- part of a ore. there ex- ist part of raordinary from Bull ^ater; and in a north' les Island are avail- danger to er. ig Bock is it of Cross f the Shag >nd within • in safety ock, which may be avoids.. i»y not shutting in Krout Point with the east point of East Spectacle Island. With easterly winds the anchorage inside the French Bock is prefer- able; but this position is not attainable at low water by vessels draw- ing more than 14 feet. Before the east end of East Spectacle Island bears N. 9° W. West Ironbound light-house should be brought just open of the NE. end of Mosbers Island bearing S. 73° E., and continuing to the N W. with these objects on, anchor in 3^ or 4 fathoms, mud, with Fort Point and the east end of W^est Spectacle Island in line bearing N. 9° W, To pass north of French Bock proceed with the 8W. tangents of the two Spectacle Islands in line until the east end of the eastern island bears K 14° E., when steer S.81o W. and anchor as before directed. Vessels making for the anchorage NW. of the Spectacle Islands should pass 400 yards from the north shores of those islands, and anchor in about 3 fathoms, mud, with Bull Bock midway between Fort and Krout Points, and the north end of West Spectacle Island on with the center of the eastern island. The safest anchorage about La Have is within the river entrance to the NW. of Fort Point, the deepest channel to which is on the west side of Cockawee Shoal, though that to the eastward is more direct and generally used ; the latter has sufficient depth at low water for vessels of 13 feet draft. Western Channel— Pass the Spectacle Islands about i mile distant from their northern shores, and when approaching the main shore keep the SW. tangent of West Ironbound Island in line with the east point of Spectacle Island, until the Episcopal church bears N. 9° W., when steer for the church until Krout Point opens west of Bull Bock about one-third the distance between the rock and the main shore, and then steer IT. 25° E. When the Episcopal church bears S. 48° W. alter course to N. 48° E., to avoid the south end of Bull Spit ; and when Krout Point bears N. 2° B. steer for it until approaching the point, and then alter course to pass midway between Krout and Fort Points. After passing these points, continue on a northerly course until the spire of the church in BitcyCove appears nearly to touch the south end of Parkes Island, when alter course to N. 65° W., and when the points of the entrance close bearing S. 42° E. good anchorage will be found in 5^ fathoms, mud. Water may be obtained from a stream opposite this anchorage on the SW. shore. To pass eastward of Cockawee Shoal, avoid shutting in the house in Sandy Cove on the NE. side of Moshers Islaufl, and when Krout Point bears N. 2° E. steer for it, and on approaching the point proceed to the anchorage as before directed. West Ironbound Island.— West Ironbound Island, nearly § mile in length, with an elevation of lOo feet, may be said to form the eastern entrance point of La Have Biver. fiiii'ffliiiimiiiiii «*»■ 94 NOVA SCOTIA — 8. E. COAST. Rose Bay is open to the eastward 1^ miles across, between Ovens and Rose Points. Shelter may be obtained in this bay from northerly pr westerly winds, but is much too exposed to afford safe anchorage, except of a temporary nature. Similar remarks apply to Hartland and Kings Bays, SW . of Rose Bay, for both are exposed and unsafe. VThistling Buoy. — A whistling buoy painted red and black in alter- nate horizontal stripes has been established off the western entrance to Lunenburg Bay, with Battery Point light-house N. 42° W. distant 6^ miles. Lunenburg Bay, about 5 miles in depth and 2| miles broad between the entrance points, is open to the SE., but the force of ^'ales from that quarter is much lessened by the position of Cross Island, which acts as a breakwater. At the northern angle of the bay is the town of Lunen- burg. Nearly all the population are the descendants of German fami- lies. The principal exports are fish, cordwood, lumber, and the produce of some good farms in the neighborhood of the town. The United States is represented by an agent. Cross Island, 94 feet high, thickly wooded, lies immediately off the entrance of Lunenburg Bay, and is the outer object making the west- ern approach to Mahone Bay. Pilots frequent the island. Hounds Ledge, consisting of parallel ridges of rock nearly a mile in length east and west, lies off the north shore of Gross Island ; the east- ern end of the ledge uncovers at low water. Green Island south point apparently touching the north end of Big Duck Island bearing N. 63° E. leads northward of this danger. Ovens Point Rocks, off the point of that name, on the west side of Lunenburg Bay, generally uncover at low water, and always break dur- ing strong winds from seaward. East Point Rock is a small isolated patch with 7 feet water, | mile from the high land of the nearest shore ', from it East Point Ledge bears NB. nearly \ mile. Sculpin Shoal consists of a series of rocky ridges ^ mile in length S. 60° W. and N. 60° E., and has only 3 feet water on its shoalest part near the western end, which lies midway between Blue Bock Island and the cliffs on the north side of Ovens Point, and from it the large church tower of Lunenburg is seen through the gap east of Battery Point bearing N. 45° W. Outer Middle Rock has 2^ fathoms on its shoalest part, from which the tangents of Ovens and Rose Points are in line bearing S. 33<3 E., and Big Duck Island its apparent breadth open south of East Point Ledge. Inner Middle Rock, of small extent, has 2\ fathoms on it, and lies with Battery Point bearing N. 31<3 W., and Big Duck Island south point on with East Point Ledge. LUNENBURG AND MAHONE BAYS. 95 reeu Ovens n northerly anchorage, irtland and tsafe. ick in alter- rn entrance W. distant ad between !S from that liich acts as n of Lnnen- )rman fami- produce of ktely off the g the west- ly a mile in i ; the east- south point -ring N. 63° west side of s break dur- ater, \ mile 'oint Ledge le in length tioalest part lock Island it the large of Battery from which ig S. 330 E., East Point I it, and lies sland soath Shingles is a stony ridge ^ mile in length NW. and SE., the north- ern end of which uncovers at half ebb, and is distant from Mosers Head ^ mile. Long Shoal is a rocky patch ^ mile in length, having as little as 4 feet on its shoalest part, from which Battery Point bears north nearly j mile. Moreau Point Rock is a rocky split extending in a SE. direction from the point, and having only 3 feet of water on its shoalest part, which is distant about 300 yards, from the the nearest higii -water shore. Directions.— Lunenburg Harbor is safe with all winds, but is not adapted for vessels drawing more than 15 feet water. If from the southward, Koae Point, which is steep to, may be passed at a moderate offing. From a position ^ mile east of Kose Point steer N. 15° W. until Moreau and Battery Points are apparently just touch- ing bearing N. 51° \V., and proceed with these objects in line west of Sculpiu and east of Outer and Inner Middle Eocks. On approaching the lighthouse, keep to the westward until the lone tree is seen over Moreau Point, bearing N. 43° W., which will lead east of Long Shoals and clear of the split off Battery Point, after which steer for the town and anchor in 2f fathoms, mud, with lighthouse bear- ing S. 42° E. Approaching from the eastward, north of Cross Island, Lnnenbnrg lighthouse bearing N. 71° W., will clear Hounds Ledge and East Point Eock ; and when the south end of Big Duck Island appears to touch the southern tangent of East Point, steer with this mark on astern un- til Moreau and Battery Points aie apparently just touching, when steer for them until Ovens and Eose Points are in line, thence steer to the westward until a remarkable isolated tree on the bare high land west- ward of the town is seen over the eastern tangent of Moreau Point bearing N. 43° W., and pioceed as before directed. Mahone Bay is separated from St. Margaret Bay by Aspatagoen Peninsula, the high lands of which may be seen from a distance of more than 20 miles in the offing. The eastern shore of the bay is steep-to and comparatively free from dangers, but on the western side rocks and sunken shoals are almost innumerable. Between the east point of Lunenburg and Chockle-cap Islet to the northward are a series of parallel ridges lying east and west, extending in some places considerably beyond the general direction of the shore, and forming a confused mass of rocks, rendering any intelli gible description impossible. As a detailed description of all the dangers in Mahone Bay would be impracticable, it is intended to allude only to those affecting the navi- gation of the principal channels, commencing with the islets marking the approaches, and from thence up the bay. Heckman Anchorage, to the southward of Hobson Nose, is per- fectly safe with a good depth of water over mud, but the channels lead- 96 NOVA SCOTIA S. E. COAST. ing to it, though deep, are rendered tortuous by several shoals which lay between Hobson Nose and the anchorage ; and as no direct leading marks can be given, a stranger should not attempt the anchorage with out a pilot. Princes Inlet, on the south side of Harmon Island, though small Id extent, affords safe anchorage in 6 or 7 fathoms, mud. From an ofiing of about ^ mile north of Hobson Nose, steer for the south point of Bock- man Island ; this course will clear the spits ott' Bluff Head and Sandy Cove. After passing the latter, steer to pass midway between Bock- man Island and the main shore, a^id on nearing Little Harmon Island borrow on the main shore, in order to avoid shoal water oil' the latter island, and anchor between Harmon Island and the main. Big Duck Island, about ^ mile in length and 45 feet high, lies 2 miles NE. from the east end of Cross Island ; the 5-fathom line around this island is about ^ mile off shore. Middle Ledge is composed of parallel rocky ridges, and has only 3 feet on its shoalest spot. Gross Island light-house seen open east of Big Duck Island leads east ; and the light-house in line with the west end of the island S. 21° W. J^ S. leads west of Middle Ledge. There are no good cross-clearing marks, bat a vessel will be northward of the danger with the south point of Green Island bearing S. 88° E. Hobson Nose is a grass-covered earthy mound, 30 feet above the sea, on a gravelly spit which dries a good ^ mile at low water. Mahone Harbor, on the west side of Mahone Bay, affords secure and well-sheltered anchorage in about 6 fathoms water, but, like Mar- tins Biver anchorage, is difficult of access in consequence of the numer- ous off-lying dangers. The entrance to the channel leading to Mahone Harbor and Princes Inlet lies between Hobson Nose on the south and Haddock iSboal on the north, the latter being the southern rise of the shoal ground extending from Refuse to Mason Island. Martins River Anchorage, on the west side of Mahone Bay, is safe and commodious, with water sufficient to accommodate vessels of large draft, but the approaches being narrow and circuitous render the place difficult of access, and on no account should strangers attempt to enter this anchorage without the assistance of local knowledge. Fogs. — During the fogs which frequently prevail on this coast during July and August when the wind is to the westward of south, the SW. side of Mahone Bay is generally clear. Directions. — Vessels being off Hobson Nose, and bound for Mahone Harbor, should bring the Grassy Islet of Hobson Nose to bear 8. 71° E., and by steering N. 71° W. will pass south of tlie Middle Patch and north of Bookman Shoal and Covey Ledge. When the east point of Covey Island appears to touch the west end of Buckman Island, alter course to S. 85° W., until approaching West- haver Island, when the channel south of Westhaver Island or north of MAHONE BAY. 97 oals which ect leading orage with ;h small iD m an offing nt of Bock- and Sandy reeu Bock- non Island the latter lies 2 miles round this has only 3 east of Big west end of lere are no the danger above the r. rds secure ;, like Mar- the uamer- nd Princes hoal on the extending Say, is safe sis of large render the attempt to Ige. tast during h, the SW. br Mahone )ear 8. 71° Patch and e west end ling West- av north of Ham Island must be decided on, but if without local knowledge the former channel is recommended as being the less circuitous of the two. Westhaver Island being steep-to on its west side may be approached close-to, and a good anchorage obtained in 5 or 6 fathoms, mud, inside Ham Island to the N W. Good anchorage may also be obtained between Trappoan Island and the east end of Harmon Island in 7 fathoms, mud, with the southern point of Refuse Island just shut in with the north end of Trappean Island. Oreen Island, about ^ mile in length and 40 feet high, is distant upwards of 5 miles from New Harbor Point, and lies with East Iron- bound Island lighthouse bearing N. 24° W. 3J miles, and Cross Island lighthouse S. 50° W. 6^ miles. Northeast Shoal, so called in consequence of its relative position to Green Island, from which it bears N. 19° E. I'i miles, is about J mile in extent, and from its shallowest part (near the center), with only 3 feet water, the east end of Little Tancook Island is just seen east of East Ironbound Island, the nearest part of the latter being more than 2 miles distant bearing N. 48° W., and the north extremity of Cross Island just in sight north of Big Duck Island. Flat Island.— Flat Island, about § mile in length, is somewhat re- markable in shape ; on the north end is a narrow eminence 40 feet high, whilst the remainder of the island is very low. Bast Ironbound Island.— East Ironbound Island is about | mile in length and attains an elevation of 60 feet; it is clear on all sides at the distance of ^ mile oflF shore. Qreat Tancook Island is about 2 miles in length and 115 feet high, with an indentation on its eastern side. West Shoals, three in number, lie on the west side of Great Tan- cook Island. The southernmost has 2i fathoms on its shoalest part, and deep water between it and the island shore. The north end of East Ironbound Island in line with the south end of Great Tancook Island bearing N. 85° E. leads southward of this shoal. Middle Shoal, detached and nearly circular in form, is J mile in diameter, with less than one foot water on its shoalest part, which lies ^ mile S. 87° W. from the elbow of the shingle beach on the west side of Great Tancook Island. Star Island Ledges.— Star Island, small and low, lies about J mile off the end of Great Tancook Island, and may be considered the west- ernmost of three ledges about the same distance offshore. Little Tancook Island, J mile in length and 80 feet high, occupies a nearly central position between Great Tancook Island and Indian Point at the S W. extremity of Aspatagoen Peninsula. There are avail- able channels on either side of the island, that on the western side being the more direct of the two, excepting for vessels of moderate draft. SE. Shoals consist of a cluster of detached shoals, over which the depths vary from 2f to 5 fathoms ; the shoalest, with 2§ fathoms, lies 5314 7 HMIHI filiffiiii^'' !i 98 NOVA SCOTIA — 8. E. COAST, with the south point of Little Tancook Isiand bearing N. 51° W. about J mile distant, and Grassy Island S. 45° W. nearly IJ miles. From this danger the center of Green Island is in line with the west end of East Iron bound Island bearing S. 32° E. Bull Rock is a small rocky ridge, the highest part of which uncovers at half ebb. It bears S. 65° W. one mile from the SW. end of Flat Island, the channel between being clear, and S. 3° E. 1§ miles from the SE. point of Great Tancook Island. The north end of East Ironbonnd Island seen open north of Flat Island leads northward; East Ironbound lighthouse open south of Flat Island leads southward ; and Little Duck Island apparently touching the west end of Cross Island bearing S. 14° W. leads westward of Bull Bock. The deep-water passage on the west side of Bull Rock is the main channel into Mahone Bay, and is about 2 miles across. Refuse Island. — This island and adjacent shoals lie on the western side of the main channel into Mahone Bay, opposit'" Great Tancook Island, and with the west shoals of the latt<;r island the navigable chan- nel is narrowed to the breadth of one mile. East Shoal is small and i ocky and deep water all round ; from this shoal the high earth cliff on the SE. point of Refuse Island bears S. 06° W. 3 mile. Within East Shoal (with 4 fathoms on it) is a spit extending from the NE. point of Refuse Island in an easterly direction nearly J mile; there are only 2$ fathoms on this spit, more than ^ mile from the high- water line of Refuse Island. South ShoaL — From its outer and southern end, with 3 fathoms, the high cliflf of Refuse Island (already referred to) bears N 6° B. § mile. Mason Spit is a stony ridge off the SE. end of Mason Island % mile in length : from it Haddock Shoal, with 3 fathoms, lies S. 35° E. about J mile. Coachman Ledge is ^ mile long north and south between the 5-fathom lines ; its highest part uncovers shortly after half ebb, and at low water it shows about 100 yards above water. The center of this spot lies with Star Island tree bearing 8. 14° W. nearly 2 miles distant. SW. Coachman, a small patch with 4^ fathoms on it, lies with that part of Coachman Ledge which dries bearing N. 20° E. rather more than % mile. NE. Coachman is another small patch with 4^ fathoms water, firom which that part of Coachman Ledge which dries bears S. 11° W. upwards of f mile. Middle Shoal is nearly ^ mile in length, having on its shoalest part 3 fathoms water ; from it the NE. point of East Ironbound Island is apparently just touching the west end of Little Tancook Island bear- ing S. 59° E., and the east end of Snake Island N. 30° E. Quaker Shoal, about 400 yards in length, has 4 fathoms on its shoal- est part, from which the single tree on the east end of Quaker Island MAHONE BAY. 99 W. about J From this ucl of East h uncovers iid of Flat esfrom the -th of Flat iithof Flat ly touching ard of Bull Elock is the ;he western it Tancook ^able chan- ; from this jears S. 06° Qg from the mile; there high- water athoms, the E. % mile, laud % mile 50 E. about he 5- fathom It low water 30t lies with es with that r more than water, firom W. upwards hoalest part id Island is [sland bear- on its shoal- aker Island a mile, and Round Island Nubble S. bears N. 4° E. a little more than 81° W. Birch Shoal, 400 yards in length, has only 2i fathoms on it, from whence the south point of Birch Island bears N. 3° E., 800 yards dis- tant. Lynch Shoal has only 9 feet water on it, from whence the north end of Clay Island is apparently just touching the southern clitty point of Quaker Island, and the south point of Lynch Island bearing N. 50° E. nearly J mile. Blandford Shoal is a small detached 4-fathom patch lying S. 04° W., 800 yards from Blandford Head. Blandford Head, which is steep-to, lies on the south side of Shoal Cove where, as the name implies, the water is shoal. From Coachman Head, on the north side of the cove, the shore in a northerly direction is clear of danger to a point J mile southward of Little East River ; from this position to Rous Point (at the western entrance of the river) the shore should not be approached within J mile, in order to avoid several oflf-lyiug rocks. The bay between Rous Point and East River Point should be avoided, in consequence of shoal water and rocks. A description of the dangers on the western side of the east branch of Mahone Bay will now be necessary, as some of them aflfect the ap- proaches to Chester Harbor. Mountain Shoals, three in number, lie to the southward and east- ward of Mountain Island. The outer shoal is a small patch with 4f fathoms water, and from it the south point of Mountain Island bears N. 70° W. nearly one mile. Spectacle Shoal extends oflf the eastern side of Saddle Island, and is ^ mile long in a north and south direction, with its center showing at low-water springs. Snake Spit extends a short J mile from the S W. side of Snake Island, having on its extremity only one foot water. Graves Shoal, nearly circular in form and detached, is small in ex- tent, with only 3 feet water on its shoalest part, from which tiie south point of Graves Island bears N . 48° W. nearly § nlile, and Lobster Point S. 45° W. nearly one mile. Long Spit takes its rise from the main shore between Lobster Point and Graves Island, and is composed of bowlders, stones, and gravel, uncovers as far out as ^ mile from the shore; near the end of the dry part are some large bowlders, which uncover at half ebb. Lobsters Claws are two stony ridges. The eastern claw extends from Lobster Point in a S. 28° E. direction nearly ^ mile, a small por- tion of which uncovers about 400 yards from the point. The western claw is detached, and about ^ mile in length, with deep water all around. From the shoalest spot, with If fathoms. Lobster Point bears N. 8° E. ^ mile. Sheep Ledge consists of bowlders, the highest of which only cover I 100 NOVA SCOTIA — 8. E. COAST. during extraordinary spring tides; from this point the ledge extends 100 \ aids northward and nearly 400 yards southward. From the high- est i)iirt of the iedge the southern points of Birch and Quaker Islands are in line, bearing N. 67° E., and Bound Island Nubble % mile distant in a S. 9<3 E. direction. Clay Island Spit extends in a southeasterly direction from the south end of Clay Island. There are 3J fathoms at the distance of i mile from the island, whence an irregular ridge, with 4 fathoms water, ex- tends to the NE. and joins the shallow water off the N VV. end of Quaker Island, he whole forming a crooked bar composed of sand, gravel, and bowlders. Chester churches just open east of the peninsula, bearing north, clears the eastern edge of Clay Spit in 4 fathoms, and the south end of Woody Island just open south of Quaker Island N. 70° E. clears the southern edge of the spit. Big Pish Shoal with 4^ fathoms on it, from whence the south point of Big Fish Island bears N. 31° W. i mile. Chec;^r Rock is a small rocky patch with 10 feet water lyiug im- mediately off the entrance of Chester Creek and a little outside the line between Norse Point and the neck of the peninsula. Oarret Cove is shoal, and from Norse Point a ridge of bowlders ex- tends in a SB. direction, terminating at the distance of nearly 200 yards from the point in a bowlder with only 9 feet water. Ziak Point, to the SE., may be approached within 200 yards. Chester Harbor is commodious, safe, and comparatively easy of access. The majority of the population are engaged in the fisheries or lumber trade ; a considerable amount of farm produce is raised, and a good business is carried ou in manufacturing fish barrels for the out- ports. There are two channels into the harbor, the one to the southward being more direct than that to the eastward, which is narrow and somewhat intricate. Tides. — The general surface of the water is raised a foot by south- easterly gales and depressed the same amount by northwesterly gales. In the northern portion of Mahone Bay the tidal stream is sluggish, but through the eastern Tancook Channel it runs at the rate of one knoc per hour during its full strength ; and through the narrow part of the western Tancook Channel the tide attains a velocity of 2 miles an hour, the ilood setting to the northward and the ebb to the south- ward. Directions.— When approaching Chester from an offlugeast of Cross Island steer to pass at a safe distance east or west of Big Duck Island, and thence for the channel west of Great Tancook Island, bearing in mind that the middle of Little Duck Island in line with Cross Island lighthouse, bearing S. 11° E., leads through the middle of the above channel, and that any part of Little Duck Island in line with Cross MAHONE BAY — DIRECTIONS. 101 ge exteiida a tbe high- ler Islands aile distant n tbe south a of ^ mile I water, ex- I of Quaker gravel, and 3rth, clears i of Woody le southern south point ir lying im- )ide the line owlders ex- nearly 200 Zink Point, ely easy of fisheries or iiised, and a for tbe out- ivard being 1 somewhat at by sonth- iterly gales, is sluggish, rate of one trrow part of )f 2 miles an ) the south- Bast of Cross Duck Island, i, bearing in Gross Island if the above e with Cross Island will clear tbe dangers which lie oflf the west side of Great Tan- cook Island and tbe east side of Refuse Island, respectively. On approaching Quaker Island keep 2(M) yards ott itn 8\V. side until Chester churches a|)pear nearly to touch tbe east tangent of the penin- sula bearing north, when alter course for them until thesoutii point of Norse Island opens to tbe northward of the stony point on tbe north side of Quaker Island bearing east; then keep to the eastwar;HN«;d on either side. Directions. — li'trom the Hoiifhward, avoid bringing the tangent of Dauphney Head to tli westward of N, 41° W., which will clear Slaun- whites Ledge on its western side, and when Red Bank bears east the vessel will be abreast Green Point Siioal, and from thence may steer up mid-channel, anchoring as convenient. Slaunwhites Ledge is a ridge of rocks and sand and lies on the east- ern side of the entrance into Hubbard Cove. The actual rocky ledge is about 3<)0 yards in length, its highest rock on the south end only Just covering at high water; but it is surrounded by an extensive plateau of shoal ground nearly ^ mile in length, which terminates on its north end in a small sandy knoll known as North Shoal, which uucovers at half tide, ami lies 800 yards distant from Green Point in line with Bed BanR bearing N. 64° E. Ingram River is about ^ mile across the entrance, from whence it runs in northward 1^ miles to its head, where the waters of a fresh- water river are received. The western shores of this indentatiou are clear ; on the eastern side, ^ mile from the head, is some shoal ground, which will be cleared on its western side by keeping Wood Island well open of East Head. Oroncher Shoal is the only danger off the entrance to Ingram River ; the least water is 3^ fathoms. Vessels may pass east or west of the shoal by bringing East or West Heads to bear N. 17° E. until Snares Point is well shut in behind Black Point. Head Harbor is alike capacious and secure, with a sufQcient depth of water to accommodate vessels of the largest draft. The anchorage extends from within Strawberry Island along the northern shore, but the best anchorage is within Clam Island, which is only a little more than 200 yards in extent, with a very shoal spit extending 200 yards to the NE. There is a deep-water channel on either side of the island, but the one on the north side, being the wider of the two, is to be preferred, more especially for large vessels. From between Indian Point and Oroucher Island, which may be considered the entrance points of the harbor, the distance is a little over ^ mile ; within these points there are no detached dangers which would affect vessels of small draft, and bat few to be avoided by large vessels. Sand Cove Shoal is a small detached rooky patch with 4^ fathoms water, and lies with the south eud of Wood Island apparently touching Black Point bearing S. 87° W., and the Episcopal Church at Smelt Brook N. 3° W., nearly. Strawberry Island Shoal is a detached rocky patch, with 4i^ fathoTis water, having deep water all round ; it is distant 250 yards from Strawberry Island in a southeasterly direction and lies with East Head just open east of Strawberry Island N. 40° W. I - igaipi 104 NOVA SCOTIA— S. E. COAST. Croucher Island is the outermost and the largest of three small islets, almost connected, which lie oif the entrance of Head Harbor, oc- cupying a space of about ^ mile, NE. and SW. The main channel into the harbor is to the southward of the group^ but within on the north side there is a narrow deep-water passage 200 yards across between the 5-fathom lines. French Village Harbor. — About f mile N. 30° B. from Wedge Island is Davys Point, forming the south point of the entrance, which is ^ mile brqad. Within the point on the south shore is an indentation, oft which secure anchorage may be obtained in about 11 fatiioms, mud. From abrea-^t the anchorage the village is scattered along the whole length of the sciithorn shore, upwards of a mile in length. Ambrose Rock, small in extent, with 3^ fathoms on it, and deep water around, is beyond the range of the usual anchorage, and lies with the Episcopal church belfry bearing S. 57° E. Davys Rock, 400 yards in length, with 9 feet water on its shoalest spot, lies with Davys Point bearing S. 68° E. about ^ mile, Indian Point N. 3° W. nearly J mile. The deep-water channel ou this, the northern side of the shoal, is narrowed to about ^ mile by a spit which extends to the southward from Indian Point. Middle Shoal is ^ mile in length north and south ; from the shoalest part, with 5 feet water, Wedge Island bears N. 30° E. one mile, and Little Thrum Island S. 40° E. ^ mile. The green line of the north end of Luke Island open southward of Little Thrum Island, bearing S. 54° E., leads SW.; and the east end of Clam Island in line with the outer end of the Indian Point N. 25° B. leads westward of Ringdove Shoal. Directions— Inside Channel — From about ^ mile west of the north point of Shut-in Island steer north until the west end of the eastern and larger lump of Indian Point opens outside Wedge Island bearing N. 13° E ; steering with these marks on will lead between Little Thrum Spit and Middle Shoal, and when the green line of the north end of Luke Island opens south of the Little Thrum bearing S. 54° E. a vessel will be off the spit, and should steer for McDonald Point N. 28° B., which will lead through in the deep.water channel between Wedge Island and Hayman Point. When the latter point is in line with the stony tangent of George Island bearing S. 20° B. alter course to north, when the ship's head should be pointing between the two lumps of Indian Point, bear- ing in mind that shoal water extends 300 yards in a southwesterly direc- tion from McDonald Point. Proceed on the above course until Church Point is in line with Davys Point bearing N.58° B., and immediately alter course for the south tan- gent of the peninsula opposite Croucher Point N. 36° B., and as Croucher Island neara the outer tangent of Indian Point gradually steer to the eastward until these objects are in line bearing N. 56° W., and anchor in 11 fathoms, mud, with C hurch Point N. 51° B. ■tika ST. MARGARET BAY. 105 iree small larbor, oc- tlie group, assage 200 im Wedge lice, which identation, loins, mud. ' the whole , and deep id lies with ts shoalest le, ladiau J tliis, the spit which be shoalest ; mile, and ithward of east end of t N. 25° B. f the north lastern and ring N. 13o brum Spit id of Luke vessel will ' B., which Island and my tangent II the ship's •oint, bear- iterly direc- rith Davys i south tan- >s Oroucher teer to the >nd anchor Ontside Channel — After passing Shut-in Island at a safe distance steer N. 9° W. until Davys Point (well open north of Wedge Island) bears N. 47° E., then alter course for the point, and proctied to the anchorage as before directed. Wedge Island, about 300 yards in length and 30 feet elevation, lies J mile north of Oeorge Island. Long Cove is another sheltered spot in the immediate vicinity of Luke anchorage, and can be entered from the latter through the uar- row channel east of Troop Island, bearing in mind that in the middle of its south entrance there is a small rise with 3J fathoms. Another channel J mile broad lies north of Troop island, between it and George Island ; off the south end of the latter shoal water extends nearly 400 yards in a south direction. Little Thrum Island.— North of Luke Island is a group of several small islets, the smallest and outermost being Little Thrum Island^ about 100 yards long ; from it a shallow spit extends in a northwest- erly direction J mile ; there is also shoal water on its SW. side. The west tangent of the inner or eastern lump of Indian Point just open west of Wedge Island clears the west side of Little Thrum Spit, and leads about mid channel between George Island and Middle Shoal. Luke Anchorage.— At 1^ miles to the northward of Shut-in Island is Luke Islet, 40 feet high : within it there is excellent anchorage in 8 to 10 fathoms, where vessels may remain in security during gales from any quarter. The anchorage is very accessible; if from the southward, avoid the shoal water off the SW. end of the island, and when the east end of Troop Island opens east of the SB. stony point steer for the anchorage with the north end of Shut-in Island seen over the SB. point of Luke Island, and Big Thrum Island midway between Troop Island and the northern stony tongue of Luke Island. Shut-in Island is § mile in length, and attains an elevation of 20O feet. Although there is a deep- water channel leading inside the island there are numerous rocks, which render this passage unadvisable with- out the assistance of local knowledge. The rocks referred to will be cleared by keeping Middle Point open of Paddy Head. The east and west shores of Shut-in Island are steep-to, but in round- ing the north point do not approach nearer than 300 yards ; within the island the holding ground is good, and the place well sheltered, secure, and smooth during southerly gales. Middle Point Hock, with 3^ fathoms water, lies NW. J mile from Middle Point. The two tangents of Paddy Head and Shut in Island apparently just touching and bearing N. 2° W., lead about 200 yards westward of Middle Point Rock. Crawford Ledge, which is steep-to outside, lies nearly 40« yards within Middle Point Rock in the direction of Jack Island. Peggy and % 106 NOVA SCOTIA — 8. E. COAST. Middle Points in line bearing S. 45° E. lead between Crawford Ledge and Middle Point Book. Halibut Rock is small, and covers at the first quarter flood ; it lies off Peggy Point 200 yards. Horseshoe Ledge consists of ridges of rock which uncover at half ebb. From the highest part of the ledge East Ironbouud Island light- house bears S. 62° W. 4f miles, and the south point of SW. island N. 17° W. Tides.— The rise and fall of tide in St. Margaret Bay are regular, but the tidal streams are very weak, excepting at the entrance between Shut-in Island and Peggy Cove on the eastern side, and from Owls Head to SW. island on the western side; between these shores the stream attains a velocity of about one knot per hour in the strength of the tide, the flood running to the northward and the ebb to the southward, but following the trend of the shores on either side when closed in. Directions. — From the southward or westward, and being outside Green Island, do not bring the north point of Green Island to bear south- ward of S. 36° W. until the whole of Little Taneook Island is open east of East Ironbound Island, in order to avoid the NE. Shoal. To pass east of the Borse Shoe ledge bring Owls Head well open east of SW. island bearing N. 32° W., and to pass westward Owls Head should be kept open west of SW. island bearing north, in this latter case when the tangent of New Harbor Point bears S 80° W., the vessel will be to the northward of the Horse Shoe ledge and a course may be steered for Shut-in Island, taking care to avoid Charley Rock on the east side of SW. island. When Clam Island, east tangent, is in line with the outer end of Indian Point bearing N. 25° E., the vessel will then be clear of Middle Shoal, and may steer N. 19° B., rounding Indian Point 200 yards off shore, and after passing the point steer to the east- ward until the western tangents of Wedge Island and Indian Point are in line bearing S. 6° W. Keeping the above marks on, and steering N. 6° E., will lead in midchauuel between the Sand Cove Shoal and Strawberry Shoal ; and when the north end of Strawberry Island and Black Point are in line bearing S. 78° W. steer to pass north of Clam Island, taking care not to shut in Croucher Island with the south point of Strawberry Island, in order to avoid Marsh Gutter Shoal, with 3^ fathoms. A good mark for rounding the NE. spit of Clam Island is to bring Black Point, on the northern shore of St. Margaret Bay, in line be- tween Potato Point and the main, and anchor in 9 or 10 fathoms mud, with the east end of Clam Island apparently touching the outer end of ludiaa Point, and Potato Island its apparent breadth open south of Black Point. Port Dover. — A.8 Black Rock only just covers at high-water springs, it is very seldom that its position can not be identified; but on such ex- PORT DOVER SHAG BAY. 107 >rd Ledge Dd ; it lies er at half land light- . island N. e regular, le between from Owls shores the i strength )bb to the side when ag outside 3ear south- I open east I well open (Fard Owls itb, in this lOo W., the d a course arley Rock igent, is in vessel will ing Indian bo the east- n Point are ill lead in 3boal ; and are in line ig care not irry Island, is to bring , in line be- homs mud, ! outer end 3n south of ter springs, on such ex- ceptional occasions, to pass east of the rock bring the eastern tangents of Myra and White Islands apparently to touch, bearing N. 16° E. until Soi Point (having houses on it) opens east of Fleming Island, when proceed in that direction, and on nearing Fleming Island alter course so as to pass between it and Fleming Ledge, and anchor in 9 or 10 fathoms, mud, with Fleniin<; Ledge in Hue with the south end of White Island and the east end of Dover Castle touching the west end of l^lem- iug Island. Leary Point, midway between the high-water lines of High and White Islands, bearing N. 30° E., leads through in deep water between Dover Castle and Black liock, as does also Fleming, Ledge, seen just open of Fleming Island, N. 9° W. Cabbage G-arden Shoals consists of two rocky patches off the en- trance to port Dover; the outer, about 200 yards in extent, has 10 feet water, and lies N. 69° E., a short ^ mile from the south point of Flem- ing Isiana. The inner shoal (of NW. the former) just uncovers at low-water springs, and lies NB. 400 yards from Fleming Island. Directions. — Blind Bay affords good anchorage north of Myra Dry Ledge. Proceeding through the main channel between the Black Rock and Shag Bay Breakers, with the two gull rocks in line, alter course when necessary so as to pass between outer Gull Rock and White Island, or steer for Doyle Island, N. 4° E.; it will then appear about midway between Black Point and Myra Island. Avoid going to the westward of the line where Doyle and Myra Islands appear to touch, in order to keep clear of the Round Rock and Middle Ground. If the draft of water renders it necessary to avoid a 4-fathom patch about 250 yards off the north point of Mj ra Island in an easterly direc- tion, steer towards the eastern shore with Leary Point and White Island, just open of each other, until Myra Dry Ledge is in line with the south tangent of Clarke Island ; then steer roand Myra Dry Ledge, keeping an offing of 200 yards off its eastern end, and anchor in about 6 fathoms, mud, in a berth equidistant from the ledge, Clarke Island, and the rock south of Flat Island. Middle Q-round, on the western side of the channel leading into Blind Bay, is about 200 yards in diameter, with two rocky rises 100 yards distant from each other north and south. The northern point is just awash at low- water springs, the other has 3 feet water. Shag Bay. — Shag Head xbrms the eastern entrance point common to Shag and Blind Bays. Shag Bay, 3j miles in length, with a general trend to the NE., has good anchorage oft' a small cove near its head on the western shore. Shag Bay Breakers consist of a rocky ridge, ^ mile in length ; the two shoalest parts, wit h only 4 feet water, are at each extremity j and Fader Head, seen between the two Gull Rocks at the entrance of Shag .,. 108 NOVA SCOTIA — 8. E. COAST. Baj-, bearing N. 23° E., leads directly over them, aud consequently over the long axis of tbe shoal. • Green Shoal, about 250 yards in length, with 6 feet least water, lies eastward of Shag Bay Breakers, with a deep water channel | mile broad between the 5-fathom lines. Onll Shoal, small in extent, with 6 feet water, is nearly equidistant from the Outer and Inner Gull Bocks and main shore; the passage be- tween it and the latter being 350 yards across. Frying-pan Rock, which covers during lust quarter flood, is the highest part of a shoal about 200 yards in extent, and bears from Black Point Ledge (which is 3 feet above high water) 8. 49° B. about 200 yards. From Frying-pan Rock, White Island, and Dover Oastle are apparently just overlapping, bearing about S. 68° W., the navigable channel on its eastern side being 200 yards across. Round Rock, with 4 feet water, is steep-to all round ; it lies 300 yards oflF Leary Point in an easterly direction ; from it the Outer Gull Rock is on with the north point of Shag Head. West ChsnneL — A good leading mark west of Shag Bay Breakers is the two Gull Rocks in line bearing N. 38° E. On passing the Outer Gull Rock, keep about 200 yards off, especially on the north side, after which close the Inner Gull to within 200 yards, so as to pass midway between the Inner Gull and Frying pan Rocks, and thence proceed up the bay and anchor in about 8 fathoms, mud, off NW. Cove, with Fader Head bearing S. 13° W. Black Rock is the outer of the western dangers, and lies S. Tl^' E., i mile from a remarkable bare rocky islet, 40 feet high, known as Dover Castle. There is a narrow but deep water ch.^nnel between them, but caremust be taken to avoid a 3foot patch whicl. lies 100 yards from the Black Rock in a northerly direction. East Channel — Black Point, just open of Shag Head, bearing N. 18° W., leatls eastward of Kittee Wittee and Green Shoals and towards Shag Head, which may be rounded close-to. Immediately after passing the head close the eastern shore until Fader Head opens well out east of Inner Gull Rock, bearing N. 18° E.; this mark will lead on the east- ern side of the Gull Shoal, after which proceed up to the anchorage south. Prospect Harbor is situated at the month of an arm of the sea known as Prospect River, upwards of 3 miles in length, and distant from Mars Head about 2J miles in a northerly direction. The anchor- age is within Heron Island, on the eastern shore of the river, where large vessels may find good shelter, and although there are dangers off the harbor, they are such as can easily be avoided when once the islands marking the ai>proaches thereto have been identified. The town of Prospect is built in a somewhat straggling manner on the narrow western point of Prospect River. The population subsist on the produce of adjoining tisheries; the church (Rom midway oceed up th Fader 3. 71° E., as Dover bein, bat from tbe 'aring N. 1 towards r passing out east the east- liuliorage f tbe sea d distaut le ancbor- lere large 'S oft' tbe le islands lanner on HI subsist ktb olic) is PROSPECT BAY — TIDES. 109 8 conspicuous object, and can be seen from a longdistance at sea; tbe principal import is tlonr, and tbe only export lisb, as tbe soil, being sterile, would render agricultural pursuits unproductive. Bett7 Island is J mile long in a nortb and soutb direction ; tbe southern point, Brig Point, has a lighthouse upon it. It lies midway between the entrance to Prospect River and Back Bay. SW. and Devereuz Shoals are both isolated rocky patches lying off the southwest end of Betty Island, about i mile off shore. White Horse Rock, with only IJ fathoms water, lies between Hop- son Island, 83 feet high, and Norris Bald Rock, 20 feet high ; from tbe latter it bears S. 6lo E. about J mile; from tbe rock tbe soutb point of Breakiast Islainl is in line with tbe north point of Shannon Bald Rock. Heron Rock is small, detached, and shows at low water ; it is steep- to on its east side, and lies about 100 yards in au easterly direction from the northeast end of Heron Island, there being 3 fathoms in the passage between. As this rock is in close proximity to the anchorage, care must be laken, on bringing up, to give it a clear berth. From the rock Burnt and Shannon Islands are nearly touching. Kittee Wittee Shoal, on which the sea breaks during bad weather is composed of rock about 300 yards in extent, thesboalest part, with 5 fathoms water, lies with the north point of Burnt Island, in line with tbe north end of Norris Bald Rock bearing N. 77° E., the latter being f mile distant. SB. Shoal is nearly 200 yards in extent, with 2^ fathoms water, and breaks during an ordinary southerly gale. Tides.— In connection with the tides along this coast Captain Short- land remarks that winds influence the time of high water, especially if during one of tbe rotatory gales a shift of wind occurs before high water. At the commencement of a SB. gale there is a f-^ndency to retard tbe time of high water, and this effect continues until the gale has reached its full height ; but as the wind diminishes in force this principle ceases, and a contrary effect ensues. In extreme cases the time of high water will be found to differ fully an hour from undisturbed periods. Western Channel.— Bring Norris Bald Rock to bear N. 10° W. and proceed on that course, rounding the rock on the north side, which is steep to; then steer N. 69o E. for the highest part of Heron Island, taking care not to approach the high-water line of Saul and Church Points within 200 yards. When the spire of Prospect Church is in line with Church Point alter course to round Heron Island, taking care to keep Saul Point well open of Heron Island until Burnt and Shannon Islands are seen open of each other in order to avoid Heron Rock, thence steer for the anchorage in 7 to 9 fathoms, mud, with Prospect Roman Catholic Church in line with the north end of Heron Island and midway between that island and tbe main shore. Back Bay, a mile from Mars Head in a northerly direction, is ren- dered unserviceable as au anchorage In consequence of numerous dan- no NOVA SCOTIA — 8. E. COAST. gets across itsentrauce, in addition to which the space of available deep water is not only exposed to the 8W., but is very limited in extent. GrampuB Rock, with only 9 feet water, is the outer of several rocky patches extending from Mars Hea(\ bottom. ^fSM.t*ii.-ii.J>*#i ■ ■ able deep ixtent. jral rocky mthward. lorthwest- ge is good B western age bring g midway Sboal, CD aruer Bay lie former, eer to tbe Pennant lies nortb- nt. Witb wards tbe I Pennant )ut 70 feet and about lands, but een tbem. pital Hill, ly, though dands. > avoid the 1 and east- f Pennant ;eer N. 23° pen north - ised ; then and at the )bom shoal estward of onvenient, ttom. CHAPTER V. NOVA SOOTIA— SOUTHEAST OOAST— 8AMBE0 HARBOR TO OAPE OANSO Sambro Harbor, lying at the head of the bay formed between Pen. nant Point on the west and Cape Sambro on the east, has anchorage within the Isle of Man. The heavy sea during southwesterly winds is much broken by the ledges outside, but the shelter is imperfect, and the dangers off and in this harbor are so numerous that it should never be attempted by large vessels, excepting in a case of extreme necessity. From the Westward.— To enter Sambro harbor from the westward bring the highest hill on Cape Sambro over the western rise of Inner Sambro Island, and with these marks on proceed between Pennant Point and Bull Rock. After passing the latter at the distance of 300 yards, to clear the shoal water off it to the northward, steer N. 35° B., or with the east ends of Round Island and Isle of Man in line, if these tangents can be distinguished; if not, pass 300 yards eastward of the Island Rock, and continue to steer N. 35° E. until Fairweather Rock is seen open southward of Inner Sambro Island, which will clear the Torpey Ledge. Then, to avoid the Middle Ground, steer more easterly, so as to pass not more than 200 yards to the northward of the west end of Inner Sambro Island, which is quite bold, and when the marks for clearing Cowley Rock come on, viz, Fairweather Rock apparently touching the western point of Inner Sambro Island bearing 8. 13° W., steer N. 13o E. and proceed to the anchorage under the Isle of Man in 6 or 7 fathoms mud bottom. ' Fogs.— It frequently happens that the weather is clear within Sambro Lighthouse, although very thick several miles without. Pilots— Sambro Island is the resort of pilots. Sambro Ledges.— From Smithson Rock, the outermost of the west- ern ledges with only 2 fathoms water, Sambro Lighthouse bears N. 43o E. 2J miles ; Pennant Point N. 56© W. 2^ miles. Gull Rock, little more than its own breadth open of White or Catch Harbor Head, bearing N. 320 E., also leads over this dangerous rock, as well as over Mare Rock, which, with 6 feet water, lies nearly ^ mile further in. Mark— The west end of Pennant Island, on with the tangent of Pennant Point N. 38o W. leads § mile to the westward of Smithson Rock. Whistling Buoy.— A whistling buoy painted black and white in vertical stripes is moored in 25 fathoms near the southern end of Sambro 111 M m HHi 112 NOVA SCOTIA — 8. E. COAST. outer bank with Pennant Point bearing N. 53° W., distant 7^ miles, and Sanibro Liglitbouse, N. 26° W., distant 6J miles. Hennesy Bank, Shoal Qround, Barae Ground, and Ontar Bank.— These are rocky fishing grounds, with depths varying from 8 to iiO fathoms, and should be avoided by vessels during bad weather as they cause a heavy half-breaking sea. SW. Breaker, which almost always shows, lies li miles eastward of Sinithson Rouk, and from it Ohebucto Head is seen over the eastern extremity of Sambro Island, the latter bearing N. 21° E., IJ miles. A black can buoy, with staflf and vane, and marked SVV. Breaker, lies ill 12 fathoms water, nearly 400 yards south of the S W. Breaker. The Sisters are the outermost of the eastern Sambro Ledges, and from the lighthouse on Sambro Island they are distant 1% miles. Their position is pointed out by Black Rock, 15 feet high, and from which they are distant i mile to the eastward. Several rocks of this cluster uncover at low water, and their position can always be seen ; but the Blind Sister is more dangerous, having 9 feet over it at low water. An iron bell-buoy, painted black and surmounted by a cage, lies in 26 fathoms water, J mile from the Blind Sister Shoal ; with Sambro Island Lighthouse bearing S. 87° W., and Chebucto Head Lighthouse N. 3° E Caution.— In approaching Halifax Harbor from the eastward, care must be taken to make allowance for a set to the westward towards the Sisters Hocks. Clearing Marks.— Sandwich Point in line with Chebucto Head, bear- ing N. 15° W., will lead one mile eastward of Sambro Ledges* By night Sherbrook Tower light on Maugher Beach, just open east of Chebucto Head, will clear all the Sambro Ledges as well as the Bell Rock and Duncan Reef. The lead will give little or no warning when approaching these ledges from the eastward, on which side the bank is very steep, the depth being 45 fathoms within less than J mile from the Sisters. Catch Harbor has 9 feet water on its bar, with 16 feet mud within, where its shores are occupied by the houses and stages of fishermen. At the head of the harbor is a chapel, as well as a fine stream, the outlet of the waters of several small lakes which lie about a mile to the north- ward. Ede Rock, with 9 feet water on it, lies nearly midway between the Sisters and Morris Point, on the western side of the entrance to Catch Harbor. Halifax Harbor is one of the finest and safest in the world, affording space and depth of water sufficient for a large number of vessels ; and although the dangers off its'entrance are such as to render great caution necessary— especially during the fogs which usually accompany all winds from the sea— it is easier of ingress and egress than any other large harbor on the coast. The entrance, 6J miles wide, lies be- tween Devil Island to the NE. and Chebucto Head to the SW., HALIFAX HARBOR. 113 luiles, and ind Ontar ing from 8 weatber as t eastward die eaateru r miles. T. Breaker, Breaker, ledges, and les. Their from which bbis cluster D ; but the water. [6, lies iu 26 abro Islaud se N. 30 E tward, care owards the Bead, bear- By night »f Chebucto II Bock and hese ledges , the depth nud within, I fishermen. 1, the outlet 9 the north- >etween the ce to Catch d, affording essels; and i-eat caution )mpany all n any other ie, lies be- 3 the SW., and from mid-position between these points the general /jd of the harbor is northward for a distance of 15 miles, to the head of Bedford Basin. The city of Halifax is the capital of the province of Nova Scotia, and cout lined in 1888 about 45,000 inhabitants; it is built on the declivity of a penin.sula on the western side of the harbor, and 8 miles within its entrance. Tlie citadel, immediately in rear of tlie city, and in a central position between its two extremes, stands on a commanding elevation 227 feet above the sea at high water, and with its flagstaff forms a leading mark easily recognized from a vessel off the entrance of the harbor. The harbor opposite the town is about i^ mile broad, but at the Nar- rows— -ahout a mile above the upper end of the city— it contracts to less than i mile, and then expands into Bedford Basin, which has an area of 10 square miles, and is completely landlocked. On the eastern side of the harbor, and immediately opposite the Naval yard, is the town of Dartmouth : between it and the city steam vessels ply continually. Eastern Fort, with its tower, stands close to the shore 2 miles farther to the southward on tne same side of the harbor. Halifax Harbor has the advantage of never being closed by ice ; for although in very severe winters, when the low temperature has been accompanied by a continuance of calm weather, the inner part of the harbor has been frozen over, yet this has occurred only at intervals of many years ; and even then, as the ice never extends beyond George Island, there is always a sufficient space of open water between it and Macnab Island in which vessels may anchor in satiety. Even when the ice forms opposite the city, it never remains long, for it is broken up by the first southerly wind of sufficient strength to send a swell into the harbor. The smaller and landlocked harbors of this coast are in general all frozen over during the two or three coldest winter months ; and so also are the larger harbors, excepting for short distances within their en- trances, which are kept open by the swell from the southward. The coasting vessels are usually laid up in consequence from about the middle of December to near the end of March. Dock — The Halifax Graving Dock Company's dock is situated on the western shore of Halifax Harbor, about J a mile northward of the Eoyal Naval Yard. It will be 600 feet iii length on the blocks, 8t> feet wide at the entrance, with a depth of 36 feet on the sill at high water, ordinary springs. The Admiralty will have the right of priority of use of this dock. Railways.— Halifax is the terminus of the Intercolonial railway, which affords communications with all parts of Canada, via Quebec and the United States, via St. John, New Brunswick. Telegraphs.— Halifax is in telegraphic communication with all parts 5314 8 114 NOVA SCOTIA — a. E. COAST. of Caimda, with the United Kingdom by submarine cable, and with the United States by cable and laud lines. Mails and steam communication. — The mails to and from the United Kin^^dom and Canada are landed and shipped at Halifax, while the (ittW of St. Lawrence is closed to navigation. There is direct steam communication between Halifax and the United Kingdom, Newfound- land, the West Indies, and the United States, all the year around. Coal. — About l.'),UO() tons (partly Welsh) are usually kept in stock. Vessels are coaled rapidly without interruption by weather, eitliur alongside wharves, or by lighters of about 12U tons, or schooners of from 50 to 200 tons. About 800 to 3,000 tons can be placed on board in one day, working day and night cotitinuously ; the larger quantity by the Dominion railway depot. Time signal. — A gun is fired from the citadel at noon, mean time of the 60th meridian, equivalent to 4h. Om. Os. Greenwich mean time. This gun is|fired for local ]>urposes, and not for rating chroiiumeters. Charges. — Health dues, 2 cents per ton register; tugboat charges, as per agreement. Wharfage per day from $2 to $3; signal tax for each vessel, $1 ; discharging ballast per ton, 20 cents ; general cargo per ton, 25 cents ; ballast, cost per ton, stone, 35 cents ; cost of loading, 20 cents ; coal, cost of trimming per ton, 15 cents; cost of supplies, about the same as in American ports. The United States is represented by a consul-general and vice- consul-general. Pilotage. — Vessels shall pay one-half ctia tariff rates if spoken by a pilot, and is not accepted ; the dues are, Vessels of— Inward. Outwtrd. 200 tons $8.00 11.00 14.00 1S.0O 18.00 «5.0C 7.00 200 to 300 tons -. 300 to40Utons 0.00 400 toSOO tons , 10.00 800 to 800 tons 11.00 Over 600 tons, an additional 50 cents for every 100 tons or part thereof inwards, and 25 cents outwards. Automatic Buoys. — A buoy having a lO-inoh whistle is moored in 36 fathoms, with Sambro light-house bearing S. 73° W. 8^ miles, and Ohebucto Head light-house N. 75^ W. 6J miles. At 6 miles N. 60° W. from this buoy there is another automatic buoy, painted red, with a 10- inch whistle, in 21 fathoms water. From this buoy Ghebucto Head beard S. 32° W. 1| miles, and Sandwich Point N. 32° VV. 4 miles. Western Shore of the Harbor. — Ghebucto Head is 106 feet high, and consists of a whitish granite, ot which, together with clayslate, the steep and barren western shore of the harbor is composed. At the dis- tance of 1| miles from Ghebucto Head in a northerly direction is Portu- t HALIFAX HARBOR. 115 with the from the rax, while ect steam [ewfouiul- Diiud. ; in stocli. er, either looners of . on board r quantity lan time of me. This irs. jharges, as IX for each go per ton, g, 20 cents; , about the and vice- aoken by a d. Uatwanl. 00 »9.0C no 7.00 00 B.OO i 00 10.00 .00 11.00 1 >art thereof \ moored iu miles, and s N. 60° W. 1, with a 10- ibuoto Head miles. )6 feet high, ayslate, the At the dis- on is Portu- guese Cove ; and on a hill J^ mile in rear of the cove stands Gamper> down HagMtaff, 168 feet above the ciea. Ball Rock, with only 7 feet water, lies about ^ mile oft' shore, with Ghebucto Head, bearing N. 2° E. one mile. A black bnuy, with stAff and vane, is moored in 18 fathoms water, southeastward of the Rock. Another rock, with 4^ fathoms water on it, lies 2(M) yards N. W. from the Bell Hock; and as Duck Reef extends .'tUU yards from the shore towards them, the channel between is moreover nearly overlapped liy Duncan Ueef; it cannot be recommentled. Duncan Cove, on the southwest side of Chebucto Head, affords shelter for boats. Pilots are stationed at Chebnoto Head. Tlio pilot sciiooners carry a ttag with two horizontal red and white bands, and unless met with at sea, vessels approaching Halifax Harbor should hoist their colors by day and at night, or during foggy weather a gun should be fired. Herring Cove is a secure harbor for small craft and boats, having 6 feet at low water in its narrow entrance, and 8 feet, over soft mud, within. At its head a brook discharges the waters of a chain of small lakes. York Redonbt light may be easily recognized by its tlagstatt' and position ; it stands 177 feet above the sea, and nearly abreast the light- house on Mangher Beach. Pleasant Point, at the entrance of the Northwest Arm, is 1^ miles farther in, and will be recognized by its batteries and by the tower on its summit, L14 feet above the sea; George Island, also, which lies off the southern end of the city, will be readily kuown by its redoubt and tower. Prohibited Anchorage. — Vessels are not allowed to moor in Hali- fax Harbor westward of the line of the light-houses on (George Island and Sberbrook Tower (MacNab Island) iu one, to leave room for ships going alongside the wharves. Eastern Shore of the Harbor is less rocky and barren than the western, being formed of ridges of drift sand, clay, and bowlders, rest- ing on clayslate ; it is inhabited all the way to Dartmouth. At | of a mile to the northward of Devil Island is Barry Beach (of shingle), in- closing a shallow pond, which affords shelter to boats. Eastern Passage. — The entrances to the eastern passage lie on either side of Lawler Island ; that to the eastward, between the island and the main, being the deeper, and having 10 feet over its bar at low- water. Only 5 feet at that time of tide oaa be carried through between Lawler and Msi^Nab Islands ; there are rocks in the entrance and off the south end of Lawler Island, as will be seen on the chart. Macnab Island. — On Mangher beach, at the western extremity of the island, the light-house — known as Sherbrook tower — shows out as a very conspicuous object from the entrance of the harbor. The is- land is well cultivated, and has hills of sand, clay, and bowlders of vari- ions elevations, the maximum height being 152 feet above the sea. 116 NOVA SCOTIA — S. E. COAST. Ires Point, the NW. extremity of Macnab Island, is a steep clay bank, with a shingle beach cnrviug oat from it to the NE. Submarine Telegraph Cables. — Two submarine telei^raph cables are landed at the cable house, on the shore westward of George Island; they follow the direction of the western shore, until «)ff Chebucto Head ; thence, one is laid to Ballinskellig Bay, Ireland, and the other to Uye Beach, near Portsmouth, United States. Thrumcap Islet is connected with the SVV. extremity of Macnab Island by long shingle beaches, inchising a shallow poii E., Black and S. 30° itside the rry wharfs n of Dart- 8 rook, ng for the » openings jrn side of ■u channel water, the le breadth re anchor- brd Basin, age within d, and the a deptb of (ckyard, at influenced winds low eed half a. Directions. — The coast in the vicinity of Halifax is of moderate height, the hills near the shore being seldom 200 feet ab(»ve the sea. To the eastward of the harbor as far as Jedore, almost all the head- lands present cliffs of reddish sand, clay, and bowlders to the wasting action of the waves; whilst to the westward, as far as Mars Head, granite rocks — nearly white — predominate. The bank of soundings off Sambro Island, terminating in a point, at the depth of 30 fathoms, 5 miles south of the Sambro ledges, offers con- siderable assistance to vessels approaching Halifax from the westward in the thick fogs which so frequently prevail. Prom the eastward the approach is rendered comparatively easy by the absenise of out- lying dangers after passing Shut-in Island, and by the soundings deepening out with tolerable regularity to 30 fathoms, at distances varying from 4 to 6 miles from the shore; but when within two miles of Chebucto and White Heads, the depth of 30 fathoms will be found within i mile from the shore. Attention to these soundings, combined with the explosive signal at Sambro Island light house and the fog whistles on the automatic buoys moored at the entrance of the harbor and off Chebucto Head, may enable steam vessels to enter the harbor notwithstanding the fog, though it would be more prudent — especially in large vessels — to avoid attempting it under such circumstances. From the Westward. — Pass Sambro Light-house at the distance of 3 or 4 miles, and when Sandwich Point is seen open east of Chebucto Head, bearing N. 13° W. (the clearing mark for the eastern side of Sambro Ledges), steer N. 10° W. or north according to the wind, until the citadel flagstaff" is seen open east of Sandwich Point, bearing N. 24° W., which will lead between Litchtield and Neverfail shoals, and to Mars Bock Buoy, which leave to the westward. Having passed Sandwich Point, steer towards George Island, keeping Chebucto Head just in sight east of Sandwicli Point, until tiie vessel has passed close westward of the Middle Ground ; then open ont the head more to the eastward, so as to leave the Pleasant Shoal and Reed Bock buoys to tlie westward. If passing inside George Island, the Belleisleand Leopard buoys must be left to the westward, and York Bedoubt should be kept open of the wharves, in order to avoid a shoal spit, with 14 feet water, about | mile to the northward of Leopard Buoy. Having passed the spit, anchorage may be selected where most convenient, either off the wharves of the city or further np off the dockyard, where the commissioners' buoy will serve to point out the Dockyard Shoal. By Night. — Shape a course so as to pass not loss than 3 miles to the southward of Sambro Island light. To insure doing so, keep in not less than 30 fathoms water, until the above light bears N. 21° W. Having crossed the narrow bank which extends in a southerly direc- tion from Sambro Island into deeper water, haul up to the northward until Sherbrook Tower light is seen open east of Chebucto Head, which 120 NOVA SCOTIA — 8. E. COAST. bearing N. 10° W., when steer for it, or so as to pass within a mile of Oliebucto Head, which is steep close to. After having passed Ohebucto Head, continue to steer for the light, bearing between N. 21° W. and N. 10° W. Having passed Ives Knoll the vessel may proceed in on either side of George Island, or may anchor where convenient until daylight, accord- ing to circumstances. The light on Maugher Beach disappearing be- hind Ives Point will show the distance from George Island, when pro- ceeding to the eastward of that island, through the wider — and conse- quently preferable — channel during a dark night. Between Rock Head and Thmmcap Shoals,— If a NE. wind, or other circumstances, should vender the passage between the Rock Head and Thrumcap shoals preferable, proceed as follows: Having passed Devil Island, keep Graham Head open south of Devil Island the whole breadth of the island, which mark will lead to the southward of the Thrumcap Shoal and red buoy, and when Georgp Island is seen open west of Sherbrook Tower, bearing N. 24° W., steer in on this course, until abreast the Thrumcap buoy, when proceed as before directed. By Night. — Having made Sambro Island light, and passed Shut-in Island, steer to pass not less than ^ mile or more than one mile south- ward of the lights on Devil Island, steering S. 64° W. until the light on Maugher Beach bears N. 21° W., when proceed as before directed. From the Eastward. — Having passed Devil Island, steer for Che- bucto Head, and keep Sambro Island open of White Head, bearing S. 29° W., to pass southward of Rock Head aid Portuguese Shoals ; and when George Island is seen open west of Sherbrook Tower, bearing N. 24° W., steer in on the latter course, passing westward of the Portu- guese Shoal and buoy, and between Never 'ail and Thrumcap shoals. Alter passing the red buoy marking the latter danger, steer over for Sandwich Point, until the Roman Oatholic chapel, which is the western- most of three chapels at Dartmouth, is in line with the east point of George Island, bearing N. 19° W. ; these marks will lead clear of all dangers up to George Island, which may be passed on either side, and proceed as before directed. By Night — Apprmching from the eastward by night, and being to the westward of Jedore Ledges, steer along the land in a depth of not less than 30 fathoms, until Sambro Island light is seen ; then, if it be intended to pass southward of the Rock Head and Portuguese Shoals, steer for Cliebucto Head light (remembering that to clear the Rock Head the light ou Sambro Island must be kept wide open south of White Head, bearing S. 29° W., and the lights on Devi! Island should not bear eastward of N. 12° E.) until the light on Mr.i|t,her beach bears N. 21° W., when it should be steered for on that bearing (this course ' leads close to the inner automatic buoy, which may be passe mile of 3bebucto ' W. aud Br side of t, accord- Spring be- ben pro- id conse- I E. wind, be Bocic of Devil ,d to tbe 1 George W., steer •oceed as I Shut-in lie Houtb- I light ou cted. r for Cbe- eariiig S. )als; and earing N. be Porta- ip shoals, r over for I western- . point of ear of all side, and being to >th of not n, if it be «e Shoals, the Rock y south of id should sach bears lis course on either ' E., steer to the westward until George Island lights bear N. 31o W., which will lead clear of tbe dangers off Maugber Beach ; close to the east side of Middle Ground ; and about mid-channel between fteed Rock aud Ives Knoll buoy, aud proceed as before directed. Caution.— Duriug a dark night or thick fog do not approach the Sambro Ledges within the SOfatbom line, as a depth of 40 fathoms will be found J mile eastward, and one mile southward of these dangers. For tbe remainder of the coast it would not be advisable to approach within tbe 40-fatboin line, but it must be borne in mind that this depth may be found within tbe distance of 3 miles of some of tbe most tbr- midable dangers between Cape Canso and Halifax ; as, for instance, the Jedore Ledges. Devil Island, composed of clay slate, is 15 feet high, ^ mile in length, and lies the same distance from Hartland Point, the eastern point of the main laud at the entrance of the harbor. A reef connects this island witb the sbore, and shallow water extends from it t^ mile seaward. Pilots are stationed on Devil Island. Cole Harbor has a dangerooe bar of sand, witb only 3 feet at low water, which is covered with breakers whenever any sea is running. It is only during flue weather and with a smooth sea that boats can safely cross it to tbe entrance, which is barely 40 fathoms wide between points of shingle and sand. In this narrow entrance the depth is 3 fatboras, and tbe rate of the tide stream from one to 2 knots, but im- mediately within it the depth diminishes to 4 or 5 feet, and narrow channels— between mud flats — extend 2 miles inland. Egg Islet is low aud narrow and connected with tbe shore by a reef and shingle beach; shoal water extends 600 yards southward of tbe islet, where it terminates in 5 fathoms nearly one mile from tbe . main sbore. Lawrenceton Lake.— The entrance of this lake— admitting boats only in fine weatber— is J mile to tbe eastward of Egg Islet, and on tbe west side of Lawrenceton Head. This latter is a peninsula 92 feet high, composed of drift sand, clay, and bowlders, resting on clay slate, and united to the shore by long beaches of stones or shingle, tbe red cliffs of which form tbe distinguishing feature of this part of tbe coast. Porter Lake.— The entrance to this lake is on the western side of Grabam Head, a peninsula with red cliffs 60 feet high. The lake ex- tends 7 miles to the northward, and has in some parts depths of 4 and 5 fathoms, bnt only one foot at low water in its narrow entrance. Shut-in Shoals.— Are composed of rock, with 16 feet least water, and are extremely dangerous. The red cliffs of Seller Head seen open east of tbe eastern entrance point of Tbree Fathoms Harbor, bearing N. 13° E., leads SE., and the light-houses on Devil Island, bearing S. 86° W., leads southward of Shut-in Shoals. Shut-in Island, of low clay-slate rock, is distant J mile from Grabam Head, but united to it by a reef aud beach of shingle. It forms the western side of tbe entrance to Three Fatboms Harbor. 122 NOVA SCOTIA — 8. E. COAST. Three Fathoms Harbor is quite open to the southward and affords shelter only to small vessels which can run into the narrow channel east of Ball Islet one mile within the entrance. The depth is there 3 fathoms, mud ; but to reach it the low- water depth of 8 feet (with a ^ feet rise) must be passed over. Pat Shoal is a small rocky patch, with only 4J fathoms water, bear- ing N. 01° B. nearly 3 miles from Shut-in Island and S. 11° B. IJ miles from Story Head. Codray and Round Shoals lie nearer in shore and are therefore less in the way of vessels ; the least water on them is 4^ fathoms. Chissetcook Inlet is useless to shippiuR, having only 3 feet at low water on the bar of the western and principal channel, which commences i mile within Cape Bntry and continues to the head of the inlet. Both channels are very narrow, and wind through flats of sand, mud, and weeds which dry at low water. Perpisawick Head from seaward appears like an island of pyram- idal form, but from a distance of 3 or 4 miles it has the appearance of a brickwork fortification. • Perpisawick Inlet is J mile wide at the entrance, which is on the west side of Perpisawick Head. After crossing the bar of sand, about a mile within the entrance (on which there are only 6 feet at low water)» there commences a narrow channel, between mud flats uncovered at low water, which is navigable to the head of the inlet, a direct distance of 6 miles, for any vessel that can cross the Ixir. Perpisawick Shoal, of rock, with 5 fathoms water on it, bears N. 77° B. 5^ miles from Shut in Island and 8. 13° E. iij miles from Per- pisawick Head. Musquidoboit Shoal is composed of rook and is I,Ji»0 yards long. The least water on it, 3 fathoms, is nearly in its center. Musquidoboit Inlet contains many islands, and is navigable for small vessels and boats a distance of 7 miles, where it receives the waters of the Musquidoboit River. Over the bar, at the entrance of the principal channel, which is on the eastern side of the inlet, and 1| miles NW. from Jedore Head, a depth of 10 feet can be carried at low water ; but Dunbrock Rock, with only 3 feet water on it, lies directly in the way, and renders the entrance both difficult and dangerous. Within the bar, in a channel 250 yards wide, there is a depth of 4 fathoms between flats of sand, mud, and weeds, which uncover at low water. At about 4 miles within the bar the channel becomes very nar- row, antl only 7 or 8 feet deep, but small vessels and boats c-in ascend with the tide to the head of the inlet. The most favorable time for a stranger to enter this inlet is at low water, when the mud flats on either side of the channel become visible. Harbor Islet is small and stony, and from it a rocky shoal, on which are the Musquidoboit Ledges, extends' upwards of a mile to the south- ward, and to within i mile of the Musquidoboit Shoal. lemiii^^mit'^o^tpf^^ JEDOBE HARBOR. 123 id affords mnel east t fathoms, feet riae> iter, bear- !. 1^ miles therefore )m8. jet at low )mmeiices let. Both mud, and of pyram- jarance of is ou the ind, aboat ow water), ired at low Ustauce of t, bears K. from Per- ards loug. I'igable for ceires the aiice of the et, and 1^ ied at low es directly ^erous. ileptli of i >ver at low )s very uar- Ciin asceud t is at low )me visible, il, ou which } the south- Tides.— At the entrance of Gbissetcook, Perpisawick, and Musqui- doboit Inlets it is high water, full and change, at 7h. 30m. ; springs rise 4J feet and neaps 3 feet. The ordinary rate of tidal streams In the en- trance is from 2 to 3 knots. Jedore Harbor is the first ship harbor eastward of Hiilifax. Its entrance is 850 yards wide from West Head to the opposite shore ; but Thorn Shoal, with only 9 feet water on it, stretches out from the western shore just outside and across the entrance. The channel between this shoal and East Head is 650 yards wide between the 3-fathom lines, and carries a depth of 4 fathoms at low water over what may be termed the bar. ' )n the eastern side of the harbor and immediately within the entrance is Bar P<^nt, composed of shingle aud inclosing a pond ; and from it Bar Shoal, a continuation of the shingle of Bar Islet, extends more than half way across to the western shore, diminishing the breadth of the channel to 200 yards, but forming no bar, the depth there being 6J fathoms. The sandy beach of Marsh Point will be seen extending from the western shore at IJ miles within the entrance. The anchorage is secure within this beach in 7 fathoms, over mud, and iu a channel 300 yards wide ; but outside the bottom is of sand, and a considerable swell rolls in with strong winds from the southward ; nevertheless, the coast- ing schooners anchor there in fine summer weather. The channel, between flats of mud, weeds, and mussel beds, which dry at low water, continues clear and sufficiently deep for tolerably large vessels to Bown Islands, off English Point, which separates the eastern aud western arms of the harbor, 4 miles within the entrance. Anchorage can be obtained within or to the northwest of these small islands ; but the entrances to the arms are nearly closed by shoals which leave only very narrow and intricate channels through which there are not more than 14 or 15 feet at low water. The arms are navigable, for any vessel that can enter tliem, nearly to their heads, including Salmon Inlet to the rapids at the entrance of Salmon River which is 2 miles above the long wooden bridge which crosses the entrance of the inlet li miles up the eastern arm. Supplies.— The scattered population along the shores of Jedore Har- bor could afford only a very limited supply of fresh provisions to ship- ping. Water may be obtained from a small stream near Blakeley Cove, on the western shore, 3^ miles within the entrance. Jedore Head attains an elevation of 200 feet, on the western side of the head are cliffs of red clay 70 feet high, and on its SE. side stands Jedore cliffs, also of red clay, and forming an excellent landmark which attains an elevation of 135 feet. Dangers oflF the entrance.— To render Jedore Harbor, with its nar- row and crooked channel, easy of access, buoys would be required ou Thorn aud Bar Shoals; meanwhile, the following description of the 124 NOVA SCOTIA — S. E. COAST. ■dangers aad directions for their avoidance will enable the intelligent seaman to use it as a harbor of refuge in case of necessity. Jedore Rock of clay-slate and 50 feet high, has a rocky ledge ex- tending 300 yards from its western end. It bears from Jedore Head S. 71° B 1^ miles, the passage between being clear, with the exception of some patches of 5 and 6 fathoms, on which, however, the sea very rarely breaks. Arnold Rock dries at low water, and can almost always be seen ; to pass westward of it, as well as Arnold Shoal, which lies J mile farther to the southward, with 6 fathoms on it, the harbor's mouth must be kept open westward of Jedore Rock. Old Man is a small rock 12 feet high, and lies with the center of Jedore Rock in line with Jedore Head. It is steep-to on the eastern side, but a small sunken rock, with only 4 feet water, lies 200 yards from it S. 12° VV. ; the passage is clear between it and Arnold and Jedore Rocks. There is also a clear passage between Old Man and Mehanny Rocks, some of which are dry at low water, and bear from Old Man N. 35° E. jj mile; and beyond them in the same direction Gull Rock, together with Barren and Roger Islands, will be seen. Macdonald Rock, with 12 feet water, bears S. 69o W. IJ miles from the south point of Long Island. Inner Pollock is i a mile in extent north and south, having 7 fathoms on its south end, and the least water, 5^ fathoms, near its northern extremity ; from it Jedore Rock (in line with the eastern ex- tremity of Jedore Cliff) bears N. 32'' W. 3 miles, and Egg Island N. 58* E. 5)( miles. Outer Pollock has 6 fathoms on it, and lies nearly a mile farther oflF on the same line of bearing from Jedore Rock, and with Egg Island bearing N. fU)° B. 5^ miles. East Pollock is a sin*ll pitch of 7 fathoms, with deep water all around. Jedore Olili seen open westward of Jedore Rock, leads west- ward of the Pollocks. Hopkin Rock has 11 feet water, and from it Old Man (with the breakers on Arnold Rock seen just open to the southward of it) bears S. 63° W. I'll miles. Both these rocks are very small, with deep water all around them, and break only in heavy weather. Southwest Ledges are three rocky patches, which dry at low water, and cover a space 600 yards long in a S. 30° W. direction. From the northeasternmost ledge the south point of Long Island bears N. 7° E. IJ^ miles, and the passage is clear between them. The south westernmodf ledge is covered only during spring tides, and can therefore almost always be seen. Bull Rock, bearing S. 63° E. 1,250 yards from the last-named dan- ger, is one of the most dangerous of the ledges, having only a depth of 5 feet over it at low water ; during high tides it is marked by break- ers, but only when a heavy sea is running. From it the south end of l«i,lSi|i-i1»1*liir JEDORE HARBOR — DIRECTIONS. 125> atelligent ledge ex- lore Head exception > sea very be seen ; ies f mile it's mouth ! center of le eastern 200 yards mold and Man and bear from Btion Gull , 1^ miles having 7 8, near its eastern ex- Island y. farther oflF Bgg Island » water all leads west- n (with the of it) bears deep water D low water, From the irs N. 7° E. ester nmoof fore almost lamed dan- r a depth of i by break - outh end of Long Island bears N. 7° W. If miles, and Bgg Island N. 47° B. 2 miles. Boll Shoal, with 3 fathoms water, bears S. 21° E. nearly § mile from thesouthwesternmostoftheSouthwest Ledges. From it Old Man, Jedore Book, and Jedore Head are nearly in li ne. bearing N. 70° W. It rarely breaks, and is therefore extremely dangerous. Brig Rock has only 3 feet at low water, when its position is usually marked by a breaker. Egg Island bears from it N. 55° E. 3f miles j Old Man Rock, on with the center of Jedore Cliff, bears N. 52° W. about 3 miles. Bell Buoy. — A bell baoy, surmounted by a staff and cage, and col- ored red, is moored 500 yards southward of Brig Rock. Brig Shoal, with 5 fathoms on it, bears 8. 55° E. 800 yards from the Brig Rock; from it Bull Shoal, Bull Rock, and the south side of Egg Island are nearly in line, bearing N. 49° E. This shoal is dangerous after very heavy gales, when it is said to break at irregular intervals. Mark. — The eastern extremity of Jedore Cliff in line with Old Man Rock, bearing about N. 46° W. leads 800 yards westward of Brig Rock and Shoal and between them and the East Pollock. Directions. — Approaching the anchorage in Jedore Harbor from the westward, pass midway, or nearly so, between Jedore Head and Jedore Rock, so as to keep outside Thorn Shoal, until the steep bank (not the sand beach) of Marsh Point touches the shingle beach of Bar Point, bearing N. 4° W. Steer with the above marks on, until Roger Island touches oast head, bearing 8. 77° E. ; then steer N. 32° W. to clear Bar Shoal. When from 200 to 300 yards from the shingle beach on the western shore of the harbor, steer along the shore to the northward and east- ward, until abreast the sand beach of Marsh Point, which must be rounded to the northward at the distance of 200 yards and anchor be- tween it and Pea Point on the opposite shore, in about 7 fathoms, over muddy bottom. At or near low water, when a part of the Bar Shoal is shown by breakers, and the steep mud flats are visible on either side of the channel, is the most favorable time for entering this harbor. In approaching the harbor from the southward, the harbor's mouth should be seen br zen Old Man and Jedore Rocks, or the whole of Jedr re Cliff should be open westward of Jedore Rock, to pass westward of Pollocks, on which, however, no less than 5J fathoms could be found. Leaving Arnold and Jedore Rocks to the westward, pass midway be- tween them and Old Man Rock, taking care to avoid the sunken rock off the latter; or, if preferred, pass eastward of Old Man Rock, which, is steep-to on that side, and when approaching the harbor's mouth pro- ceed as before directed. Caution. — Vessels proceeding along this part of the coast should pass outside all the Jedore Ledges, and at night, or during foggy weather,, should not approach within the depth of 40 fathoms, for the sound- ings are deep and very irregular near them all. k*=j' ^ ; and Owl Head S. 31° E. This will place a vessel in L'4 feet low water springs, with good holding ground of «andy mud. Directions.— The greatest danger to be avoided in entering this bay is Owl Rock, which lies on the eastern side of the channel, with only 9 feet water, and bears from the south point of Friar Island N. 71° W. | mile. The peninsula of Wisdom Point (at the head of the bay) appar- ently touching Cable Point, bearing N. 42° W., leads clear to the west- ward of It, and also of the reef which extends 700 yards SW. from Friar Island, and which can almost always be seen. Supplies.— Wood may be obtained anywhere round the bay, and water, fresh provisions, and a few vegetables from the settlement at Palmer Cove. False Passage, between Nichol and Cable Islands, on the eastern side of the bay, is only fit for boats or small craft, 4 feet being all that can be carried through at low water. Ship Harbor. —The approaches to the harbor are comparatively bold and steep, and lie between Charles aud Nichol Islands, of gneiss, and barren ; they are amongst the largest on the coast, but in no part do they exceed an elevation of 100 feet above the sea. The space between Nichol Island on the western side and the main- land is almost completely occupied by islands and shoals, which afford shelter to Day Cove, where secure anchorage for small vessels may be obtained in less than 4 fathoms, in which position they will be out of the swell that rolls in after heavy southerly gales. The western shore of Ship Harbor is well settled, and so also is the eastern shore as far in as Salmon Point, for the hills of drift sand and clay which attain an elevation of more than 200 feet, though abounding in bowlders, afford a sufficiency of hay and vegetables fbr the support of cattle and sheep. The northeastern shore within Newcombe Brook is barren, the hills being bare and the extreme height 240 feet. Little River flows into the head of the harbor at 5 miles from the entrance, and near it, on the wer^-rn side, a larger and rapid stream discharges the waters of Ship Harbor Lake. A Roman Catholic chapel stands on the western shore at IJ miles within the entrance, and an English Episcopal church IJ miles farther in on the same side. Supplies. — The best watering place is a rapid brook on the eastern shore, about J mile within Salmon Point. Supplies of fresh provisions may be obtained. Dangers on Western Side.— In approaching the ' trbor the princi. pal dangers lie outside the islands off its entrance- Friar Island and Friar Ledges lie on the western side, and off them Flat Ledge, always above water, from which West Bull Rock, with only a fathom water on fmmm 128 NOVA SCOTIA — 8. E. COAST. it, bearfl S. 55<^ W. \ mile, ami East Bull Rock, with 4 fathoiuH on it^ N. 71<^ B. Sm) yanlH. Egg Island lighthouse, seen over Bald Rock, beHfing S. ii'>^ W., leatls nearly ^ mile to the southward of these dan- gers. Tlieie is also the Middle Ground, with 4 fothonis water, bearing from Flat Ledge N. 47° E. 1,200 yards, and the more dangerous NE. shoal, with 2^ fathoms water, bearing from the eastern end of Friar Ledge N. Srp E. distant 900 yards, and from Bear Rock 8. 58° W. If mile. Far- ther in, the ro(;kH and shallow water ofl' the eastern side of Nichol Island, including Pot Rock with 4 fathoms on it, will be avoided if Wolf Point (the high northeastern extremity of Nichol Island) bo not brought to bear to the north wanl of N. 47° W. Oatlying Dangers. — Little Rock, with 4 fathoms, bearing from Flat Ledge S. 43° E. about 2 miles ; Broad Breaker, with 4 fathoms, bearing from Charles Point S. 34° E. 1^ miles; Silver Shoal, with 5 fathoms, lies from Charles Point S. 57° E. 3'^ miles, and from the SE. point of Outer Island S. 22° E. 2 j miles. On all the above shoals the sea breaks occasionally after heavy gales. Bull Rock, with 4 feet water, bears from Charles Point (the south extremity of Charles Island) S. 63° E. 1,200 yards, and, together with numerous other rocks above and under water, will be cleared on the south side by keeping Long Point (the southern extremity of Nichol Island) open south of Bear Rock, bearing S. 75° W. The mark that leads clear to the westward of these dangers, including the ledges far- ther in off the Western Islands, is Ship Rock seen over Bald Island^ and in line with Tucker Point bearing N. 38° W. Bear Rock, which is small, rises 4 feet above high water, and is quite bold on the eastern side ; but a reef, mostly dry at low water, extends from it 300 yards to the westward. It lies nearly in the middle of the entrance between the islands, with a clear channel on either side. From the Westward. — In approaching Ship Harbor from the west- ward. Ship Rock (which gives its name to the harbor) may be easily recognized, being a remarkable cliff of clay slate, 70 feet high, on one of the islands on the eastern side of the passage, and a mile within Charles Island. When seen from a distance at sea the cliff' resembles a ship under sail, and, together with the western extremities of Bald Island and Tucker Point, forms the leading mark for passing on either side of Bear Rock. Entering the harbor with the wind from the westward, proceed as follows: To clear the East and West Bulls, steer ro the eastward with Egg Island light-house and Bald Rock in line, or pass outside Flat Ledge (which can always be seen) at the distance of a third of a mile or more, and when Ship Rc-k comea in line with the western point of Bald Island, bearing N*. 27° W., steer in with this mark on, between the NE. shoal and the reef off' Bear Rock. Having passed the latter, steer so as to pass midway between Wolf Point and Bald Island (fron^ SHIP HARBOR — SHOAL HAT. 129 fatbotuH on it, ver Bnld Kock, (1 of these dau- )r, beariug from rous NB. ahoal, Friar Ledge N. V^. ^ mile. Far- Hide of ^icbol avoided if Wolf be not brought Ariug from Flat ithoms, beariug ith. 5 fathoms, lie iSE. poiut of i the sea breaks )int (the aontb , together with cleared ou the imity of Nichol Fhe mark that the ledges far- er Bald Islaud, :er, and is quite water, extends ) middle of the ther side, from the west- I may be easily high, on one of within Charles sembles a ship >f Bald Island 1 either side of rd, proceed as eastward with IS outside Flat rd of a mile or 3tern poiut of a, between the ed the latter, 1 Island (from> •either of which the shallow water does not extend beyond 60 fathoms), and thence for the harbor's mouth. Having arrived abreast Passage Island, steer to the westward to- wards DayCove, until the house on Bisan Poiut is in line with the NB. point of Caroline Island, and seen over the small shingle islet off Salmon Point, and appearing nearly to touch the clay cliff of the lat- ter, bearing N. 47° VV. Keep these marks exactly in line, and they will lead in past Black Rock (which lies outside Black Point on the eastern side of the entrance), and O'Brien Reef, which lies ^ mile further in, anuld be neces- dariug south- Supplies. — The shore!* of Pope and Spry Harbor, as well as Taylor Bay, are mor^ thickly peopled than usual on this coast. There are ex- tensive tracts of liardwood land in the vicinity, furnishing timber for shipbuilding, anil supplies of fresh provisions and water may be readily obtained. Horse Rock, with only 4 feet water, lies the farthest out, and from it Pope Kock is in line with the east end of Ironbound Island, bearing N. 5l'o VV. Pope Rock and Shoals. — Pope Shoals, which are exceedingly dan. gerous, exteiiil more than half way out from Pope Hock towards Horse Hock, and the soundings are rocky and irregular throughout the re- maining distance. Pope Rock is above water and distant '^ mile from Ironbound Island, but the passage between them is rendered im|)assa- ble to strangers by sunken rooks, and so also is the passage between the island and the main. Schooner Rock, with only 6 feet water, lies ^ mile out from the islets at the entrance of Shelter Cove, in which the fishing schooners lie land- locked in 2 or 3 fathoms at low water. Black Rock lies ^ mile further in on the western side, and is always above water. Tides. — It is high water in Pope Harbor, full and change, at 7 h. 40 m. ; springs rise 0^ feet, and neaps 4^ feet, but strong winds cause great irregularities. The tidal streams are weak and irregular. Directions. — When not less than 2^ miles from the Outer Islands bring the Episcopal Church steeple in line with Gerard Head bearing N. 42° W., and these marks will lead in between Phujnix Island and Pope Shoals. As soon as Pope and Taylor Heads are in line bearing N. 74° E. alter course to N. 57° W., and it will lead midway between the reef off Gerard Head and Schooner Rock, and when the two west- ern points of Harbor Island are in line, bearing X. 38° W. (when they should also be in line with the Roman Catholic chapel, which is not easily distinguished), alter course to N. 49° W. (for the head of the har- bor, so as to pass midway between Harbor Island and Grum Point), until the channel through the harbor and to the northward of Gerard Island begins to open. Then steer N. i3° E., or for the church steeple, until the points of Long Island on the norvhern side of the harbor are in line, bearing N.6O0 B. which will lead to the anchorage midway between Bollong Point and the NE. point of Har'uor Island, in 4^ fathoms, mud. Should the wind be from the eastward, the vessel may anchor outside on the last-named leading marks, and in 6^ fathoms muddy bottom, and may either wait for a fair wind, or warp into the harbor. Spry Bay. — Taylor Head is the outer extremity of a narrow penin- aula which divides Mushaboou and Spry Harbors ; it is destitute of trees, but being composed of large white rocks is distinguishable afar off. Spry Harbor, situated at the NW. end of Spry Bay, is suflft- 1 132 NOVA SCOTIA — 8. E. COAST. ciently commodious to accommodate a large number of vessels ; in 7 or 8 fathoms, mud, secure from all winds. Redman Shoal lies with Taylor Head, the eastern point of the bayj bearing N. 26° E., i/ff miles; and Lawler Point (which ia an islet at high water), on the eastern side of Gerard Island, is seen just open eastward of Maloney Rock, bearing N. 38° W. The fishermen report the least water on this shoal to be 5 fathoms, nor could any less be found by the officers engaged in the Admiralty survey. Mad Moll Reef extends in a westerly direction nearly a mile from Taylor Head. On it there are two patches of shingle, which are always above water; and to the northward of it two rocky patches nearly dry at low water. Herring and Maloney Shoals.— The latter, of considerable extent, with 12 feet water, ia by far the most in the way. Its bearing from Maloney Rock, which is always above water, is S. 5° E., and distance from i to § mile. The southern extremity of the dry shingle on Mad Moll Reef in line with Taylor Head, bearing N. 60° E., leads i mile southward; and Bald Rock, seen just open eastward of Maloney Rock, bearing N. 14° W., leads eastward of these shoals. Neverfail Shoal, with 17 feet water, lies N. 74° E., i mile from Maloney Rock; and from it Tomlees Head and Leslie Island appear touching, N. 16° W. Directions for Eastern Channel. — Pass westward of Redman Shoal and Mad Moll Reef, and between the latter and Neverfail Shoal, by keeping the eastern side of Tomlees Head only just shut in behind the high bank on the eastern side of Leslie Island, bearing N. 20° W. Steer with this mark until Maloney Rock and Pope Head are in line, bearing S. 58° W. ; then alter course to N. 38° W. for the western side of Tomlees Head, and having pas8e«l between Bald and Ram Rocks, steer to the westward round the northern end of Gerard Island, from which the shallow water does not extend beyond 300 yards, and anchor in 7 or 8 fathoms, mud, with Taylor Head shut in behind the NE. point of Gerard Island. Mushaboon Harbor scarcely deserves to be ranked as a harbor, as it is exposed to the full force of SE. winds. It affords indiflferent shelter to vessels only on the eastern side near its head, where Gull Rock and the shoals which nearly unite it to Malagash Island break off the sea. Directions. — As the harbors immediately adjoining Mushaboon to the east and west are so superior to it, vessels seldom require to enter this exposed anchorage ; but should any wish to do so, the safest course for a stranger to pursue will be to steer with either of the leading marks for Sheet Harbor on until Bob Bluii' is seen well open north of Pyche Island, bearing N. 55° W.; thence steer for the bluff on this bearing, which will lead well to the eastward of the Pyche Shoals, and vessels may run up the middle of the bay, steering N. 50° W. for Yellow Rock, the channel between the dangers on either side being J mile wide. SHEET HARBOR. 133 jssels 5 in 7 or nt of the l)ay> is an islet at eon just open herineu report id any less be ly a mile from ich are always lies nearly dry lerable extent, bearing from ., and distance bingle on Mad i., leatls i mile Malouey Rock, I., 4 mile from Island appear ' Bedman Shoal rfail Shoal, by t in behind the ing N. 20° W. Bad are in line, le western side id Earn Rocks, rd Island, from 'ds, and anchor lehind the NB. as a harbor, as liflferent shelter Gull Rock and lak ofif the sea. Mushaboon to eqiiire to enter le safest course leading marks north of Pyche II this bearing, als, and vessels ►r Yellow Rock, mile wide. On nearing Gall and Yellow Rocks a vessel may either pass be- tween them, disregarding the rock with 4 fathoms at low water, or» passing to the westward of Yellow Rock, may steer to the eastward towards Botelier Island and anchor ofif it, northward of Gull Rock, in 6 fathoms, mud. Sheet Harbor, one of the tiuest on the coast, derives its name from Sheet Rock, a small islet outside the entrance, which presents to sea- ward a remarkable cliff of clay slate, resembling a suspended sheet. The entrance between Western and Danberry Islands is ^ mile wide, and the anchorage immediately within it on the western side is quite safe, and sufficiently commodious to accommodate a lar^e number of vessels. The harbor is of considerable extent, extending inland 6^ miles, and is navigable for vessels nearly to its bead. There is a mill at the head of the NW. and principal arm, the shores of which are well settled. There is also a scanty population along the NE. arm and eastern shore of the harbor; but the western shore, from Mitchell Point to Musha- boon Harbor, is uninhn,bited. Supplies. — Water may be obtained in Sheet Harbor, either from Watering Cove on the west side, or Smelt Brook on the opposite shore, A moderate supply of fresh provisions and abundance of fire- wood may also be procured from the inhabitants, who derive subsistence from ship-building, coasting, and farming. . Buoy.— An automatic whistling buoy, painted black and red in ver- tical stripes, is moored in 24 fathoms, with Sheet Rock lighthouse bearing N. 5° W., distant 5^ miles. Pyche Shoals. — The dangers on the western side of the entrance to Sheet Harbor are rocky patches of 3J and 4 fathoms oflF Taylor Head, and also the more dangerous Pj'che Shoals, which are separated from Pycbto Island by a narrow channel leading to the entrance of Musha- boon Harbor. The least water on these shoals, 17 feet, and their SE» point, distant about a mile from the island, is cleared by the east points of Guilford and Western Islands in line, bearing N. 9° E. 7ankee Jack, a small rocky shoal with only 3 feet water, bears from Taylor Head, S. 51° E., 2J miles. At the distance of ^ mile westward, there is another rock with 12 feet water. Taylor Qoose. — Tnis dangerous rock, awash at high water, bears from Taylor Head S. 47° E., IJ miles. Vessels may pass SE. of it at the distance of 200 yards, but in the opposite direction the shoal extends J mile, and is .just cleared on the west side by the east points of Guilford and Western Islands in line, bearing N. 9° E. Mushaboon Shoal, a small rocky patch with 'i fathoms water, bears from Taylor Head S. 72° E., IJ miles. As the position of this rock is seldom shown by a breaker, it is exceedingly dangerous. From Logan Rock, which is seldom marked by a breaker, Yankee Jack (on the opposite side of the channel) bears S. 82° W., the patsage between them being nearly 1^ miles wide. i!' 134 NOVA SCOTIA S. E. COAST. Gtoddes Shoal, with 5 fathoms on it, is the outermost of the o£f- lying patches on the eastern side of the entrance. From it the eastern extremity of Western Shagroost is in line with Fishery Point, bearing N. 2° E., distant about 2^ miles ; and Sheet Bock appears in the en- trance of the harbor, between Western and Danberry Islands, bearing N. 22° W., and distant about 4f miles. The sea breaks over this rocky shoal only after heavy gales. Monroe Rock, with 12 feet water, lies with the western points of Western Shagroost and Sheet Bock in line. Pumpkin and Horse Is- lands apparently touching, bearing N. 38° E., leads J mile south of this rouk, and close to the southward of Geddes Shoal. Western Shagroost, 6 feet above high water, can always be seen. A reef partially dry, extends § mile from it in a S. 28° W. direction, and has only 4 feet on its SW. extremity. To the northward of the rock is the dangerous Babiu Shoal, the least water on which 2} fathoms, bears from the Western Shagroost N. 47° W. IJ miles, and from Fishery Point (nearly in line with the southei'u extremities of Hardwood and Mink Islands) S. 43° W. 1^ miles. Eastern Shagroost is a low rocky ledge barely 5 feet above high water, with breaking rocky shoals on its north and west sides, but steep-to on its SW. side. Piimpkin Island is a steep rounded islet 90 feet high, bare of trees, lying west 1$ miles from the lighthouse on Beaver Island ; rocky ledges extend nearly ^ mile from its south point. i Macdonald Shoals, the outermost patch of which, with 12 feet water, bears from Macdonald Point S. 43" W. J mile. The mark which just clears the western extremities of Macdonald and Babin Shoals, as well as the reef off the Western Shagroost, is Sheet Bock, apparently touch- ing the east point of Western Island, bearing N. 26° W. Tides. — Strong winds cause great irregularities, especially in the rise. The diurnal inequality is most distinctly shown in the low waters, in this and all the harbors iliat have been surveyed on this coast, includ- ing Halifax. The ordinary rate of the tidal streams does not exceed half a knot ; but it is said to be stronger after heavy rains or the melting of the winter's snow, or after long continued southerly gales, which have previously forced the water into the harbor. It is high water about a quarter of an hour earlier in the entrance of the harbor, where the rise is about 2 feet less. Western Passage. —Proceeding for Sheet Harbor by the western- most passage, westward of Taylor Goose and Mushaboon Shoals, and between them and the Pyche Shoals, bring Sheet Kock to apparency touch the east point of Danberry Island, bearing N. 20° E., and steer with this mark on until Bob Bluff opens out north of Pyche Island, when the Pyche shoals will have been passed, and the vessel may be kept a little to the eastward, so as to give a wider berth to the reefs oft" Guilford Island, which the above marks only just clear. SHEET AND BEAVER HARBORS. 135 St of the off- it the easteru oint, bearing ars iu the eu- uids, bearing er this rocky tern points of ind Horse Is- nile south of ways be seen. W. direction, northward of ■ on which 2J L| miles, and ixtremities of it above high >8t sides, but bare of trees, rocky ledges i 12 feet water, rk which just hoals, as well irently touch- Bcially in the j«?i low waters* coast, iuclud- ot exceed half the melting of 8, which have water about a lere the rise is IT the westeru- a Shoals, and to apparency E., and steer ?yche Island, vessel may be ;o the reefs off DiroctionB.— If a vessel be bound up Sheet Harbor, the first danger to be avoided is White Bonk, which dries at low water, and is distant flOO yards from Danberry Island, the west point of which, apparently touching Sheet Bock, bearing 8. 5° E., leads just clear westward of White Bock. Sheet Bock should therefore be kept open to the west- ward of Danberry Island until past this rock ; then steer to the east- ward, 80 as to bring the western points of Danberry Island and Sheet Bock in line, bearing S. 3° W., and steer N. 3° E., or so as to keep those marks on astern, until nearly abreast Slab Point, on the western shore, 2 miles within the entrance. Then, as those marks barely clear Slab Shoal, steer a little to the eastward until it is passed, observing that the passage between it and the reef, which extends 300 yards from Salmon Island, is only 400 yards wide. Having passed Slab Shoal, keep towards the western shore rounding Olding Point at a distance not exceeding 300 yards to avoid the shoal off the shingle of Watt Point, and anchor off Watering Oove on the western shore in 7 fathoms, mud, with the cbapel at the head of the Northwest Arm appearing nearly midway between Mitchell and ^^hurch Points. The vessel will here be landlocked, and secure in all V the navigation of the Arms the services of a pilot would be indis- P . ;able. Middle Passage.— To pass between Yankee Jack and Logan Bock, which is the widest passage, steer with Sheet Bock apparently touching the western point of Danberry Island, bearing N. 5° W., until the 8W. point of Guilford Island bears N. 61° W., when the southern point of Salisbury Island will have disappeared behind it; then steer to the northward and westward, until the west ends of Danberry Island and Sheet Bock are in line, in ortler to clear the 28-foot shoal which the former marks lead over, and pass to the westward of Sheet Bock. Beaver Island.— Beaver Island, 40 feet high, is partially covered with scrubby trees, and its slate cliffs show white to seaward. On its north side, in moderate weather, landing can be safely effected at a small cove near the east end; and in bad weather boats may be saved at high water by entering the gully, which separates the two parts of the island. Beaver Harbor.— Notwithstanding the numerous dangers which fringe the coast in the vicinity of this harbor, it is easy of access after Beaver Island lighthouse has been identified, in connequence of the entrance channel being straight and deepr after passing 400 yards eastward of Beaver Island. The position of this harbor is objectionable during heavy southerly winds, but under all other circumstances it Affords an excellent refuge. The Beaver Harbor of the fishermen is a small cove situated NW. one mile from Beaver Point. It affords excellent shelter, being pro- tected by a reef of stones, partly dry at low water, springs, and by a ^JEmFffW"*™^'*'™^''- M»»-«i'''-.-'^.^>!m«nv2Fjiai . 186 NOVA SCOTIA — 8. E. COAST. spit of sand and shingle extending half way across its entrance, withiui which small vessels may lie secure from all winds. Salmon Ri^er, at the bridge, affords good fresh water. Supplies. — The inhabitants along the shores of Beaver Harbor re- side principally at the cove on its west side and at Salmon River. Fire- wood and a limited supply of fresh provisions may be generally obtained' at moderate prices. William Shoal, with 3 fathoms water, and only breaising occasion- ally, is the principal danger to be avoided in approaching Beaver Island' lighthouse. It will be cleared, wbou nearing it from the southward, by keeping the conical hill on Sutherland Island open east of Beaver Island. Mannot Rock, the outermost danger on the east side of the channel' leading to Beaver Harbor, is only awash at low water, springs, and with the prevalent SW. winds it seldom breaks. Middle Shoal has 2^ fathoms water on it, and two 4fathom patches lying to the southward. Sutherland Island, on the west side of the channel into Beaver Har- bor, is wood, with cliffs of slate, and has on it a conical-shaped hill 107' feet high. i Harbor Rock, of bare slate, 12 feet high, lies on the eastern side of the channel into Beaver Harbor, and has shoal water extending 20(V' yards to the westward. Sandy Islet has a red clay bank, 12 feet high, at its south end ; be- tween ir. and Harbor rock the ground is broken and rooky. Rocky and Hardwood Islands lie ou each side of the entrance to- the Salmon River anchorage. The former has a rock, with only 6 feet water lying off its eastern end ; the latter is bold-to, and has red clay banks. Balcom Shoal, with 10 feet water, lies in the middle of the passage between Rocky and Hardwood Islands, and narrows the available chan- nel into Salmon River anchorage to less than 200 yards ; but to reach this anchorage local knowledge is necessary. Directions — In approaching Beaver Harbor from the southward by day, when about 5 or 6 miles from Beaver Island bring the lighthouse' to bear N. 50° W. and steer in N. 42° W., observing that in passing the end of Beaver and Horse Islands the dark- wooded Beaver Point is open to the eastward of Sutherland Island. After passing 200 yards to the eastward of Sutherland Island and Beaver Point, keep the light- house in sight astern, open eastward of Sutherland Island ; on this line, with the cross mark of Quoddy Hill in line with the south end of Hard- wood Island, fair anchorage can be obtained in 7 fathoms, muddy bot- tom. Anchorage. — If, however, better shelter be desired, a pilot should be procured, and the vessel run into Salmon River anchorage or Mac- leod Cove. Into the latter a depth of 21 feet may be carried, and a laud- locked berth obtained in the same depth over muddy bottom. iDce, withiui Harbor re- iver. Fire- lly obtained' jg occasion- iaver Island' nth ward, by ; of Beaver the channel gs, and with lom patches Beaver Har- iped hill 107 stern side of [tending 200- ith end ; be- entrance to- ll only 6 feet has red clay the passage lilable chau- but to reach juthward by e lighthouse' I passing the ver Point is g 20() yards )ep the light- on this line, md of Hard- , muddy bot- pilot should page or Mac- 1, and a land- )m. ,— »MgBtai^'j>'aiab^3' ..'Ji Jr t.-i' f^f>ti,-^'i> ■t BEAVER HARBOR NICOMTAU BAY. 13T ITewtonquoddy, an inlet to the eastward of Beaver Harbor, will admit schooners of small tonnage ; but is not much frequented, evci> by small vessels, on account of the numerous rocky islets and shoals overlying its entrance. DirectionB. — The anchorages underBrokeuback Island and in Nicom- tau Bay are not recommended, but they may prove useful in cases of emergency. Approaching the anchorage under Brokenback Island from the eastward or westward, do not pass to the northward of the line between the Bassoon Reefs and White Islands, until Baptlste Island (of red clay banks, 70 feet high, and partly wooded) is seen east of Brokenback Island. When the highest part of Baptiste Is'.aiid is lit line with the east end of Brokenback Island, bearing N. 56° W. (which mark leads to the eastward of the Snapper Shoal), steer on that line of bearing, and giving Brokenback Island a berth of less than 200 yards, anchor in 10 fathoms, sand, with the Bird Islands open west of Broken- back Island, and the northern Halibut Island just open south of Gold Island. To enter Nicomtau Bay, steer in with Harbor Rock (of slate, 30 feet high, and nearly bare of trees) in line with the high land on the eastern side oCMoser River bearing N. 15° W. In passing to the westward of the Halibut Islands be careful that the west end of Hartlin Island is well open of Goose Island, in order to clear Salamander Rock, with only a foot on it. After clearing Salamander Rock, steer so as to pass 200 yards eastward of Harbor Rock, and westward of the Bull Rock, which uncovers at low water, and anchor in about 6 fathoms, mud, northward of Hartlin Island. In clear weather Pumpkin Island may be seen distinctly when off White Islands; and by keeping ic just open north of Bea er Island lighthouse, bearing S. 79° W., it will lead to the southward of all these shoals. If not made out. White Islands should not be approached nearer than 2 miles. Nicomtau Bay, the outlet of Moser River, a small stream admitting- schooners of light draft, is the abode of a few families who cultivate small farms, and during the summer months frequent the Halibut and White Islands for the purpose of fishing. Halibut Islands are a. cluster of islands a mile in extent and 35 feet high, lying to the northwest of White Islands. Bassoon Reefs, an extensive cluster of shoals, lying 2J miles to- the SW. of Halibut Islands, are composed of large rounded stones, and are partially uncovered at low water. They generally break heavily; but as at high water, springs, with the wind off shore, their position is not easily recognized, it will be well to take care that Pump- kin Island does not show open northward of Brother Islands. This mark will lead ^ mile southward of the reefs. Bird Islands, low and without trees, lie 2 miles to the NW. of the Bassoon Reefs. '■ im M-''" 138 NOVA SCOTIA — S. E. COAST. Bowen Ledge U a bare flat slaty rook 8 feet high, lyiug ^ mile from the low west point of Oamp Island. Horse Shoe Shoal, with 3 fathoms water on it, lies south nearly 1^ miles from the center of the larger White Island. The west end of Halibut Islands kept open west of Bowen Ledge, leads SW. of it. David Shoal, with 4 fathoms on it, lies N. 22° W. ^ mile from the Horse Shoe Shoal. Lockwood Rock, with 3 fathoms on it, lies with the highest part of Tuffin Island seen over the east point of White Island, bearing N. 55° W., and is distant rather more than 2 miles from the latter. The whole of TutUn Island open east of White Island will lead eastward ; and the «ast ends of TutBu and White Islands in line will lead westw ard of the rock. White Islands, which derive their name from cliffs of slate of highly inclined strata, showing white to seaward, are wooded, and attain an elevation of 80 feet at their eastern extreme. They are the outermost ot a group of isl^ids and rocks, lying off the point separating Nicumci- gum Inlet from Nicomtau Bay. Nicumcigvun Inlet is the abode of a few families who earn a liveli- hood by net and line lishing off the White Islands and the cultivation of small farms. Bay of Islands is the name commonly given to the coast between Mary Joseph and Beaver Harbors. The islands oft" this part of the coast are very numerous, and the channels between them aie so nar- row, intricate, and beset with rocks that, although there is sufficient 4epth to admit schooners drawing 12 feet water, they are not easily de- scribed, and their safe navigation requires an intimate local knowledge, 48uch as conld never be acquired from the best chart. Ooasters use them occasionally to avoid the heavy swell in the offing. A few know the channel sufficiently well to run inside the islands the whole distance between Liscomb and Sheet Harbors, whilst others are content to venture within a few of the most otf'-lying of the numerous islands with which this [tart of the coast is studded. Mary-Joseph Harbor, secUre and well sheltered, has the advantage of entrances east and west ; but the channels are narrow and should not be attempted without a pilot by any vessel drav. ing more than 9 feet. The inhabitants, scattered along the shores, principally rely on fishing tor subsistence, but cultivate the drift hills and keep cattle. A church stands on high ground in Smith Cove, east of the harbor, and may be seen from the sea. As any attempt to convey an intelligible description of the numerous off-lying dangers would prove useless, the navigator is referred to the -charts of the harbor and adjacent coasts. Supplies. — Water may be obtained in Lobster Oove in small quanti- ties, and fresh provisions and fuel can be bought at reasonable prices from the inhabitants. MARY-JOSEPH HARBOR. 139 l^iug ^ mile th uearly 1^ tvest eud of of it. ile from the best part of iring N. 55° The whole rd; and the vard of the .te of highly id attaiu an ) outermost ng Nicumci- »rn a liveli- caltivation bst between part of the aie 80 nar- is sufficient at easily de- knowledge, loasters use A. few know ole distance content to slands with ei advantage and should lore than 9 ally rely on [) cattle. A larbor, and e numerous rred to the mall quanti- lable prices Smith Rock, of small extent, with 12 feet water, lies 1,200 yards to the southwanl from the Gull Ledge. West Black Ledge, in line with the south eud of Tnffln Island, leads south of it. Qull Ledge, south 1^ miles from the south part of Barren Island, is composed of two bare ridges of slate of 30 feet high, and separated only by a narrow gully just wide enough to afford shelter to a boat* West Kock, with only 2 feet on it, makes the passage north of the ledge dangerous. Seal Ledge ext*"^ " 1^ miles from the SE. point of Barren Island. Between this ig*. ' Black Prince Shoa .; '"e channel, nearly a mile wide, leading int*. lary-Joseph Harbor, oat which on account of the dangerous shoals on its eastern side should not be attempted with- out a pilot, unless the wind be fair and the weather clear. The mark for leading to the eastward of Seal Ledge is Gravel Point, the north extreme of Liscomb Island, open of Liscomb Point, bearing N. 8° E. Thrumcap Islet, not more than 15 feet high, and distinguished by a small clump of trees, lies at the eastern entrance of Mary-Joseph Har- bor. There are some patches of shoal water eastward of the islet, and on its western side is a dry rocky ledge, between which and Smith Point is a channel 200 yards wide, but not much used or generally known. The more direct channel is south of Thrumcap Islet, and this is nar- rowed to 200 yards at the distance of ^ mile to the eastward of (he islet by a rovjk with only 10 feet water, on the north eud of Pan Shoal ; Turner Point on Hawbolt Island, in line with Smith Point, bearing N. 88° W., leads north of this rock. Directions for Eastern Entrance. — Being off Gull Ledge, with a leading wind, bring the Gravel Point of Liscomb Island open of Lis- comb Point, bearing K 6° E.. the mark for leading to the eastward of the Seal Ledge, and run in on this course until the high barn on Haw- bolt Island shows north of Barren Island; then steer for the church steeple bearing N. 67° W., and immediately Turner Point (on Hawbolt Island) apparently touches Smitli Point, alter course to west. By carefully keeping the latter marks on, proceed until False Pas- sage opens to the SW. ; then keep nearly a S. 79° W. course, so as to pass 200 yards from Thrumcap Islet and Smith Point ; thence west along the north side of the channel so as to avoid Turner Shoal, with 9 feet water. The Middle Ground, a muddy flat with eel grass, is cleared by keeping Thrumcap Islet just in sight over Smith Point. Good and convenient anchorage can be obtained in 7 fathoms, mud, abont half way between Lobster and Turner Points. Liscomb Island, 2 miles long and 150 feet high, is wooded, and from its position tends to shelter Liscomb and Little Liscomb Harbors. Crook Shoals. — From Crook Point, the east extreme of the islands, the Crook Shoals extend nearly a mile in an easterly direction. Wedge Island apparently touching Wine Head, bearing N. 31° E., leads about ^ mile S£. of the shoals. -^m 140 NOVA SCOTIA — 8. E. COAST. Mackerel Shoal, with only 2 feet water, extends nearly 400 yards from Cranberry Point, tiie west extreme of Liscomb Island. Channel Rock, lying SE. 2^ miles from Crook Point, has 3 fathoms water on it, and breaks when there is much swell. Smoke and Cran- berry Points, apparently touching, bearing; N. 70° W., leads westward of it. Liscomb Harbor. — The entrance to this harbor, which is landlocked and tolerably smooth at all times, is between Liscomb Island and Lis- comb Point. At the distance of 2 miles the channel is considerably narrowed by rocky shoals, which extend from the northern shore, after which it maintains a breadth of 200 yards up to its head, where it re- ceives the waters of Liscomb River, a rapid shallow stream abounding' in trout and salmon. On the north side of the harbor is a large cove, named Spanish Ship Bay, but it is too much encumbered with rocks to render a description intelligible. Supplies. — Good water can be obtained from a little brouk on the south shore of Liscomb Harbor, and small supplies of fresh provisions and firewood may be purchased at moderate prices. The population is scattered along the shores of Liscomb, Little Lis- comb, and Jegogan Harbors ; the people are industrious and intelligent. The church with a steeple in Liscomb Harbor forms a prominent object from the sea, and a useful landmark. Dangers off the Entrance. — Although the rocky patches off the entrance of Liscomb Harbor are numerous, the danger from them ia considerably diminished by the fact that they all lie nearly in the same direction, viz, south from Liscomb Point. Hawbolt Rock, the most outlying danger, has 4.^ fathoms water and lies S. 19° K. nearly 4 miles from Liscomb Point. It seldom breaks, but a vessel will pass to the southward of it, by keeping Gull Ledge only touching the SW. side of Tuifin Island. Sand Shoal, composed of rock and sand, with 9 feet water on it, lies S. 17° B. 3 miles from Liscomb Point. Gull Ledge apparently touching the north side of Little White Island, which has a wooded hummock 50 feet high, bearing S. 73° W., leads southward of this danger, and be- tween it and Hawbolt Rock. Black Prince Shoal, which uncovers at half tide, and generally breaks heavily, lies one mile within the Sand Shoal. NE. Breaker and Lump Rock lie to the northward of Black Prince Shoal ; the former has 4 feet and the latter 11 feet water on it. Liscomb Shoal extends eastward ^ mile from Liscomb Point, and tht* least water on it is 16 feet. The church steeple, bearing N. 33° W., will clear this danger. Leading Mark. — The lighthouse on Liscomb Island, bearing X. 22<^ W., leads eastward of all these outlying shoals. Saddle Rock, on the east side of the channel leading to Liscomb Harbor, with five fathoms water, bears S. 25° B., from Crook Point, dis- 400 yards s 3 fathoms I and Cran- i westward landlocked lid and Lis- )H8itlerably ihore, after vhere it re- abounding' large cove, th rocks to ouk on the 1 provisions , Little Lis- intelligeut. aent object hes off the )ui them is in the same oms water om breaks, Urull Ledge )r on it, lies ly touching luminock 50 fer, and be- l generally lack Prince 1 it. Point, and N. 33° W., ring N. 22^ to Liscorab : Point, (lis- LI8C0MB AND JEGOOAN HARBORS. 141 taut 23 miles. Gull Ledge apparently touching the north side of Little White islaiid leads southward ; and the church steeple in Lissom b Har- bor seen just west of Crauoerry Point, leads westward of Saddle Kock. Tides.— The streams are weakaud irregular, being much affected bv the winds. ^ l»rectiOAs.— Approaching the harbor from tlie westward, and being outside Uuwbolt Kock, bring the lighthouse on Cranberry Island to bear N. 2-'^ VV. and stand iu until the church bears N. 31° VV., steer for it until past Smoke Point, thou alter course to the westward' so as to pass midway between Pye Point and the southern shore and anchor in 4J fathoms, mud, with the east ends of Lang and Pye Islands iu line. From the eastward, bring Smoke and Pye Points iu line, bearing N 560 W.; run in upon this mark till abreast ALickerel Shoal, then steer N. 340 W. for the church until past Smoke Point, when alter course and anchor as before directed. Little Liscomb Harbor.— A narrow shallow passage separates Liscomb and Hem loe Islands; the small channel between the latter island ami the maiulaud being known as Little Liscomb Harbor the entrance to which lies NE. of Liscomb Island, and has fair anchorage but is only adapted for small vessels. It may be catered safely by Wringing Redman Head apparently touching the NE. side of Hemloe Island. Jegogan Harbor.— This deep inlet is not much frequented and has but few settlers. Vessels drawing 12 feet water may anchor near its iiead, secure from all winds ; but the narrow chauuel leading to it, on the NE. side of Kao Island, is only 100 yards wide and should' not be attempted without a pilot. Tobacc 9 Island, low and wooded, lies at the entrance of Jegogan Harbor. A vessel will pass southward of the Tobacco Ledges, extend- ing one mile from the south point of this island by not opening Pye Point north of Liscorab Island Bank, bearing N. 84° W. Shag Ledge is distinguished by a low dark rock, only 5 feet above high water, which lies east distant 1,200 yards from Redman Head, a steep wooded bluff 100 feet high, forming the western point of the harbor. There are several dangers off its west side, leaving a channel only 400 yards wide near Redman Head. Directions— A vessel intending to enter Jegogan Harbor by the middle passage, between Tobacco Island and Saag Ledge, should bring the NE. side of Hemloe Island apparently touching Redman Head, bearing N 5(P W., and steer in with this mark until Shag Ledge is in line with Brig Point (low and wooded, on the west side of Jegogan Harbor), bearing N. 34o W., then steer N. 22o W. so as to pass 200 yards eastward of Shag Ledge and continue on the same course to the an- ward of Pollux Kock, bearing N. 57'^ E., leads southward of Fleck Shoal. The |)assage between Pollux Kock and the nearest Castor shoal is more than a mile wide. Harbor Island, apparently touching Cape Mocodome, N. 28° E., leads through it ; but the NW. extremity of the island can not always be distinguished trom the land behind. Port Bickerton is a safe and convenient little harbor for' small ves- sels. It has a clear entrance, carrying 6 fathoms water, between Bick- erton Island and Barachois Head, but it is less than 400 yards wide. Barachois Head, on the eastern side of the entrance, may be known by its white clift', from which, as also from the island, a reef extends 4U0 feet to the SE. Directiona. — ^To enter Port Bickerton with a leading wind, being ^ mile or more from the entrance, open Bound Island (small, with red clay bank \ and one mile within the harbor), only so far as to appar- ently touch the NE. side of Bickerton Island, bearing N. r)6° W. steer in with these marks in line until abreast the SE. point of the island; then having passed in mid-channel through the entrance, avoid the shoal in the middle of the harbor by keeping close along the eastern shore until abreast Bound Island, where a vessel may anchor, within the shoal, iu 13 or 14 feet water over a bottom of mad. If preferable, on entering steer to the westward round Bickerton Is- land at a distance of 300 yards, so as to pass between it and the shoal into the western part of the harbor, where the anchorage, in 12 feet over mud bottom, is sheltered by the reefs which leave only a shallow boat channel between the island and the main land to the westward. Fiaherman Harbor is quite open to the SE., so that the only part that can be termed a harbor is a cove on its southern shore, formed by a long beach of shingle, and in which vessels may lie securely iu 10 to 15 feet at low water, over a bottom of mud. Outside the cove the holding ground is good in 4 to 7 fathoms, and as the sea is in some degree broken by the dangers oft' the mouth of the bay, large vessels with good ground tackle might safely anchor there daring the summer months. Directiona. — To enter Fisherman Harbor from the southward witU a fair wind, and being within Pollux Bock, observe that the marks which just clear the rocks oft' Cape Mocodome are Holly Point (on the wester.i side of the entrance of Isaac Harbor), in line with Country Harbo.' Head, bearing N. 5° W. ; keep Holly Point only a degree or two open until past Rose Shoal, when the point may be opened more, iu order to give tite rocks off the cape a wider berth. ) high water, ^ miles; ami ftter on them, tthoins, bears a open sonth- 'ard of Fleck istor shoal is uching Cape remlty of the ind. for' small ves- [)etvreen Bick- yards wide. be known by ' extends 4U0 wind, being ^ iiall, with red as to appar> r)6o W. steer of the island ; ice, avoid the g the eastern pnchor, withm Bickerton Is- and the shoal ge, in 12 feet )nly a shallow e westward, the only part )re, formed by jurely in 10 to the cove the n some degree sels with good ner months, thward witU a 9 marks which m the wester 1 mntry Harbo.' e or two open tre, in order to COUNTRV HARBOR. 146 As soon as Dorkin Island, at the head of the harbor, opens out to the r iZn «r u ''''°'^'* ^'^^ ***^ '^« ««^« «» ^''« ^^''thern shore, bear- ing N. 620 W., the vessel may steer to the westward into the bay, wh«re the only danger is a rooky shoal, extending i mile from the high clay clift next eastward of the cove jnst montioned. Proceeding for the harbor from the eastward between Rose Shoal and Black Ledge the marks are Dorkin Island :ind the shingle beach of the cove (already mentioned) bearing N. 62° W. Country Harbor is nnequaled by any other on the coast east of Halifax. It may be easily recognized by the three islands, Harbor. Goose and Green, on the eastern side of the channel leading to it and Isaac Harbor, as well as by Country Harbor H ad, a bold and rvecini. tous headland of clay-slate, in nearly vertical .trata, 100 fept high, ami which may be considered as the termination of its western shore The entrance is abreast Harbor Point, 3 miles farther to the non'awestward where the channel is 600 yards wide, with a dep;h of 11 . tho.ns From thence the harbor, with a varying depth from 10 to 6* t tl «ih IS easily navigable as far as Stewart Cove on the eastern si, >'r oil which IS an excellent land-locked anchorage, with 4J to 7 fatho.ns, mud 4 miles from the entrance. Throughout this distance t .^ ;.nly danger to be avoided is a rock, with 3 feet of water, about 100 yar*;^, off shore near the southern point of Mount Misery Peninsula From Stewart Cove the channel becomes narrow, but continues navi- gable for large ve&sels 2^ miles above it and for small vessels to the entrance of the river at the head of the harbor, which is distant 7+ miles from its entrance at Harbor Point. Boats can as. on.l the river '' miles, or to J mile above the bridge, where the tide ends. The shores of this harbor are steep-to on either side, the summits of the ridges being generally only a short distance from the shore, and increasing in elevation from 200 feet at the entrance to 470 feet near Its head. The population scattered along the thore are piincipallv occupied m lumbering and the fisheries. Oreen Point, on the western shore, at ? ..-iia within the entrance, is composed ot shingle, inclosing a large pond, and f mile farther in, on the same side, is Mount Misery, a round peninsulated hill 140 feet in height, and which forms the principa! leading mark for clearing the dangers lying off the entrance to the harbor. oniJ***?*.^!'^®' ®- ^1° *^' 3S "i'es from Cape Mocodome, is a rock about 200 yards m length, which covers at half tide. It is the apex of a rocky shoal about 800 yards loag, around which the soundings are too daep and irregular to afford much warning by the lead. When the sea breaks on this shoal, as it invariably does-excepting with a high tide accom- panied by unusually smooth water-there is no difficulty in passing on either side of the ledge. The nearest danger to the westward being laylor Shoal, which bears from it S. 80o VV. nearly 2 miles, it is onlv 5314- 10 146 NOVA SCOTIA — 8. E. COAST. necessary when passing on that side to give the rock or breakers a berth of i mile. Pollux Rock, small, and 4 feet high, lies south 2i miles from Cape Mocodome, and Irom it a reef extends 800 yards to the NW. To pass clear to the westward of it, Country Harbor Head must not be opened out farther than to be only just seen in line with the bank or cliff off Cape Mocodome, and over the shingle beaches which form its SB. extremity. Singly Shoal, with 2i fathoms water on it, lies N. 68° E. J mile east- ward of Pollux Rock. Taylor Shoal has 3 fathoms on it, and lies % mile further to the southward ; the two points on the eastern side of Goose Island, in line bearing N. 30° E., lead to the eastward of this shoal, but those points are low, and can seldom be distinguisJied. These two shoals are all the more dangerous, inasmuch as they break only dnriug a heavy sea. Rose Shoal is a rocky ledge § mile long on which the least water is 6 feet I it lies immediately off the pitch of Cape Mocodome, from which its outer or southern extremity bears S. 51° E., distant 1^ miles. The mark for leading to the southward of Rose Shoal is Fleck Point, on the northern side of Hollins Bay, just open of Bickerton Island, bear- ing N. 79° W. ; and for leading to the northward, Barachois Head and Cape Rock in line, bearing west. Bull Rock is small, dries at low water, and bears 8. 68° B. 700 yards from Cape Mocodome, off which there are other rocks with 6 feet water, the outermost distant ^ mile from the cape. These all lie on the rocky shoal which extends % mile out from the cape, and are ex- ceedingly dangerous at high water and with a smooth sea, when they are not marUed by breakers. Shoal Place, the most off-lying of the easternmost Country Harbor ledges, bears from Green Island S. 25° B. 2J miles. It is small and rocky, with 5 fathoms water, and breaks only when a heavy sea is running. Tomcod Rock covers at high water, and lies IJ miles south of Green Island. When breaking, as it usually does, this danger serves to warn vessels of their approach tv the Tomcod Shoals, which are small rocky patches scattered around the rock in various directions. Tomcod Shoals.— The northernmost of these patches, named Gull Nest, with 3 fathoms water, bears from Tomcod Rock N. 8° W., dis- tant 800 yards, and from Green Island S. 5° W. 3 mile, with a clear passage between. But the westernmost patches, with 2^, 3^, and 4 fathoms water, are most in the way of vessels bound to or from Country Harbor. The marks that lead close to the westward of them are Har- bor Island, open westward of the low, dry reef off Flying Point (the south extremity of Goose Island) bearing N. 28° W.; or the summit of Mount Misery in line with Harbor Point, bearing N. 47o W. Black Ledge, more than a mile in length in a north and south di- ifc COUNTRY HARriOR — SHOALS. 147 ikers n berth )8 from Cape V. To pass jt be opeued ik or cliff off brm its SE. . ^ mile east- it, aud lies % item side of ward of this istingnislietl. s they break east water is , from which miles. The ck Point, on Island, bear- )i8 Head aud 5. 68° E. 700 rs with 6 feet )se all lie on , and are ex- », when they in try Harbor is small and heavy sea is mth of Green erves to warn e small rocky t, named Gull f. 80W., dis- , with a clear 2i, 34, and 4 from Country tiem are Har- ug Point (the the summit of W. and south di- rection, lies directly off the month of Fisherman Harbor. The central part of it is 2 feet above high water, and in several other parts it dries, or nearly so at low water. Prom its southern extremity, which is steep to with only 2 feet water, Oapj Mocodome (in line with HolJins Head) bears 8. 73o W., and is distant rather more than Due mile. The head kept open leads southward, and the summit of Mount Misery open of Country Harbor Sead bearing N. 41o w. leads eastward of Black Ledge. The Marks to clear Middle Ledge to the eastward at the distance of 800 yards are the western points of Goose Island in line, bearing north ; and these marks lead also over Jarvis Bank, a fishing ground lying a mile further out to the SE., and on which the least water found was 14 fathoms. The marks for passing to the southward or outside of Middle Ledge are Castor and Pollux Rocks in line bearing N. 79o W., or Pollux Rock and Hollins Head in line N. 760 W.; these marks also lead close inside or northward of Taylor Shoal. Green, Goose, and Harbor Islands are formed of drift bowlder clay, resting on highly inclined clayslate rock, and are wooded with small spruce trees. They are low, the highest hill on Goose Island, the middle and the largest of the three, not exceeding 80 feet above the sea. The nnujerous off lying dangers in this locality forbid the coast being ai)proache«l, during dark nights or fogs, nearer than the depth of 30 fathoms, and the constant use of the lead should be doen.ed indispen- sable, for by it alone can the position of the ship be ascertained. White Rock, with 10 feet water, lies N. 67° E., one mile from Green Island; J mile further off on the same bearing there is a rock, with 4i fathoms water. There are other patches nearer the island, the south- ernmost of which, with about 2 fathoms water, bears from its south ex- treme N. 72° E. ^ mile. Ragged Ledge extends nearly IJ miles from the east end of Goose Island in an easterly direction, and from its outer extremity— which is seldom entirely covered— the whole of the reef is partially dry at low tides. There is no passage for vessels between this ledge and Green Island, or between Goose and Green Islands, the whole space being studded with rocky patches having 10, 12, and 18 feet water on them and which break heavily in bad weather. ' Dutch Shoal, is separated from the shallow water extending froiu the shore of Goose Island by a very narrow channel; aud its northern edge is just cleared when BurUe and Beach Points (on Harbor and Goose Islands respectively) are in line, bearing west, bearing in mind that the point of the northern beach of Harbor Island must at the same time be well in sight to the northward of them both. Split Rock, small, and awash at low-water springs, lies near the southern end of a long rocky shoal, which, includes two detached patches of 3J and 5 fathoms water. 118 NOVA SCOTIA — 8. E. COAST. ft !:4 VV^ m Mil From Split Bock, which is dangerous at high water and with a smooth sea, Darby Point, on the main land near Island Harbor, appears just open northward of Beach Point (the north end of Goose Island), bear- ing N. 73° W. ; the south extremity of Green Island bears S. 59° W. 2i miles ; the part of Brandy Ledge that dries N. 83° B. IJ^ miles ; and the eastern side of New Harbor Head, N. 33° B. 2 miles. Brandy Ledge, the easternmost of the dangers oflf Green Island, is a rocky shoal if mile in length, parallel to the coast, and J mile broad. Near the center of the ledge is a spot which only covers at high water, and from it New Harbor Head bears N. 12° W. 1§ miles, the channel between being clear. Tides. — The streams are weak, seldom exceeding half a knot. Directions.— Having passed Middle Ledge, either by giving its break- ers a sufficient berth, or by the aid of the given leading marks, open the summit of Mount Misery only just to the eastward of Country Har- bor Head, bearing N. 41° W., and steer in with these marks on until about midway between Eose Sboal and the south point of Goose Island, or until the latter is abeam ; then alter course to N. 23° W., and when the summit of Mount Misery is in line with Harbor Point steer N. 47° W., or so as to keep the last-named marks on, until near the mouth of the harbor, which enter in mid channel. Anchor anywhere within it, as there are no detached dangers in the way, excepting the rock already mentioned, lying 100 yards ott' the southeastern point of Mount Misery Peninsula. If intending to proceed to Stewart Cove, keep well over towards the western shore, to avoid the mussel beds that lie oflf the islet and the points of small coves on the eastern shore. Island Harbor lies between Harbor Island and the main shore, in a bay between two long shingle points on the north side of Harbor Island. Directly abreast and J mile distant is Drumhead, a small island, close to the mainland and connected with it at low water, and next eastward from it is Darby Point, both of which are used as lead- ing marks. Pilots. — During the fishing season several families reside on Harbor Island, as well as on the opposite mainland, from whence pilots may be obtained; but they are not much in the habit of conducting vessels drawing more than 10 or 12 feet water. Tides. — The flood stream runs from the eastward and its rate is usu- ally less than one knot, but it is much influenced by the winds. Directions : from the Eastward.— Coasting vessels usually take the inner route, especially late in the autumn when northerly winds prevail, passing between Brandy Ledge and New Harbor Head, and through the Sound, as the passage between Goose Island and the main- land is termed. Having passed New Harbor Head at the distance of ^ mile, observe that the marks for clearing the shoals off Coddle Har- bor, Coddle 'sland, and Seal Cove, are Darby Point and Drumhead in line, bearin west; therefore keep Drum Head only just open until ISAAC HARBOR. 149 bh a smooth spears just and), bear- } S. 59° W. miles ; and in Island, is mile broad, tiigh water, he channel :not. ig it« break- narks, open )untry Har- [■ks on until oose Island, ., and when steer N. 47° the mouth here within ng the rock nt of Mount e, keep well that lie oflF lin shore, in B of Harbor ad, a small r water, and ised us lead- e on Harbor (ilots may be iting vessels s rate is usu- inds. usually take therly winds r Head, and ud the main- 5 distance of Uoddle Har- Jrumhead in it open until abreast Beach Point (Goose Island); then bring Burke Point to bear 8. 78° W., and bearing in mind the mark for clearing Burke Shoal, steer so as to pass the point, and anchor in 7 fathoms, mud, just out- side the line .joining the two shingle points of the harbor. It is advis- able to moor in this narrow channel with one anchor well into the bay to the southward. A vessel wiU pass north of the dangers southward of this route by keeping both the shingle points of Harbor Island open northward of Beach Point, bearing west until the vessel is as far west as Coddle Island ; then the course must be more to the north -^ard to clear the shoal off Goose Island, which contracts the channel uetween it and Graham Shoal, off Seal Cove, to the breadth of 400 yards. From the Southward, having a southerly or easterly wind, enter the channel between Harbor and Goose Islands, steering north, and border- ing on the Goose Island side of a mid-channel course, in order to avoid the reef off Saliidin Point and the Middle Ground. Having passed be- tween the latter and the reef always visible off Goose Island, alter course to X. 23° W., until Bed and Drum Heads are in line, then steer K t)3o W., keeping them in one to clear Burke Shoal ; and when Burke Point, which is bold to the northward, bears S. 78° W., steer to the westward, and having passed the point, anchor as before directed. From the Westward, pass th« NW. point of Harbor Island at a distance of 500 yards, steering N. 33° E. until Drum Head and Darby Point are in line, bearing east; then keep to the eastward, and bring Burke Point in line with the remarkable hill on Goose Island, bear- ing S. 56° E., which leads to the anchorage. Isaac Harbor is separated from Country Harbor by Ragged Point, opposite which, on the eastern side of the entrance, is Red Head, a small peninsula with red clay cliffs, united to the mainland by shingle beaches, inclosing a shallow pond. Oft" the next little peninsula to the northward, Webb Reef extends westward across the entrance to the distance of 450 yards, leaving a passage with 7 fathoms water, but only 400 yards wide, between it and Ragged Rocks, which cover at high water, and extend 200 yards from the shore i mile within Bagged Point. Pilots.— These dangers, and some shallow water within the harbor off its western shore, render a pilot necessary to a stranger entering this harbor, in which vessels may anchor securely in 3^ to 4 fathoms, mud. Webb Cove, in which the fishing and coasting vessels usually anchor, in 2 fathoms, mud, is on the eastern side, and just within the entrance. From it the harbor runs in a northerly direction for a distance of 3 miles ; at its head is a rapid stream and saw mill. The shores on either side rise gradually to the summits of hills of drift clay and bowlders, from 200 to 300 feet high, and are cultivated to some extent by an indus- trious community, whose principal occupations appear to be coasting and the fisheries. BE" 150 NOVA SCOTIA — 8. E. COAST. Supplies. — Fresh provisions in moderate quantity, and water, may be readily obtained '.n Isaac Harbor. Seal Cove, a small indentation immediately opposite Ooose Island, dries at low water, with tbe exception of a narrow channel only avail- able for boats. Coddle Harbor, situated within the island of the same name, \w%- sesses secure anchorage for small vessels, in 12 to 14 feet water. The principal entrance is from the eastward, but as the dangers are too numerous for any written directions to avail, the place should on no ac- count be attempted by a stranger. New Harbor Cove is merely a shallow bay open to the SE., and affording no safe anchorage. At the head of the cove is the entrance of St. Catherine Biver, only one foot deep at low water, and dangerous to*boats when there is any sea running. For the first 5 miles the river flows through a narrow inlet, which boats can ascend to its head ; the stream then becomes rapid and unnavigable for 4 miles farther, to the large lake from whence it flows. Little Harbor, a small shallow ind entation in the coast next west of Berry Head, is only adaped to admit boats at high water. Haifa mile from its entrance, in a iSE. direction, is Net Kock, with about 3 fathoms ^ater, and south 2^ miles distant is a patch — with 6 fathoms water — known as Tufflu Bank, on which the sea is said to break occasionally after very heavy gales. Torbay is nearly 9 miles long east and west, and 4 miles deep. On its northern shore. Molasses, Gole, and Oharlo Harbors afford secure anchorage for sn)all vessels in 2 to 3 fathoms water, but the approach to them all is more or less difficult and would require local knowledge. On the shores of Molasses Harbor is a settlement of Acadians, and on an elevation IIU feet above the sea, on the western side of the entrance, stands their chapel, a large wooden building without a steeple. There are settlements also at Gole and Gharlo Harbors, as well as ou the banks of Larry River at the west end of the bay ; and there are chapels on the eastern side of the two last-named places, but they are small wooden buildings undistinguishable from others in the vicinity. The Entrance into Torbay is between Berry Head and the small group of Sugar Islands, of clay slate not exceeding 30 feet in height, which stretch across the eastern part of the bay ; where there is a clear chan- nel ^ mile wide, with 8 to 12 fathoms water. The anchorage within this entrance, off Webber Gove, near the western end of the bay, is easy of access and secure, in 6 fathoms, sand and mud ; the only danger in the way being Webber Shoal, with 12 feet water, which lies off the north side of the peninsula, of which Berry Head is the eastern extremity. Berry Head is a lo\? rocky point at the eastern extremity of a '.euinsula, nowhere exceeding 80 feet in height, and which is united to the mainland by a beach and range of sand-hills. Shallow water ex- teijds off this peninsula ^ mile to the southward, and off Berry Head TORBAY — WHITEHAVEN. 151 nrater, may oae Island) ouly avail- uame, pos- :ater. The era are too id on no ac- le SE., and lie entrance [ daugeious es the river 3 head ; the ther, to the \e\t west of Haifa mile It 3 fathoms >m8 water — iccasionally s deep. On lord secure be approach knowledge. ian8, and on he entrance, jple. There )u the banks ) chapels on mall wooden ! small group eight, which I clear chan- e within this ly, is easy of anger in the )ff the north extremity, tremity of a is united to )w water ex- Berry Head there is a reef, as well as detached rocks, with varying depths on them, the outermost lying 800 yards eastward of the head. Shag Rock, 2 feet above ordinary high water, lies S. 55° \V., 2J miles from Berry Head. Shallow water extends 800 yards eastward of the rock, and between it and the shore there are several rocks which dry at half tide. Gull Rock, small and detached, with about 12 feet water, lies S. 30° W. nearly one mile from Berry Head, and east IJ miles from Shag Kock. The Shag in line with New Harbor Head, bearing S. 75° W,, lea-ls south- ward of Gull Rock and Tcrbay Ledges. Torbay LedgQS, lying on the eastern side of the entrance, are still more dangerous. French Bock, the farthest out, with only 10 feet water, lies with Topstone Ledge off the western extremity of the Sugar Islands, bearing N. 12° W. 1^ miles ; Berry Head, N. 85° VV. IJ miles ; and the Bull Kock, with 4 feet water, which usually breaks, N. 07° E. g mile. The other ledges lie between these and the islands, wi^h deei) water between them, but so scattered as to leave no safe passage. Hog Island apparently touching Leblanc Point, bearing N. 33° B., leads eastward of the Bull Rock ; and Cole Harbor head, open westward of Topstone Ledge, N. 5° B., leads westward of French Rock and the ledges next northward of it. but does not clear Brig Rock, the western- most of the ledges, with 9 feet water, and from which Topstone Ledge bears N. 10° E. 600 yards. The soundings are so irregular around these ledges, and the depth so great (15 fathoms close to them), that the lead scarcely affords any assistance. Directions. — With a fair wind intoTorbay, steer in with the western extreme of the islet, next east of Topstone Ledge, apparently touching Mars Head, and bearing N. 27° B., or with the eastern point at the en- trance of Cole Harbor open westward of Topstone Ledge, the apparent breadth of the latter, bearing N. 5° E., whichever course the wind may render preferable; and when Berry Head and the points westward of it are in line, bearing S. 01° W., alter course immediately to N. 46° VV., and so continue until the southern extremities of Topstone and Green ledges are in line, bearing N. 89° B.; then steer S. 89° VV., keeping those nmrks on astern, until Flat Point and Berry Head are in line, bearing S. 23° B., then steer S. 67° VV., to the anchorage, in 6 fathoms, mud, off VV' cbber (^ove, distant from J to J mile. Whitehaven is a secure harbor, with suflBcient space and depth of water for a fleet of large vessels ; but, like most of the indentations on this coast, the entrances, three in number, are so narrow and indirect, and the sunken rocks so numerous, that no large vessel could safely attempt them at night or in the dense fogs that so frequently prevail. On the western shore there are hills of the drift bowlder clay, afford- ing pasture for the catfle of the fishermen, who reside principally in Deliver and Marshall Coves, but whose houses will also be seen at \m 162 NOVA SCOTIA — S. E. COAST. «' 4 ik t ' I iutervals »ill tbe way to the head of the NW. arm, distant 7 miles from the entrance of tbe haven. White Head Islana, 120 feet high, about ^ mile long, north and south and \ mile broad, derives its name from tbe whitish granite rook of which it is composed, and forms a salient feature off the point of land east of Whitehaven, its* inner or northern end being about ^ mile from tbe main shore. The interior of tbe island is wooded with dwarf spruce trees. SW. Bull, with <> feet water, lies with the lighthouse bearing N. 22° E., distant 1,200 yards. Rocky ground, with 4 fathoms water, ex- tends from it 800 yards to tbe westward, and there are rocky patches with 5 fathoms between it and White Head Island. Dover Head, open to tbe southward of Millstone Island, bearing N. 56° E,, leads to the southward of both the SW. and East Bull Bocks. Black Ledge dries at low water. Its western eztremity, from which tbe lighthouse bears N. 75° B. rather more than one mile, is cleared by keeping Doliver and Fisherman Islands apparently touching, and bear- ing N. 9° W., whilst Bald Rock and Flyinsr Poir^ in line, bearing N. 48° W., will l.-ad SW. of it, and SW. Bull Rock. Shag and Rocky Ledges are nearer tbe lighthouse, and above water; Gammon Islets, small and of bare granite, will be seen to the northward of them. The southern passage into Whitehaven Harbor is to the eastward of all these, including the SW. Bull, and between them and White Head Island. East Bull, one of tbe outer dangers off tbe eastern entrance to "Wbitebaven, is a small detached rock, having only 6 feet water, and lies with tbe lighthouse bearing N. 68° W., distant 1,200 yards. Half way between it and Wbit« Head Island is Sculpin Rock, dry at low water; and midway between it and Millstone Island there is a rocky shoal carrying 3 fathoms water. The entrance to tbe eastern passage into Wbitebaven Harbor is between this shoal and Millstone Island. Three-Top Island may be easily recognized by the three remarkable hills, 50 or 60 feet high, from which its name is derived. The channels NW. of it, on either side of Doliver Island, are so narrow and full of rocks as to be only available for small vessels and boats. The ship channel eastward of it is 400 yards wide at entrance between Net Rock and Turtle Reef, which extends out from Spry Point. A short distance within tbe entrance, and nearly abreast the middle of Tree-top Island, there is a rock with 3^ fathoms water, which reduces the breadth of the channel between it and the island to 300 yards. Tbe marks that lead to tbe SW. of this rock are, tbe ends of Gammon Islets and White Head Island apparently very slightly overlapping, and bearing S. 43° E. ; these .marks also clear the shoals farther in oft' Doliver Island and Deming I'oint, on tbe western side of the harbor. Inner and Outer Gull Ledges and Bald Rock extend nearly a miles from north and ranite rook )int of land )f mile from vavt' sprnce bearing N. 3 water, ex- sky patches id, bearing i East Ball from which I cleared by i;, and bear- bearing N. and above seen to the n Harbor is [»d between entrance to ter, and lies Half way low water; rocky shoal lasaage into and. remarkable lie channels )w and full . The ship n Net Kock »rt distance -top Island, breadth of marks that and White iriiig S. 4SO Island and id nearly a WHITEHAVEN — DIRECTIONS. 158 mile to the southward from Deming Island, which, being united to the mainland at low water, forms the western point of entrance to White- haven. ''' lese ledges and rocks are all above water, but there are reefs between and around them ; that most in the way being a rock with 6 feet water on the east end of the shoal tongue extending from bald Rock, and lying S. 51° E. 300 yards from the Outer Gull Ledge ; Net Rock (joined by a reef to the SB. extremity of Three-top Island) and Spry Point, in line, bearing N. 4lo fi., leads clear to the SE. of it. The western passage into Whitehaven Harbor between the Six-foot Rock and Black Ledgeis J mile wide. There is little or no warning by the lead in approaching any of these dangers from seaward, the de|)th exceeding 20 fathoms a little more than 4 mile from them. Kelp Shoal, with only 3 feet water, lies directly in the way of vessels passing westward ot Fisherman Island. The marks for proceeding through the channel (only 100 yards wide) between Kelp Shoal and the island are the western extreinities of Pilot Point and of Yankee Islet, in line, bearing S. 29° E. There is also a passage westward of Kelp Shoal, between it and the shoal, which extends 300 yards off shore to the southward ot Marshall Cove; but the marks for running through it, namely, the western sides of Munroe Rock, Three-top Island, and Shag Ledgo in line, might not easily be distinguished by a stranger. Tides.— The rate of the tidal streams in the entrance seldom exceeds half a knot, unless it be the ebb stream, when accelerated by heavy rains or the melting of the snow in spring. Western Passage.— Proceeding into Whitehaven Harbor in a steam vessel, or with a fair wind, through the western passage and Ship Chan- nel, attention must be paid to the marks alieady given for clearing the rock off the Outer Gull Ledge on the one side, and Bull Rocks and Black Ledge on the other. It is seldom that the Black Ledge or the breakers on it can not he seen ; to run in nearly midway between it and the rock off the Outer Gull Ledge, bring Net Rock to bear N. 22° E., and steer so as to pass around to the eastward and northward of it at the distance of 200 yards. Open the lighthouse a little to the eastward of Gammon Islets, bear- ing S. 510 E., and steer in N. 61° W. until the north end of Three-top Island is nearly abeam. Then alter course to N. 23° W., taking care to keep White Heat! Island open eastward of the Gammon Islets, in order to clear the shoals oft' Doliver Island and Deming Point, on the western shore ; and the ligUthouse oi)en westward of Spry Point, to clear Yankee Island Reef, on the eastern shore. Anchorage.— Having passed this reef good anchorage may be ob- tained in 7 to 10 fathoms, mud, immediately within it, and also oft" the fish stages and houses on the western shore, although some swell sets in with the strong southerly winds. Small vessels anchor in Yankee Cove, into which 3J fathoms can be carried through a very narrow channel. The best passage for a hirge vessel proceeding tarther in, to torn 154 NOVA SCOTIA — 8. E. COAST. the more completely Hheltered parts of the harbor, is eastward of Fish- erman Island, where there is a clear channel, 200 yards wide, wit^h a depth of 8 fathoms. The Southern Passage into Whitehaven is only 200 yards wide. To pass eastward of the SW. Bull, steer between north and N. 13° W. for the western side of White Head Island, which should be i)a88ed at a distance not exceeding 200 yards ; open out Millstone Island until it is touching Dogfish Point, bearing S. 77° B. Keep those marks astern and pass southward of Turtle Eock and reef off Spry Point. When the lighthouse is seen just open eastward of Gammon Islets, bearing S. 51° E., steer N. 51° W., and proceed as before directed. Crane. Raspberry, and Wine Coves are small intricate indenta- tions between Port Howe and Whitehaven, abounding in sunken rocks and difficult of access. They are adapted for small craft and boats, but without good local knowledge of the neighborhood and its numer- ous dangers the approaches to these places are perilous in the extreme. Fort Hoixre, to the westward of Dover Island, is small and danger- ous to approach on account of numerous shoals. The entrance lies between Howe Point, to the eastward and Black Bock, 4 feet high, off" Fluid Point, on the western shore, the distance across being a good J mile, but the navigable channel is narrowed by shoal ground to little more than 300 yards. Wiihin the entrance the shores are mostly steep-to, and there is suffi- cient depth of water lor the largest vessels ; but in the parts not exposed to the southerly swell there is barely room for a vessel to swing at single anchor. Avery Shoal, with 3 fathoms water, lies a mile to the southward of Whale Island, with the lighthouse on White Head Island bearing S. 83° W. Dover Head, seen open southward of Snorting Bocks, bearing N. 46° E., leads southward of this shoal ; also of the Vache and Whalo Shoals, carrying 9 and 18 feet water, and lying ij JO yards and l:t miles, re8i)ectively, farther NE. Dover Shoals and Snorting Rocks. — Dover Shoals, with 4 fathoms on them, He on the eastern side of the entrance of the channel 8. 32° E., 1,100 yards from Snorting Rocks, which never cover. These latter are nearly joined at low water to the south extremity of Dover Island. Sunken rocks, with various depths on them, extend J mile from Snort- ing Rocks, and, together with similar rocks lying 400 yards off Howe Point, must be left to the eastward when proceeding into Port Howe. Directions. — Bring the Black Rock in line with the Sugar Loaf Hill, 180 feet high, about a mile inland from the entrance of Kyak Brook, at the head of the harbor, bearing N. 32=" W., and steer towards them until the south extremities of Whale and Millstone Islands are nearly in line, bearing S. 44° W. ; then alter course to pass 200 yards eastward of Black Rock. If proceeding to the anchorage at the mouth of the western arm, ard of Fish- wide, wifh « yards wide, d N. 130 W. be ])a8sed at land until it narks astern )int. When lets, bearing ate indenta- unkeu rocks ; and boats, d its nunier- the extreme, and danger- tutrance lies feet high, off ng a good i 11 ud to little there is suffl> I not exposed ring at single southward of d bearing 8. )cks, bearing e and Whale and l^ miles, ith 4 fathoms lanuel 8. 320 These latter )over Island. J from Snort- ds off Howe I Port Howe, ^ar Loaf Hill, ak Brook, at awards them is are nearly rds eastward ivestern arm, PORT HOWE DOVER BAY. 155 endeavor to preserve a mid-channel coarse between Port Island and the western shore, anchoring in abont 8 fathoms, mud, with the west end of Snorting Bocks just open of the po»nt west of Port Island, and borrowing on the southern shore in order to avoid the sunken rock off the point which divides the arms. If the anchorage witliin Port Island be preferred, pass around the NW. end of the islatid at 200 yards distance, to avoid th« reef off it, and anchor within il in 4i fat)ioms, mud. Dover Island forms a salient point of the coast between Dov«'r Bay and the indentation of Port Howe. It has an elevation of 1)5 feet, and is separated from the mainland by a narrow, but navigable, channel with 12 feet water, known as Dover Passage, which is frequented by fishermen and small coasting vessels; hut as in the narrowest part the passage is only 60 yards across, it is evidently not adai>ted for either large vessels or strangers. Dover Bay is 2J miles wide at the entrance, from Dover Head east- ward to White Point, and 4 miles deep to the northward ; but although 80 extensive, it affords no shelter, being filled towards its bead with islets and rocks above and under water, among which only small ves- sels and boats could pass. Louse Harbor on its western shore, one mile within Dover Head, has within it depth and space sufficient for large vessels ; but its entrance to the north of Louse Island, with 3J fathoms water, is only about 30 fathoms wide. Little Dover Run is a very uar. row channel between White Island, forming the eastern side of the bay, and the mainland, its narrowest part being only about 30 yards wide, with 3 fathoms w ter. It leads in among the islets at the head of the bay, and is frequented ir the season by fishing vessels. The dangers at the month of Dover Bay are, a rock with 3 feet water on it, from which Dover Head bears N. 5° E. ^ mile; Blackman Shoal, with 4 fathoms water, from which Dover Head bears N. S(P W. ^ mile ; Bay Shoal, with 5 fathoms water, lying nearly half-way be- tween Dover Head and White Point, and breaking only after heavy gales ; Home Shoal, with 3 fathoms water lying nearly midway between Louse Head and White Island; and Lumsden Shoal, with-' fathoms water, from which White Point bears S. 80° B., distant 1,300 yards. The White Point Ledges extend 1,100 yards to the southward of White Point ; and White Rock, with 5 fathoms water, which breaks after heavy gales, lies nearly ^ mile farther off, with the point bearing N. 350 W., distant one mile. Gannet Shoal, with 9 feet least water, situated N. 67° E., one mile from White Point, consists of several detached patches. There are other rocks to the northward of it off Madeline Point, and at the en- trance of Little Dover Run, for which the chart is necessary to insure the safe guidance of a vessel in such intricate places. Telegraph Cables.— Six submarine telegraph cables are landed at Dover Bay, four in the northern bay on the western side of White Is- ||||iKfe*^dttfc|HlM 166 NOVA SCOTIA S. E. COAST. land, anil two in the bay westward of Walsh Point. These cables are laid iu directions between SW. and 8E. from Dover Bay ; one to Cape Anil, one to New York, two to the Land's End, and two to Waterville, Ireland. Andrew Island, about l'^ miles long and 1^ miles broad, is sepa- rated from the iniii aland by a deep channel about ^ mile wide. The island is low, its grtniiest elevation, 35 feet, being at the south end. It is hIso boggy and barren, with stunted spruie over its surface. Andrew Passage, between Andrew Island and the mainland, and leading to Glasgow and Canso Harbors, is too intricate for a written descrii>tion to avail. It is frequented occasionally by fishing and small coast vessels, but even with the aid of a chart, local knowledge is indispensable for the safe guidance of even a small vessel. Q-annet Ledges. — The outermost of these ledges, with only 3 and 4 feet water, extend eastward nearly a mile from Ganuet Point, the south extremity of Andrew Island ; and foul ground, with depths of 6 and 9 fathoms extends a mile farther to the SE. The S W. extremity of Dover Island kept open southward of White Point, bearing S. 63° W., leads ^ mile southward of these ledges, and the dangerous Boom Kock. e cables are one to Cape Watervilie, >ad, i8 sepa- wide. The ith eud. It ace. riulnnd, aud )r a written ig aud small lowledge is >nly 3 and 4 it, the south i of 6 and 9 ity of Dover \° W., leads Kocti. CHAPTER VI. OHEDABUCTO BAY, LENNOX PASSAGE, OUT OP CAN80. From Cape Canso to Gnysborough, distance of lio miles in a westerly diiectiou, the south coast of Ohedabucto Bay is composed of primary rocks partially covered with drift sand, clay, and bowlders. This drift appears occasionally in high, red looking cliffs on the shore. When cleared of stones it furnishes a tolerably productive soil, but the climate is not favorable to agriculture, and the large fishing population obtain little beyond a few vegetables and food for tlieir cattle. Drift ice in the month of May, and in June the prevailing easterly winds, bringing fog from a cold sea, check vegetation until past midsummer and seldom allow of settled warm weather before July. Cape Canso is a rocky islet, 15 feet high, joined to the east point of Andrew Island at low water by a sandy neck about 200 yards in breadth. Cape Rock, small, and 8 feet high, will be seen off it 250 yards to the SE. At IJ miles to the NW. is Glasgow Head, a remark- able red clay cliff 50 feet high. An equal distance farther in the same direction, along an unbroken shore, is the town and harbor of Canso. Cranberry Island marks the east side of the entrance of the chan- nel into Canso Harbor. It is low, rocky, J mile long, and divided into several parts at high water. Frying Pan, Crow, and Petit-Pas Islets.— The Frying Pan, a low islet of shingle, 4 mile, N. 35° W. from the lighthouse on Cranberry Island ; and Grow Islet, a low rock covered with dark spruce bushes, not exceeding 20 feet in height and distant f mile farther in the same direction, will easily be distinguished. Still more remarkable is Petit- Pas, a small, round, grassy islet, 200 yards in diameter, with a red clay cliff' 50 feet high, and 1 j miles N. 66° W. from the lighthouse. Oliver Island is wooded and separated from the eaat eud of George Island by a narrow boat channel. Its eastern extremity, Lock Point, forms a leading mark and bears from Petit-Pas N. 26° E. ^ mile. arassy Island, i mile to the westward of Petit-Pas, is a hill of drift sand, clay, and bowlders, J mile long and 60 feet high. It is cov- ered with grass, and displays the only other clay cliff" besides that of Petit Pas on the east side of the channel to Canso Harbor. It is no longer insulated, being now united to George Island by a bar of shingle which is never covered. The remains of an extensive redoubt give the name of Port Point to the high western extremity of the steep grassy bank of this island, which, as it is used for a leading mark, must be care- 157 "a 158 CHEDABUCTO BAY SOUTH COa I fally (listinKuished from the edge of the shingle beach, extending from it 2*)0yiirdH to the NW., nud ulao used for a leading mark. There is a narrow cbauuel for boatn between the Grassy Island beach and Piscat- i(|ui iHliind. Canso Harbor is formed by Pisoatiqui and George Islands on the east, and by the mainland and Durell Island on the west. Cutler Island, together with the shallow water between it and Durell Island, shelter it from the north, while Grave Island and the bar uniting it to Lauigun Beach protect it from the SB. Grave Island is very small, witli steep clay banlcs fast wasting away by the action of the sea (1860.) Tlie entrance to the harl)or is between the latter and Cutler Island, to- wards the wharves of the town,otf which the anchorage is quite secure, with water for vessels of the largest draft; but the Ship Channel, which runs through into Chedabuoto Bay, passes to the eastward of those Islands, between them and Piscatiqni. The least water in this channel, 4 fathoms, is on a bar which stretches across from Grave Island to Piscatiqui Island. Canso is on the mainland, the more ancient part standing on hills of red sand, clay, and large bowlders. The church, built on the sum- mit of a ridge lOU feet high, is a conspicuous object seen over the islands from a great distance at sea. The newer part of the town, to- gether with the two chapels, are farther westward along the shore of the Tickle, a narrow boat channel separating Durell island from the main- land. The whole forms a long, straggling village, with a population of about 1,20U. Near the north point of Durell Island, which is 1^ miles long, is Flag Hill, 105 feet high, which is used as an important leading mark. Western Side. — Patch and Boom Rocks.— Approaching from the southward, the entrance of the Ship Channel between Cape Canso and Cranberry Island is a mile wide. The outermost danger on this side is Patch Rock, with 5 fathoms water, but on which the sea is said to break occasionally; it bears from Cape Canso S. 51° E. If miles. Within Patch Rock — to the westward, nearly f mile — is Boom Book, with 12 feet water, S. 23° E., IJ miles from Cape Canso, and east 1^ miles from the south point of Andrew Island. The southwestern ex- treme of Dover Island, open to the southward of White Point bearing S. 03° W., leads clear to the southward of both these rocks. Cape Breaker and Roaring Bull Rock. — Cape Breaker, with 2^ fathoms water, bears from Cape Canso S. 79° E. one mile distant* Crow and Cranberry Islands, apparently touching, will lead 200 yards eastward of Cape Breaker. As it can only be seen when there is a heavy sea, this rock is extremely dangerous, and would be still more so were it not that Roaring Bull Rock, 800 yards to the westward, almost always shows, and therefore assists in indicating the position of its neighbor. Keeper and Blirby Rocks, with 4 and 2^ fathoms water, are dis- Lj. i jt-iaJ MS'w CANSO HARBOR. 159 tiding from There is a And Piscat- nds on tlie St. Cutler rell Island, Qiting it to very small, ) sea (1860.) ' Island, to- uite secure, p Channel, eastward of Iter in this from Grave Qg on bills )n the sum- in over the le town, to- sbore of the n the main< )pulation of 1 is 1^ miles ;ant leading ing from the > Canso and this side is k is said to miles. Boom Bock, ind east 1^ western ex- )int bearing ker, with 2^ die distant* d 200 yards 1 there is a e still more ) westward, ) position of ter, are dis- tant i mile and one mile respectively, about NW. from Cape Breaker Kock. The steeple of the Uoman Catholic church at Canso, seen open NE. of Glasgow Head, bearing N. W.i<=> W., leads just clear to the NE. of Cape Breaker, Keeper, and Kirby Rocks. Black Rocks lie NW. about ^ mile from Kirby Hock, the puNsage Into Glasgow Harbor being betwenii them. They consist of two masses of trap rock about 5 feet high, aud can therefore always be seen ; as the shoal water extends from them only 200 yards to the eastward, they are of great service in pointing out the western side of the chan- nel. Bootes Rock, with 6 feet least water, and the ManofWar Kock, which covers at half tide, lie farther to the northward, the latter, the most distant, being a long ^ mile from the Black Rocks. There is no safe channel for ships between these three last named dangers, which all rise fVom a shoal and rocky bank, which stretches across the en- trance of Glasgow Harbor; but there is a navigable channel between them and Glasgow Head, though narrow and dilBcull:. The Man-of-TVar Rock bears from Glasgow Head N. 40° E. about i mile. It lies much in the way, but is usually shown by breakers, and the marks for it are distinct and good. The eastern ends of the Black Rocks and of the Cape Rock when in one, bearing S. 27° E., lead just to the eastward of it, and, of course, clear the Bootes ; therefore let the Cape Rock be kept open to the eastward of the Black Rocks until Man-of-War Rock is past; which will be the case when Flag Hill comes in line with the steep bank (not the beach) of Fort Point, bearing N. m° W. The Mackerel Rock lies ^ mile farther to the NW. Having 10 feet water, it seldom shows, and is therefore the more dangerous. When on it the eastern extremes of Oliver Island and of Derabie East Rock are in one, and just open to the eastward of Petit-pas, which bears from it N. 20° E. 800 yards. The same marks which clear the Mau-of- War Rock, namely Flag Hill and the steep bank of Fort Point, as above mentioned, lead to the NE. of this rock also, at the distance of 100 yards. There is a clear channel on either side of the Mackerel Eock, but that to the northeastward of it has the advantage of leading marks. South Shoal is the last danger on the west side of the Ship Chan- nel, until the vessel arrives at Grave Island and the entrance of Canso Harbor. It has 3 feet least water, and extends 600 yards off shore, or half way across toward the eastern extremity of Grassy Island; leaving a clear channel between it and the Grassy Reef of 360 yards in breadth. The shoal water extends only 100 yards off Grave Island, leaving a channel between it and Piscatiqui Island 200 yards wide, and 4 fathoms in it at low water. Stanley Shoals consist of four small rocky patches 4 mile apart. 160 CHEDABUCTO BAY — SOUTH COAST. The least water, 4 fathoms, is ou the northera and western patches, and is sometimes shown by brealseis. The northern patch lies with the northern of the Black Rocks in line with the north point of Glasgow Head, and Crow Islet, seen half its apparent breadth, open east of Cranberry Island. Prom the western patch, the eastern end of Crow> Islet is just shut in behind the eastern extreme of Cranberry Island, and the highest part of Glasgow Head, seen just over the north end of the southern group of Black Bocks. The western extremes of Derabie and Cranberry Islands in line, bearing N. 40° W., lead between these shoals and Cape Breaker. Nickerson and I ^vid Rocks. — From Nickerson Rock, which is detached, with 4 fathon^s least water. Cranberry Island lighthouse bears N. 74° W. 1^ miles. This rock is less in the way of navigation than Stanley Shoals^ from which it is distant about J mile. The same remark applies to David Rock, with 13 feet water, J mile nearer to the lighthouse, which bears from it N. G5° W, J mile. Washball Rock, a rocky patch, which dries at low water, lies S. 4.'i° VV. 4(»0 yards from David Rock, and S. 54° E. 1,400 yards from the lighthouse; ic forms the extremity of a rocky shoal extending from Cranberry Island, and occupies a position midway between the light- house and Staidey Shoals. As this danger can almost always be seen, it is of great service in guiding vessels. These two last-named rocks lie so near the edge of Cranberry Island Bank, as to leave no safe passage between them. Pink Rock, with only 4 feet water, lies ^ mile to the southward of Cranberry Island lighthouse; but from it a ledge, with 3 fathoms water, extend 300 yards in a westerly direction, and forms the extreme southern etige of Cranberry Ishind Bank, from which the lighthouse bears north J mile. Flag Hill, and the SW. extremity of the beach of Fort Point in line, lead just clear to the southward of this danger; but as the beach can not always be made out. Flag Hill should be kept about half a point open SW. of Fort Point, until the bearing of the lighthouse shows that the rock is passed. Frjring Pan and Pas Reefs. — The next danger bordering the Ship Channel is the Frying Pan Reef, running out 800 yards from the low Frying Pan Islet, and separated by a narrow channel from the Pas Reef, which extends h mile to the eastward from Petit-pas. From the Pas Reef the edge of the shoal continues to the westward, skirting Petit-pas at the distance of 300 yards, and then crossing the bay, between it and Grassy Island, where it joins the shoal water off the latter. Grassy Reef projects \ mile fro n the SB. extremity of Grassy Island, and diminishes the breadth of the deej) water between it and the equally dangerous Mackerel Rock to 250 yards, and as the channel is crooked there, as well as narrow, they form a difficult pass for large vessels. 'u patches, [)ck3 in line en half its he western the eastern gow Head, Bocks. (Is in line, aker. :, which is lighthouse navigation The same larer to the iter, lies S. is from the iding from the light- ys be seen, lined rocks ive no safe athward of 3 fathoms he extreme lighthouse le beach of is danger; Id be kept ring of the ig the Ship 3m the low m the Pas From the d, skirting g the bay, ter off the of Grassy reen it and he channel ?8 for large CANSO HARBOK N. W. ENTRANCE. 161 Dangers in NW. Entrance to Canso Harbor— The difficulties of the NW. entrance of Canso Harbor arise principally from the nar- rowness of the channel between Cutler or Hart and Piscatiqui Islands, where the deep wat«r is less than 80 yards wide; and from the position of the Starling Rock being so much in the way. It is a passage that should not be aitempted in a large vessel without a fair and steady breeze; for although the dangers about to be described are for the most part visible, yet there is no safe anchorage in the event of the wind failing, the bottom being of rock. Net and Whitman Rocks.— On the western side of this entrance the dangers are, the 'Set Roeks, which dry at a quarter ebb; and the Whitman Rock, with 2 feet least water. They both lie off the east side of Durell Island, at the distance of 400 yards. The marks which just lead clear to the eastward of both these rocks, and the shoal water around them, are the church steeple at Canso, and the western ex- tremity of Cutler Island in line, bearing S. 18° E. Bald Rock.— On the eastern side of the entrance, and distant 300 yards from the north end of Piscatiqui Island, is the Bald Rock, of bare granite, UO yards long and 30 feet high. It lies directly opposite to the Whitman Rock, and the channel between them is 400 yards wide. There is a rock, dry at low water, lying 200 yards to the northward of the Bald Rock, and shoal water 100 yards farther off in the same direc- tiod ; but off the west side the shoal only extends 100 yards, and is cleared by the above church steeple and the house on Cutler Island in line bearing S. 15° E. The only other danger, on this side of the entrance, is the reef off the NW. point of Piscatiqui Island, which is partly dry at low water, and extends 150 yards out to the NW. This reef will be cleared if the church steeple be kept open to the westward of the house on Cutler Island; or by Glasgow Head and Piscatiqui Island touching, and bear- ing S. 410 E. Starling Rock lies 120 yards off the western shore of Piscatiqui Isl- and, and in the very line of the narrow channel between these islands, with only 4 feet over it at low water, renders this entrance extremely dangerous to strangers ; for the channel between this rock and the shoal water, which extends 250 yards off the south end of Cutler Island, is only 80 yards wide. Beacons.— To facilitate the navigation into Canso Harbor by the northern entrance, two beacons 30 feet high, with triangular beads painted white, have been erected. The south beacon stands on Lauigan Hill, with the Roman Catholic church bearing N. 77° W. The north beacon on the eastern side of Grave Islet bears N. 16o w. from the beacon on Lanigan Hill. Directions through Ship ChanneL— To enter Canso Harbor from the southward, at any distance not less than 3 miles, brine the licht- 5314 11 * 162 CHEDABUCTO BAY SOUTH COAST. f: ■' ,i house on Cranberry Island to bear N. 41° W., when Crow Islet will be in one with and seen over Cranberry Island. Steer for the light- house on that line of bearing, taking care not to open the whole of Crow Islet out to the westward of Cranberry Island (for fear of the Cape Breaker), until the church steeple at Canso is seen to the NE. of Glas- gow Head, bearing N. 63° W. As soon as that steeple opens to the NE. of Glasgow Head, steer N. 49'-' W., or so as to make a direct course towards the S W. side of Petit-pas. Continue the course towards Petit- pas, taking care that the Cape Kock is kept open to the eastward of the Black Rocks, until Flag Hill comes in line with the steep bank of Port Point, bearing N. 63° W. Then steer on the last named leading marks, taking care not to open Flag Hill in the least to the SW. of the steep bank of Fort Point until the eastern extremities of Petit-pas and Oliver Island come in line, bearing N. 27° B. Then alter course instantly, and steer S. 88° W. for the church at Canso, until Petit-pas and Crow Islands are touching, and tlien X. 70° W., for the SW. end of Grave Islet, keeping Walsh's house (on Dureil Island on the NE. side of the entrance of the Tickle) just open to the SW. of it, by which the vessel will pass midway between the Grassy Reef and the South Shoal, and clearof the shoal water off Grassy Island. As soon as the N W. extremity of the beach of Fort Point bears NE. steer N. 52° W., or for the wharf and stores on the west side of Cutler Island until the lighthouse on Cranberry Island and the south- ern extremity of the beach of Fort Point come in line. Then steer N. 75° W., keeping the last named leading marks in line astern , and they will lead clear of the shoal off Grave Islet ; round which, at any distance from the islet between 120 and 2i0 yards, the vessel may haul to the westward into the harbor. Through NW. Entrance. — Being outside the Net Rocks, bring the Roman Catholic church steeple at Canso to bear S. 14° E., when it will be seen over Cutler Island, midway between the house on the island and its western end. Steer for this mark, and it will lead nearly mid- way between the Bald and Whitman Rocks, and when the red clay cliff of Glasgow Head to the southward of Canso is seen through the chan- nel between Cutler and Piscatiqui Islands, bearing S. 40° E., steer for it, keeping In mid-channel until Grave Islet Beacon is in line with Lanigan Beacon bearing S. 18° E. ; steer with these beacons in line, and when Cranberry lighthouse appears in one with Fort Point on Grassy Islands, steer to the westward into the harbor. Tides. — The duration of the rise and fall, and still more of the streams, is influenced by winds or other causes ; but the rate of the streams in the NW. entrance of the harboi", where they are strong- est, does not often exceed one knot. The flood comes from the south- ward, the ebb from the opposite direction. Oflf-ljring Islands and Canso Ledges.— The small islands lying outside Canso Harbor, and not previously mentioned, have the names •aHMMMIKi Islet will the light- )leofOrow ' the Cape a. of Glas- totheNB. •ect course Cape Rock Hill couies W. Then open Flag Qt until the ine, bearing ' the church ml then N. s house (on i) just open )etween the ir off Grassy , Point bears vest side of d the south- len steer N. •n , and they any distance haul to the js, bring the when it will n the island nearly mid- red clay cliff gh the chan- E., steer for in line with cons in line, )rt Point on more of the rate of the y are strong- m the south- islands lying ve the names CANSO HAHBOR OFF-LYING ROCK8, 163 of Hog, Cook, Welsh, and Derabie, and with many nameless rocks form a ciiain 1^ miles long in an easterly direction, termiuatiug with the East Bock, which is of bare granice, 20 feet high, auil distant a long J mile northward from Grow Island. Rocks awash and shallow water continue from the Bast Rock 800 yards to the eastward; but on the north side these islands are bold to, excepting at their west end, where the Black Rock and the shoal around it extend 400 yards from Hog Island to the northward. The Black Rock, which is seldom, if ever, entirely covered, is J mile NE. of the Bald Rock, and between them lie the entrance to a channel between the outer islands and Piscatiqui and George Islands, which is full of rocks, and only navigable by boats and very small fisiiing vessels. The outer islands are occupied by lisher- men during the season, but the north shore of George Island by more permancMit residents. Ail these islands are formed of granitic rocks, excepting Grassy Island and Petitpas, and most of them are sparingly wooded with dwarf spruce trees. The East Rock bears from the lighthouse on Cranberry Island N. 25° VV. 1-^ miles; and to the east of the line joining them Me a nr.mber of dangerous rocks witli deep water betw »en them. The innermost of these, the Fanning and S(!ott Rocks, with 12 and 9 feet least water, re- spectivelj'-, lie on the eastern edge of the C"anberry Island bank, and at the distance of h mile from the lighthouse ; while Park Ledge, always above water, Crow Reef, and the Budget Rock are in like man- ner nearly united by shoal water to Crow Island. There is a deei) chan- nel between tiie Budget Rock and the Frying Pan, but it is narrow and destitute of good h ading marks. Next, outside of the dangers which have been mentioned, are the Kelp Rocks, Inner Bass, Middle Rock, and Broad Shoal ; of these, the tirst and last have 12 and 9 feet least water, respectively, and only show when there I'i a sea running ; but the Inner Bass is awash at low water, and the Viiddlo Rock, having only 4 feet water, can almost always be seen. O-rime and Bass Rocks are the outermost of the off-lying dangers known as the Canso Ledges, which render the approach to the ship channel between Cranberry Island and Oa;i; Canso extremely danger- ous to strangers and more especially so as the locality is celebrated for fogs. Grime Rock, which has 12 feet least water, is only marked by breakers when the sea is heavy ; it is surrounded by various patches with from 3 to 5 fathoms, the outermost rocky patch, with 4^ fathoms, being ^ mile to the eastward. From Grime Rock the lighthouse on Cranberry Lsland bears S. .52^ W., distant 2^^ miles; it also lies with the steeple of the Roman Oatiiolic church at Canso, the southern ex- tremity of Grassy Island, the northern end of Petit-pas Island, and Park Ledge all in line. Bass Rock, with feet water, on which the sea breaks freiiuently, lies S, 24° VV. 7oi» yards from Grime Rock, and N. 55° E. 2^ miles from Cranberry Island Lighthouse; from Bass Rock the steeple of the J 164 CHEDABUCTO BAY SOUTH COAST. Roman Catholic church at Gaaso, and southern extremity of Petit-pas Islopd ai)pear in line. Automatic Buoy oft' Cape Canso is painted black, marked Cape Canso, and sounds a 10 inch whistle. The buoy is moored in 20 fathoms water 1^ miles east from Grime Rock, and will be kept in position dur- ing the season of navigation each year. Caution.— In passing round these dangers in thick weather, great caution and the constant use of the lead are indispensable. If th€( ap- proach be from the northward, remember that they lie only 800 yards within the ;iO fathom edge of the bank ; it" from the southward and east- ward, go into no less than 25 fathoms until the soundings indicate that the vessel is off the bank to the northward ; and lastly, in clear weather, do not haul to the westward into Ohedabucto Bay until the high IiuhI of Black Point opens to the northward of Derabie Island, beariiiff west. Fox Island, lying i^ >niles to the westward of Canso, is granitic, ^ mile long, and 40 feet high. It is connected with a shingle point of the mainland, distant 700 yards, by a bar of sand and stone nearly dry at low water. The Fox Rocks lie oii Lazy Head, between Durell and E'ox Islands, and dry at low water; the outer Fox being J mile off shore, and the same distance eastward from Fox Island. The north point of Fox Island and the pitch of Black Point in one,. clear the outer Fox in 5 fathoms ; and also the shoal off Tickle Island. Half Island Cove, i^ miles to the westward of Fox Island, affords a small and unsafe anchorage, being open to the winds and swell from the north and east. Off the small island, on the west side of this cove, there Is a dangerous rock, lying 200 yards from it to the eastward. Philip Cove, 2 miles farther to the westward, affords shelter to bolts, tiie sea being kept out by rocks iu the entrance, and which be- comes dry soon after high water. Crow Harbor,celebrated for its mackerel and herring fisheries, has excellent holding-ground, and water enough for vessels of the largest draft; but there is not room for many large vessels in the eastern part of the harbor. Rook Island is a rock 200 yards long, lying nearly in the middle of the entrance; and the Kook Rock, with 3 feet least v ater, lies 70 yards oft' the NW. extremity of the island, with deep water close to. The channel to the westward of the island has 17 fathoms water in it, and is GOO yards wide at the entrance, between Rook and Corveau Rocks, which last are dry at low water, and form pari; of the reef oft' Lamb Point. The channel to the eastward of Rook Island, between it and the Brodie Rocks, is genorally preferred with easterly winds, although hav- ing only 23 feet water, and 200 yards wide. The Brodie Rocks, which dry at low water, form part of the reef Thich extends 450 yards from BBjBiB'/'r' i -niii'vr.irr ^ . of Petit-pas arked Cape t 20 fathoms )osition dur- lather, great If the) ap- ly 800 yards ird and east- indicate that ear weather, e high hind and, beariiiff is granitic, ^ gle point of stone nearly Pox Islands, lore, and the »oint of Fox Iter Fox in 5 md, affords a well from the lis cove, there ,rd. is shelter to iid which be- fisheries, l^as f the largest ) eastern part the middle of ', lies 70 yards slose to. The iter in it, and [)rveau Rocks, reef oft" Lamb ?.u it and the although hav- Eocks, which 150 yards from CROW HARBOR GUY8B0R0UGH. 165 lazy and Brodie Points towards Rook Island, giving security to the eastern part of the harbor. The mark for clearing these rocks, and the shoal water within them on the NE. side of the harbor, is Lamb Point and the extreme of the land to ihe westward in one. bearing N. 80O W. Directions. — In the absence of buoys and beaconSj vessels wishing to enter Crow Ilarbor should, in approaching from the eastward to avoid the shoal which extends 300 yards oS Lazy Poinf, bring the east end of Rook Island to bear nothing to the weatv.ard t»f S. 3i° W., and steer for it untd within the distance of 400 j-ards, then alter course to the southward, to pass about 200 yards to the eastward of that island. When the vessel has ran past the island, the marks already given for clearing the Brodie Rocks, and the shoal water on the NF. side of the harbor, will coin« on, and enable her safely to haul in to the SB., and choose a berth in 6 or 7 fathoms, over a mud bottom. Tides — There is little or no stream of tide within the harbor. Coast — At the distance of ^ mile to the westward of Lamb Point is the tirdt of three remarkable high clay cliffs, which point out the posi- tion of Crow Harbor from a distance after which there is nothing deserving particular notice along the hilly, bold, and rooky coast up to the Salmon River, unless it may be Half-way Cove, as affording a land- ing place for boats. The Salmon River is navigable for boats to the distance of 2 miles in from its very narrow entrance, on the bar of which the depth is only 3 feet at low water. Shoal water extends ^ mile out from the entrance^ and a rocky ridge with 4 fathoms least water projects '^ mile farther to the eastward. Bigby Flead, a remarkable cliff 100 feet high, separates this river from Toby Cove, another place for boats, with 4 feet on its bar at low water. O-uysborough Harbor, at the head of Chedabucto Bay, io an exten- sive inlet, running in to the northward, with a depth of water sufficient for vessels of large draft ; but with such a dangerous bur, an entrance channel so narrow and crooked, and such rapid tides, that no written directions could be available. Tiie assistance of a pilot acquainted with every local peculiarity of the tides and winds is indispensable for the safety of a vessel even of very moderate size, either in entering or 'leav- ing this harbor, as will appear from an inspection of the chart. Ouysborough, the co'-.aty town, is advantageously situated on the western side of the harbor, the deep water a[)proaciiin;:f close to its wharves. It contains about 1,800 inhabitants, and has 2 churches ; the northernmost standing Oo feet above the sea at high water. Tlie hills- .attain the height of .500 feet on either side of this beautiful inlet, v,iiich is navigable for ships uj) to the Narrows, where the depth is 8 feet at low water at 4 miles from the entrance. Sm ill vessels may pro- ceed 3 miles still farther, and bo its to Mie bridge, where the tide ends at .S^ miles from the entrance, and where the Gnysboroiigh River, a CHEDABUCTO BAY — NORTH COAST. small stream, enters the inlet, flowing through rich meadows called the Gnysborough Interval. Tides. — The streams in the narrow entrance of the harbor run from 4 to 5 knots. Outer Bar. — The entrance channel into Guysborough Harbor be- tween Peart Point and Stony Patch is 80 yards wide, and carries 5J fatiioms water; but farther out and stretching across from Toby Point to Ha(!ley Beach there is a bar of sand, with 17 feet on it at low water, and wliieh is rendered impassable at times by heavy breakers. The Inner Bar lies across the inner entrance, which is :.'30 yards wide, between Eliza Point and Hadley Beach. The depth which can be carried over it is L.J feet at low water, in a channel only 80 yards wide. Before arriving at this bar there is room enough for a vessel or two to anchor in the month of Ingersol Ct-eek out of tho strength of the tide and sheltered from the sea by Stony Patch. Directions. — Tlie course across the Outer Bar, in tlie deepest water, is west, steering for the lighthouse until within ttie distance of 200 yards, then curving gradually to the northward and eastward, as the vessel passes the beach off Peart Point at the distance of 60 yards, and crosses the mouth of Ingersol Creek to the Inner Bar. The course then becomes N. 45° E. for 2'X) yards while crossing that bar, and then north- erly through a clear and deep channel for ^ mile to the safe and spacious anchorage off" the town. North Shore of Chedabucto Bay.— Michauz Point, the NE. point of Chedabucto Bay, is a peninsula, uniteurt-house, )ola. It is e most im- le Atlantic if the tow a 3. irts Wharf, im. Water he chain of at Harbor, 11 all rocky i 800 yards the north- , the shoal t!rid Pass, sou on the y a red ca" hoal. The oyac Point [;e is nearly e from the on them is ihannel for !on on the le coriv«*nt, 1, will lead Anchorage. — Oapodiette Bay, 1^ miles wide, between Marache and Eavauagh Points, although open to westerly winds and to the heavy swell rolling in at times round the point from the southward, neverthe- less affords a tolerably good occasional anchorage in 10 or 12 fiithoins, mud bottom, the best ground being in the deepest water. Fiddle Shoal, with 10 feet least water, lies at the outer end of the rocky bauk which extends to the westward GOD yards irom K;iv;iiia;;h Point. There is no passage for large vessels between it and the point, which has several dry rocks off it, and shoal water all along its SW. side, to the distance of 300 yards offshore. On the north side of the point within the harbor, a reef, with only 3 feet at low water, runs oft' J mile, which is half way across to the wharves of the town of Arichat. Henley Ledges, which are black rocks, covered only at high water and almost always shown by breakers, lie near the SW. extremity of the rocky bank off Jerseyman Island, from which they are distant § mile. The breadth of the deep water between them and Marache Point is ^ mile. To seaward the shallow water extends from them only 300 yards, but there is a rock awash )f mile from tliem to the north- westward, and two others between them and Jerseyman Island, thus leaving no passage for ships. There are no good leading marks for sailing to the SW. of these rocks; but vessels will pass well to the the SE. of them, if the steeple of the easternmost church at Arichat be not shut in behind the eastern extremity of Jerseyman Island. Pilot Rock, marked by a black buoy, is on the NW. side of the chan- nel, and at the extremity of the shallow water off" the east end of Jersey- man Island, from which it is distant 600 yards to the eastward. It is small, with 4 feet least uter, and quite bold to the southward. There is no channel between it and the island for large vessels. The leading mark to clear it is De Carteret's flagstaff", near to the east end of Ari- chat, seen over Kavanagh Point; but this mark leads very close to the SE of the rock. Poule Reef, with 7 feet least water, lies N. 55° E. 400 yards from Poule Islet, which is nearly united to the east end of Jerseyman Island at low water. There is a narrow channel, fit only for small craft, be- tween the shoal and the islet; but the ship channel to the eastward of this shoal, between it and the Fiddle, is 600 yards wide, with water sufficient for the largest ships. Directions. — If bound to Arichat from the eastward, with a leading wind, a vessel will pass the Hautfond Shoals by keeping some part of Green Island in sight to the southward of Cape flogan until the bea- con on Jerseyman Island is in line with the cupola of the convent east- ward ot the Roman Catholic church, and steer for it, until the light- house on Marache Point bears S. 61° E.; thence st er N". 63° E. so as to make a direct .jourse towards Little Barachois at the head of Capo- dietie Bay; and as soon as the steeple of the westernmost church at Arichat opens a little to the eastward of the priest's flagstaff", bearing 170 CHEDABUCTO DAY^NORTH COAST. N. 240 \V,, run towards it until the soutbern extnunity of Creightou Island is seen throusfh the Crid l'>*ss. The vessel being then within Poiile Reef, may saf«Iy haul to the westward and select a berth at pleasure in the most roomy part of the harbor, :v-tjwhere to the north of the line from l*oule Islet to Beach Point. South of that line the eastern bight of .lerseynian Island contains the Cage Shoal, with only 7 feet water, and much foul ground. If the vessel should have occasion to go to the eastern part of the hat Itor, she should stand well over to the north shore before bearing up to the eastward, and run along it at the distance of 200 yards from the eiulsof tiie wharves, until after Maraohe Point has disappeared behind Kavanagh Point, when si ■ will be to the eastward of the reef off the last-named point, and will find bold shores and plenty of water to within 250 yanls of the entrance of the cove at the head of the harbor. With local knowledge a vessel could i)ass eastward of the Hautfond Shoals by steering for the steeple of the westernmost church at Mar- ache Point in line, bearing N. 2° E. until within J mile of the |)oiut; then, after keeping away a little to pass the point, ai I the shoal water mentioned off its north side, they will have to beat up Oapodiette Bay until the marks for running in, namely, the westernmost church, open a little to the eastward of the flagstaff, bearing N. 24° W., come on. Crid PasFUge. — In approaching Arichatfrora the westward, the only outlying danger, besides the Cerberus Kock, is the Creighton Shoal ; and this: last will be avoided if, alter passing the Peninsula Shoals Bear Hi-ad be not shut in behind Peninsula Point until the westernmost iihuvcii at Aru^hat is seen to the southward of theCrid Islands; a mark whi< h also leads clear of the Picard Reef and of all the shoal water off Creighton Island. The Crid Islands, which are small and rocky, form the iiitrth side of the Crid Pass, the whole breadth of which across to Beach Point is about 300 yards, but there are half-tide rocks off both ends of those little islands which reduce the navigable breadth of the channel to 200 yards. The extremity of Beach Point, which is all shin- gle, may be safely passed as near as 60 yards ; but on the outside of the point the shoal water commences immediately, and continues increasing in breadth from the shore to the western extremity of the island, where it extends .j mile from the cliffs. With the necessary leading wind, bring the steeple of the western- most church to appear through the middle of Crid Pass, or a little to the northward of Beach Point, when it will bear X. 71° E. Keep it so while running towards it, and when the vessel has arrived within J mile of the point, if Robin wharf and stores (on the south side of the harbor) be not already seen to the northward of Beach Point, steer a little to northward till they are so, and then steer for them N. 83° E., or so as to pass the point at any distance between 60 and 200 yards, into the harbor. Tides. — The stream of flood comes in by the eastern entrance, running SSag g Tu Tm s e^ saisasMJaBaw ' Oreightou :tieu with ill a berth at the north lat line the ihoal, with part of the bearing np \\» from tlie i^rcd behind reef off the )f water to the harbor, e Hautfond rch at Mar- the |>oiut; jtlioal water odiette Bay lurch, open come on. .ni, the only 1 ton Shoal ; sula Shoals resternmost ds ; a mark al water off rocky, form b across to iks off both ladth of the t is all shin- taide of the i increasing land, where he western- r a little to Keep it so Jithm ^ mile the harbor) r a little to E., or so as Is, into the ice, running ARICHAT AND WEST ARICHAT. 171 >t' id and shingle, with stores ro;i fshmd. Vessels lie imme- n as securely as in a dock, ir of shinjiiie, which - proii(;li is from the westward, and over a bar, with 17 feet at low water, which exteiuls across to the northward from Arichat Head, the west extremity of Creighton Island. The entrance of the harbor, i mile within this bar, is 300 yards wide between Creighton and Mosdet Points; the former being a long spit and a wharf, on the north side of Cr* diately within the entrance in 3| fa: the harbor being closed at the east > at low water. Directions. — Bring the wliarf on tlie north side of Bosdet Point to bear N. 74° E., and steer for it ; the vessel will then pass the bar in not less than 15 feet at low water. Continue the same course until the shingly tSW. extremity of Bosdet Point and the NE. extremity of Creighton Island (at the east end of the harbor) are touching, and bearing S. 05° E., when alter course, and keep the last named marks in one exactly running towards them until Bosdet Point is 300 yards ahead ; then alter course to the southward, so as to l)e two thirds of the distance over from Creighton Point towards Bosdet Point, as the vessel passes between them into the harbor. Le Blanc and Haddock Harbors. — Le Blanc Harbor has its en- trance ^ mile from West Arichat and in the NB. corner of the same bay. Six feet at low water can be carried in through its very narrow entrance, and there is much more within. It is an extensive place, containing a population of fishermen and small farmers. At the NE. extremity of this harbor is the Viousselier Pass, very narrow, between mussel beds, and only one foot in it at low water. Boats pass through it into Haddock Harbor, the principal entrance to which is from the Lennox Passage, by a very narrow channel, to the eastward of Campbell Island, but it has 20 feet in it at low water. Both these last-named harbors are occasionally resorted to by small vessels in the fishing season, but thej' are no use to large ships. In the bay between Arichat Head and Peninsula Point are Deep Cove and Janvrin Harbor barred by Dorey Leilge, and only useful to small craft and boats. In the entrance of Janvrin Harbor, and 1 J miles eastward from Peninsula Point, lies Delorier Island, from which extend the rocky Bentinck Shoals. The least water on these shoals is 4 feet> but as they lie in a bay, they are not much in the way of vessels ; they join the Peninsula Shoals to the westward, which, with tiie southern entrance of the Gut of Canso, will be described on page 172. Creighton Shoal Buoy is rocky, and the least water, 11 feet, lies with the westernmost church at Arichat, just shut in behind the south- CHEDABUCTO BAY — NORTH COAST. t ern extremity of Orei(;litoii [slaiid; it bears S. 70° W. au Point and Bear Head in one, bearing N. 04° W., lead to the • ' V. i jhese shoals in 6 fathoms water ; and the steeple of tlve uhnuel at Arichat and the south extremity of Creighton Island in lin- 'j-jaring N. 80° E., will lead to the southward at the dis- tance of i miie. Thomas Shoals runs out from Thomas Head (the NW. point of Janvrin Island), J mile to the westward, with rocky and irregular soundings, from 11 to 21 feet at low water. The clearing mark for its western extremity is the eastern end of Wasting Islet, touching the south end of Peninsula Point, bearing S. 50° E.; and for its northern side the two points forming the north side of Janvrin Island, in one, bearing N. 71° E., when Campbell Island will appear just open to the northward of them. The Janvrin Shoal, extending H mile to the westward from Janvrin Point, is a bank of sand and stones which dries out half of that distance, and has a large rock near its edge. At the distance of 1,100 yards from the point there is another rock, with 6 feet least water. The SW. side of Wasting Islet, in one with the north end of Penin- sula Point, bearing S. 72° E., will lead 200 yards to the SW. of this dangerous shoal in 5 fathoms water. On the NW. side, where there are no clearing marks, it should be approached with great caution, for che water is too deep for the lead to afford much warning. From Cape Argos to Guysborough, at the head of Chedalmcto Bay, a distance of 12 miles, the prevailing features are peninsulated Ih i i i 1 ( W1 is (U8taiit ^ :bward of it ,t, and are, eightou l8- n one, letul ove church ring N. 74° I Shoal, but e westward J, is moored ,vo Fiinall is- 10 SW. side most to the long gravel 8 the peniu- ater extends for an equal QQs, running reef extends ,riiig N. 64° )r ; and the f Creighton d at the dis- W. point of id irregular mark for its ouching the its northern iland, in one, open to the roai Janvrin half of that mco of 1,100 least water, ad of Penin- I SW. of this where there ; caution, for ■ Ohedabucto peuiusulated 1 — ^sijBiaSsgRSgsaE ^iiJseai^ Si iBiWitk'ri i fiM'i^^^L.-a jWj am^ 'mf'if-^--"'*^'''^^^^^'--^^ *^.^^ CIHM/ICMH Microfiche Series. CIHM/ICMH Collection de microfiches. Canadian Institute for Historical MIcroreproductlons / Instltut Canadian da microreproductlons historiques riifl!; ■^; RAGGED POINT — HYDRA ROCK. 173 points of drift, sand, clay, and bowlders, resting on sandstone, and pre- seuting low cliflfs to the sea. These are united to tbe mainland by beaches ot shingle, inclosing large ponds, several of which admit boats at high waler when the surf is not too heavy. In the rear of these ponds are the houses of a scattered population, subsisting by fishing and fanning (1860), and situated on the southern slope of ridges rising to the height of 200 feet above the sea. From Cape Argos the coast trends SW. 2 miles to Oyster Point, whence Grady Point bears SW. IJ miles. The Murdoch Ledge, dry at low water, and k mile off shore, lies midway between the two last-named points. Ragged Point is a rocky peninsula, forming the apex of a triangle, the sides of which are long shingle beaches, inclosing a large ponals scattered B at the west" % mile north- ae of the spit s are moored, rard of Mark ile north west- the detached le shoal bear- Point. A red . 80° W. dis- principal set- tlements are at Grande-grfeve and along the south side of Jerome Point, a high headland projecting from the NE. side of the bay ; and rising to the summit of Mount Granville, on which the remains of an old fort may be seen, 190 feet above the sea. Vessels usually anchor in the NE. corner of the bay, within Jerome Point. St. Peter Canal — This canal which connects St. Peter Inlet with the bay of the same name is a lock canal necessitated by the difference of height of the tides in St. Peter Bay and Bras d'Or lake. Its length is about 4 mile, and has a depth of 18 feet; the breadth at the entrance is 59 feet and in its narrowest part is 48 feet. In entering, it is neces- sary to make a sharp turn; the same in leaving. The canal has a double curve, which increases the difficulty of passage. There is a drawbridge at the nortberii end and a lock at the southern, the length of the lock is 200 feet. The level of the water in the lock is always less than that in St. Peter Bay. The difference at high water is 5 feet, and at low water 1 foot. The sides of the canal are cut in the rock and supported with joists. On each side there is a small path ; the banks of the canal inclined and held at an angle of 30°. There are mooring buoys at both extremities of the canal. Bourgeois Inlet.— Crossing the mouth of St. Peter Bay several re- markable cliff's of red clay will be seen immediately to the westward of it ; the westernmost of them are on Bisset Island, which forms the east point of the narrow entrance to Bourgeois Inlet, an extensive arm of the sea, with 12 feet at low water in its mouth. The stores and wharves at Mr. Bisset's establishment, and the chapel on the east side, a short dis- tance witnin the entrance, will point out this place to strangers (1860). The fisheries, ship building, and as yet limited agriculture, give em- ployment to a number of persons, principally Acadians, who are settled around the inlet. Ouetique Island, which lies one mile to the SW. of Bourgeois Inlet, is remarkable, being small, precipitous, dark looking, comparatively high (about 50 feet), and with a few pine trees upon it ; the passage between them is full of dangers, amongst others, the Philip Rocks, which are almost always uncovered. Cascarette Island, which lies a long ^ mile to the westward of Oue- tique, is much larger, not so high, wooded, with low cliffs at its NE., and a sandy point at its SW. extremity. The shallow water does not extend farther than 200 yards from the south point of either of these islands, but there is a half-tide rock between them, from which shoal water extends 400 yards to the SW. Goillon Reef lies h mile SW. of Cascarette Island, leaving a clear channel into the extensive inlet of Couteau, off' the mouth of which it lies. This reef dries at half tide. The mark for leading to the south- ward of it is to keep Moulin Point open to the southward of Birch Point, bearing S. 83° W. Indian Creek and Couteau Inlet. — The common entrance to Indian ! -, ,., 176 LENNOX PASSAGE. Creek and to Coiiteau Inlet is I mile wide between Cascarette Inland and the east end of Birch Island. The inlet runs in 3 miles to the NW., and is navigable for large vessels. Birch Island forms the north side of the main passage for the re- maining distance of a mile to Grandigue, in which interval the only detached danger is Birch Shoal, off Birch Point. Cape Round, the southern point of the eastern entrance of Lennox Passage, is a remarkable cliff of red clay 60 feet high, forming the NE. point of Madame Island. The shallow water, which here runs off only i mile, widens in proceeding to the northwestward past the long shingle beach of Goulet, and for a large vessel must be considered continuous to the NE. extremity of the Gabion Shoal, distant 2 miles NW. from Cape Round. Gabion Shoal is rocky, and the least water, 5 feet, is on the Morris Rock, near its NW. angle. The shoal is ^ mil« ^^ length, and so lies . across the extremely intricate anchorage called the Goulet, that small craft only can pass between it and Goulet Beach, from which it is dis- taut jj mile to the northward. The marks for leading to the eastward of the eastern end of this dan- gerous shoal, together with the shoal water off Goulet Beach, are the chapel steeple at Bourgeois Inlet and the eastern point of Bisset Island in line, bearing N. 41^ W. ; Cascarette and Ouetique Islands, touching and bearing N. 80° W., clear its NE. point; and Eagle and Bernard Islands touching, and bearing S. 74o W., will lead clear along its north side, but must not be followed much beyond it because of the Descousse Shoal, which is separated from the Gabion Shoal by a channel only i mile wide. The channel, which carries 8 or 9 fathoms water, leads to- wards the Goulet Anchorage, and which, as above mentioned, lies to the westward of Goulet Beach, and which is accessible to small vessels only through narrow channels between the shoals. The Descousse Shoal extends ^ mile to the e^tward of Bernard Is- land, and stretches across to Gabion Point, so as to form the bar of Discousse Harbor. Descousse Harbor is formed by Bernard Island, the several parts of which, united by beaches, extend for nearly a mile along the shore of Madame Island. The entrance from the eastward is by a very nar- ro-w channel, with 7 feet in it at low water, and passes close to the flag, staff', stores, and wharf at the NW. extremity of Gabion Point. The steeple of the chapel, and the other buildings of the village on the shore opposite the island, will immediately point out this place to strangers. It is a secure and very pretty little harbor for tho small vessels by which the fisheries are extensively prosecuted. Foulament Bay is a secure and capacious harbor, with three en- trances tbrmed by Eagle and Crow Islands. Poulament Islet, small, low, round, and wooded, lies within Eagle Island, and together with the shallows, divides the bay into two parts, of which the eastern di- POULAMENT BAY — HAWK ISLET. 177 .rette Ipland I to the NW., e for the re- val the ouly je of Lennox uiug the NE. aus off only i long shingle d continuous es NW. from jn the Morris 1, and so lies 8t, that small hich it is dis- jd of this dan- teach, are the ' Bisset Island inds, touching and Bernard ilong its north the Descousse jauuel only i ater, leads to- tioned, lies to } small vessels of Bernard Is- rm the bar of ) several parts ong the shore by a very nar- )se to the flag. Point. the village on t this place to for tbo small with three en- nt Islet, small, together with the eastern di- vision, leading to Poalament Creek, containing most of the houses, and affording the most roomy anchorage, in 4 or 5 fathoms, with mud bot- tom, is the most frequented. An equal depth might be carried into the bay if the channel were buoyed, but the shoals extending in ojiposite directions from Bernard and Eagle Islands so overlap as almost to form a bar, over which from 13 to 17 feet, according as it may be low or high water, are all that can be insured to a stranger, running in with the leading marks astern; namely, Gascarette Island and Cordeau Point, touching and bearing N. 15° B. Vessels drawing too much water, or not wishing to run in, may safely anchor in the roadstead outside the bar. Hawk Islet is united at low water to the east end of Eagle Island and forms the NW. point of eastern entrance to Poulament Bay ; it is bold to the northward, but to the eastward a shoal runs off towards Bernard Island to the distance of 400 yards. Tides. — The tidal streams are weak in this bay, and seldom exceed a knot in the channel off' its mouth. Directions. — To the foregoing brief description the following direc- tions are added for the use of vessels desirous of shelter on the ap- proach of bad weather ; and especially at the commencement of winds from between the south and east, as they seldom continue beyond a very few hours without bringing thick fog and rain. Pass Gape Bound at any distance between ^ and J mile, steering NW. until Onetique and Gascarette Islands touch ; then steer towards those islands N. 80° W., or so as to keep them touching, until Pou- lament Islet appears just open to the northward of Bernard Island ; and then towards the last-named mark, keeping the islet just open un- til the steeple of the chapel at Bourgeois Islet comes in line with the eastern point of Ouetique Island, bearing N. 21° E. The vessel will now be in about 9 fathoms, with mud bottom ; and if she bring up with the last- men tioned marks on, will be distant more than 200 yards from the shallow water off' the north side of Bernard Island, and in safe an- chorage, being sheltered from SE. winds by the Descousse and Gabion Shoals, and by land in every other direction. If the anchorage off the entrance of Poulament be preferred, then, instead of anchoring when the steeple of the chapel at Bourgeois Islet and the eastern point of Ouetique Island come in line, alter course to west, or as may be found necessary to open out the north point of Grow Island a little to the northward of Hawk Islet. Having done so, run towards them, S. 77° W., until thf steeple at Descousse comes in one with the high- water western extremity of Bernard Island when the ves- sel will have arrived within 300 yards of her anchorage. Gontinue the course until Poulament Islet and Eagle Island close, and when they touch Gordeau Point will either be touching, or only just shut in behind the western end of Gascarette Island, bearing N. 15° E. Bound to, to the southward, with these last-named marks on, and bring up, either in 5314 12 178 LENNOX PASSAQE. 7 fathoms, with the northern extremities of Crow and Hawk Islands in one; or a little farther in with the two points on the north side of Ber- nard Island in one ; there the depth viU be 6 fathoms, and the bottom in both places mud. If the vessel does not draw more than 13 feet water she may safely ran into Poulament Bay by keeping the leading marks on astern as she rnus from them (namely, Cordeau Point aud Cascarette Island, tonching or very slightly open), and when the south side of Crow Is- land appears in sight to the southward of Eagle Island she will be within the bar, and may bring up in 4^ fathoms, mud, and in quite a secure harbor. The Western Entrance, between Babbit by the Mac- nd extending from which it gerous shoal, t be carefully oal is distant rin Point will distinct and t a small part in Point, and loal, keep the lox passage is he northward assage, at the lie main chan- cessary to ob- jouth shore of •ance of Gary ast water 300 itward, Camp- ed, and at the ireadth of the hich is rocky, f Cape Breton The following jrson who can ;h a fair wind : a little to the so, and they farther to the ir behind Glaa- que Cove, until Burnt and Seal Islands close and appear to touch, when they will bear N. 60° E. These last-named points kept exactly touching will lead through between the shoals as far as Burnt Point, where the channel tnrus to the NE., between that point and the Burnt Islands, and where the deep water is only 10:) yards wide. Passing midway through this narrow opening, and with the aid of the chart, rounding the Burnt l8- lands to the north and east, steer between them and Seal Island until the eastern point of Burnt Island comes in one with Heron Point, about S. 52° W. ; then alter course instantly to N. 52° B., keeping the last- named points astern and exactly touching, and they will safely lead th'ough between the Middle Ground and Seal Island, where the chan- nel ia again onlj' 100 yards wide. The Middle Ground is rocky, with 4 feet least water, and when the channel between it and Seal Island is fairly entered, steer half a point more to the northward, N. 46° E., or so as to keep Heron Point only just shut in behind the eastern point of the Burnt Islands, until Gran- digue Point (the land, not the shingle spit) and Hawk Islet are touching, and bearing N. 85° E. Now keep to these last-named marks, and they will lead to the cxooUent anchorage otf the ferry ac Grandigue, where there is room enough for the largest ships in from 5 to 8 fathoms, mud bottom. The long spit of shingle, from which the name is derived, runs out from Grandigue Polut nearly 400 yards across the channel, and shelters the anchorage completely from the eastward. A great part of the spit is covered at high water, but can generally be discerned by the rippliug of the tide. At Grandigue there are extensive gypsum quarries, several tolerable farms, and the ferry by which the mail crosses- the passage on its way to Arichat. The only other danger here is the Ferry Reef, which lies to the NW. of the spit, leaving a deep and clear char n el 400 yards wide. This reef is nearly dry at low water, and very « > 'b in the way here, as it may be said to extend halfway across the 'assage, being separated from the northern shore by a channel so narrow as to be only navigable by boats or very small craft. On the southern edge of this reef, and also on the northern extremity of Grandigue Spit, Birch and Ouetique Islands are just touching, and bearing N. 70° E.; and therefore, to clear the reef, keep Ouetique Island open ; and to clear the spit, partly shut in behind Birch Point. The ship channel, after passing to the southward of the Ferry Reef, turns to the NE., between it and Grandigue Spit, and then around the latter to the east and south, forming a crooked, and, for a stranger, a difficult pass. Approaching the anchorage at Grandigue from the westward, steer with Grandigue Point and Hawk Islet touching, as already directed, until the south point of Cascarette Island opens out a very little to the southward of Birch Island ; and then on this last-named mark, which will lead well clear of the Ferry Reef; and when the Tickle Ohan- mn na^x 180 OUT OF CAN80. nel to the westward of Birch Island comes open, and bears to the northward of N. 21° E., steer towards it antil the southern extremity of Ouetique Island is seen over the beach of Birch Point, bearing N. 710 ^ Run towards the last-named marks till Grandigue Spit is nas8ed,which will be when the west end of Birch Island bears north ; then alter course instantly to SE, or so as to make a direct course towards the middle of the western entrance of Poulanient Bay, and continue on that line until the north ends of Crow and Eagle Islands oomein one; then towards Ouetique Island until the steeple of the chapel at Discousse is in line with the NE. point of Hawk Islet; and lastly, east, or so as to pass Hawk Islet at the distance of 200 or 300 yards The vessel will then have arrived at the comparatively wide and open part of the passage off the eastern entrance of Poulament Bay where she may anchor or proceed to sea. Tides -It is high water, full and change, at Grandigue, in the Len- nox Passage, at 7 h. 55 m.; springs rise 6J feet, neaps 4^ feet. The tidal streams are often irregular, but when not so, change about three- quarters of an hour after high and low water by the shore; the flood coming in from the eastward, they are stronger round the spit at Grandigue than in any other part of the passage, but their rate even there seldom exceeds 2 knots. Gut of Caneo.— The length of the passage through the gut, from the lighthouse on Eddy Point, at the south entrance, is 14^ miles ; and its least breadth, between Balache Point and Cape Porcupine, is 900 yards The depth of water in the channel is seldom less than 15 tatu- oms, and in the deepest part, off Cape Porcupine, it amounts to 3. fathoms. This great depth, the strength of the tides, and tht rocky or gravelly bottom, render the anchorage unsafe, excepting at the places hereafter to be described. Coa8t.-Excepting at Ghost Beach, and for a short distance below Port Hawkesbury, the general character of the shore on either side is high- the land rising from it, more or less abruptly, to the summits ot ridges of considerable elevation. Cape Porcupine, a precipitous head- land on the western shore, 640 feet high above the sea, is the most re- markable feature, and the scenery in its vicinity is of great beauty. There are increasing settlements on either side, especially at the sev- eral anchoring places, where supplies may be obtained. Cape Argos, distant 2i miles to the southward of Eddy Point, will be easily recognized, being a small but high peninsula, bare of wood, with red cliff, and united to the mainland by a low isthmus of shingle. Off the point of cliff next to the north of the cape, and distant ^ mile from it, a reef runs off towards the Argos Shoal, which it so nearly joins as to leave no passage for vessels of large draft. Eddy Point and Flat Head, touching and in line with the east side of a hill behind the latter, bearin" N. 41° W., lead 300 yards to the eastward of these dangers in 7 or 8 fathoms. Flat Head is the NE. point of Bear Cove, and if it be EDDY POINT — PREMIER SHOAL. 181 )ears to the n extremity , bearing N. idigue Spit uears north ; Urect course jut Bay, and agle Islands ;eeple of the j]i Islet ; and >f 200 or 300 •atively wide »f Poulament B, in the Len- li feet. The ) abont three- )re ; the flood 1 the spit at leir rate even the gut, from l^ miles ; and cupine, is 900 than 15fath- mounts to 32 d the rocky or at the places listance below I either side is he summits of icipitous head- is the most re- great beauty, lly at the sev- Jdy Point, will , bare of wood, nus of shingle, distant J mile ; 80 nearly joins Point and Flat ihind the latter, liese dangers in >ve, and if it be wished to pass outside of the Argos Shoal at greater distance, let the above-named marks be kept proportionally open. Eddy Point, the southern point of entrance of the gut, is of sand and gravel, inclosing a small pond. Eddy Spit, of sund and stones, runs out J mile to the NE. from high- water mark on Eddy Point, and is almost always shown by the rippling of the tide. A large black can buoy is moored in 9 fathoms at ihe east- ern extremity of the shoal oflf Eddy Point. Martin Shoal, li^ miles from Eddy Point, is of rock, and extends nearly 350 yards off shore. Melford and Critchet Points in one, bearing N. 01° W., just lead outside its edge in 4 fathoms. Bear Reef has from to 9 feet at low water over large rocks, and extends nearly 300 yards southward from Bear Island. Off" Bear Head also there is shallow water, extending nearly 400 yards to the south- eastward. Great caution should be used in approaching these dangers, for the water is too deep near them for the lead to afford much warning, and there are no good clearing marks. Bank.— Crossing again to the western shore of the gut, at Critchet Cove, there is a shallow bank of mud and sand, on which small vessels frequently anchor, but of which vessels of large draft should beware. Its outer edge, in 5 fathoms, is nearly J mile off shore. The Ship Rock has 6 feet least water, and is distant 4 mile north- ward from Ship Point, and 140 yards off shore. Ship Point and Bear Head in line, bearing S. 63° E. lead only 40 or 50 yards outside of it, and therefore, in standing towards it, tack before the head and point come in line. Cahil Rock lies on the western side of the gut, and is distant J mile to the SE. from Holland Cove, and 120 yards off" shore. It is dry at low water, but becomes dangerous when covered. Roger Point in one with the NE. side of Pirate Island (the latter being seen over the low shingle rock of Pirate Point), and bearing N. 61° W., leads clear outside of it at the distance of 120 yards. The Stapleton Shoal is rocky, and extends from Port Hawkesbury and Staploton Points 300 yards to the westward. At that distance off shore there are only 16 feet at low water, but the depth increases almost immediately to 5 fathoms, the edge of the shoal being very steep. Premier Shoal, of rock and sand,with 13 feet least water, is a middle ground in the entrance of Port Hawkesbury, marked by a can buoy painted red and black in horizontal stripes, moored on the center of the shoal. Vessels may pass on either side of it, but to the northward is the widest and deepest channel. Port Hawkesbury Point and the western extremity of Pirate Island in one, bearing S. 11° VV., will lead clear outside or to the westward of this shoal, in 5 fathofns; therefore, vessels standirg-in towards Port Hawkesbury, or anchoring off" its mouth, should be careful not to shut in the whole of the island behind the point. ■^ i 182 OUT OF CANSO. The Dixon Rock, reported to have only 6 or 8 feet over it at low water, but on which not less thau 12 feet could be found, is distant 140 yards from Makeen Point, and 8. 55° VV. 240 yards from the western point of Port Hastings. This rock is much in the way of vessels ap- proachingor leaving the anchorage off Port Hastings.but will be avoided if the whole of the bridge over the cove be not shut in behind its west- ern point. ' . . „! • *i „ Balache Rock is nearly dry at low tides, but as it is within the line uniting Balache an I Mackeen points, it is not much in the way of vessels. It lies 200 yards eastward of the end of Balache Point, and 100 vards off shore. , , ^ . The Madagascar Rock, dry at low water, lies directly abreast the Balache, and not «iuit < 100 yards off the west shore under the highest part of Cape Porcupine. The rippling of the tide over this rock can m general be seen ; nevertheless its situation, off a projecting point in the narrowest part of the passage, nearly in the full strength of the tide, and at a part celebrat«Hl for -iuddeu flaws ot wind from various direc- tions, renders it extremely dange ous. ANCHORAGES IN GUT OF CANSO. Inhabitants Bay, situated to the northward of the south entrance of the Gut, is about 2^ miles wide at the entrance, between Bear and Turbalton Heads. In addition to Inhabitants Harbor at its bead it contains the following useful anchorages : Seacoal Bay, IJ miles from Bear Head, v^iU be readily known by the high cliffs of Oarleton Head, which forms its NE. point. This spacious anchorage, secure in all winds excepting those from SE., is very convenient for vessels bound in through the Gut, and detained by strong N W. winds. The depth in the mouth of the bay is 5 fathoms, the bottom of mud, and there is no danger in the way. Turbalton Bay is a small but secure anchorage to the northward ot Turbalton Head, and between it and Evans Island, in approaching this anchorage the only danger to be avoided is the reef off Turbalton Head, which is partly dry at low water, and runs out 550 yards to the westward. Janvriu and Peninsula Points in one, bearing S. 41° h., or the two extreme points on the western side of Evans Island in one, bearing north, will just lead clear to the westward of this reet in 4J fathoms. There is no other danger in the way excepting the shallow water extending from the shore on either side, and from the small islets in the bottom of the bay. To avoid the latter, in a vessel of large draft, go no farther in than the line of Turbalton Head and Cape Argos touching where the depth is 4J fathoms at low water. With the cape a little open to the westward of the head the depth is 5 tathoms; in either case the bottom will be of mud, and the reef 'ftriU break off the swell from the southward. ^S'Vii'.ifcii»' rer it at low s distant 140 tlie western t" vessels ftp- II be avoided liud its west- s within the n the way of le Point, and y abreast the r the highest s rock can iu r point in the I of the tide, ?^arious direc- 3uth entrance sen Bear and 3,t its head it lily known by . point. This i from SE., is and detained y is 5 fathoms, ) northward of 1 approaching off Turbalton yards to the 'ing S. 41° E., Island in one, this reef in 4J ig the shallow the small islets 1 of large draft, i Cape Argos With the cape I 5 fathoms; iu 1 break off the INHABITANTS DAY AND HARBOR. Inhabitants Harbor is not at present much frequented, being out of the line of general navigation, but it has space and de))th of water sutticient for a large number and any class of vessels, and is (|uite secure at all seasons. The soutliern side of the harbor is formed by islands inclosing the basin in which vessels might securely winter, but of which a minute account would only confuse a stranger. The channel leading into the harbor, between Long Ledge and Evans Island, is nowhere less than 300 yards wide froui 3 fathoms to 3 fathoms on either side, and carries 10 or 12 fathoms water with mud bottom. Inhabitants River is navigable for vessels by a narrow and winding channel for several miles, while boats cau ascend to the bridge, a dis- tance of 7 miles. There are some good farms on the banks of this river but the shores of tiio harbor are as yet very thinly settled, and present a very barren appearance. There is said to be workable coal at Little River just outside the harbor's mouth. Directions. — To avoid Long Ledge, which is distant about 600 yards from Evans Island, and to run into Inhabitants Harbor far enough for safe anchorage proceed as follows : Approaching from the SW. through Inhabitants Bay, steer so as to pass the west end of Evans Island at a distance of 400 yards, or by the lead in 6 fathoms water, remembering that the bank on either side is very steep for vessels drawing more than 10 feet water. Follow the shore of the island round to the NE., but approaching it at the same time very gradually, so as to pass Steep Head, its northern extremity, at a distance of 200 or 300 yards. Having passed Steep Head the vessel will be in safe arichorage, but she may go farther in without danger by simply keeping in mid-channel as she runs towards Bumbo Island, which will be seen (small, round, with low clay cliffs) bearing N. 61° B., and distant nearly a mile from her track while passing Steep Head as just directed. As the vessel proceeds, the channel betwt-on Round and Freeman Islands, leading into the Basin, will be passed ; and when she has ar- rived within )f mile of Bumbo Island, the main channel between it and Indian Point, and leading into the harbor to the north and east, will appear open, as well as the entrance of Inhabitants River, the entrance to which lies ^ mile to the northward. The shallow water extends 200 yards off Bumbo Island, and the main channel, which, passing to the NW. of it leads into the wide expanse of the harbor to the eastward, may be followed without difficulty with the aid of the chart. It is, however, not necessary to go beyond Bumbo Island for good anchorage, as that may be found everywhere in the channel ; and if the depth of water there be considered inconveniently great, the bight to the south- ward of Bumbo Island, between it and Freeman Island, affords a good berth in a moderate depth of water. Tides. — The tides in this harbor are weak, seldom exceeding a knot in the entrance, where they are strongest. 184 GUT OP CANSO. Pirate Harbor.— The anchorage at this port, although deep enough is inconveniently small for large ships, but safe and good for small ves- sels. The best berth for anything larger than a fishing schooner is in 7 or 8 fathoms, mud bottom, with Pirate Island bearing SE., distant 200 yards. Vessels passing through are reported by telegraph from Pirate Harbor. Pirate Island, small, rocky, and united to the mainland by a beach of shingle, forms the SE. point of Pirate Harbor ; and all within it and a line drawn across to the wharves on the NW. side is dry at low water* excepting a narrow boat channel carrying 3 or 4 feet water, which leads to the bridge across the cove at the head of the port, and about i mile from its entrance. Port Mulgrave.— On the western shore, and nearly opposite to Port Hawkesbury, is an excellent anchorage, especially in NW. winds. The best berth is in 6 or 7 fathoms, with mud bottom, and directly off the mouth of the cove, Macnair Point, in line with Port Hastings, should then be distant about 400 yards. There is a good watering place here» with wharves for landing at all times of the tide ; also a fine settle- ment, near which a small English church has been erected. Port Hawkesbury is a large cove terminated by a bridge nearly a mile in from the sea. It is completely open to NW. winds, which blow directly through the Gut, causing at times a heavy sea, excepting when well in towards the head of the harbor, where the anchorage is quite secure, out of the stream of the tides, and in 3^ fathoms, mud bottom. There is a fine settlement with two chapels on the NE. side of the harbor, a patent slip capable of taking vessels of 1,000 tons, also stores and wharves where vessels may receive repairs, or winter in safety. Anchorage.— The roadstead ofl' the mouth of this harbor, and out- side of the Premier Shoal, is much frequented by vessels detained by SE. winds, but the riding is very rough there in winds from the oppo- site quarter. The depth is from 7 to 9 fathoms, over sand, gravely and mud bottom, and the only direction necessary is to keep Pirate Island in sight to the westward of Port Hawkesbury Point. Steam vessels run twice a week from Pictou to this port. The United States is represented by an agent. Directions.— Vessels of less than 12 feet draft may run in to Port Hawkesbury without difficulty, passing over the Premier Shoal at all times ; but vessels of larger draft should prefer the channel to the north of that danger. Being outside the shoal, bring Cavanagh Point, composed of low sand- stone and sandy beach, on the NE. side of the harbor, to bear S. 63° E., when a large store built on piles, and farther up the harbor, will appear in line with it, and the end of the wharf will be just in sight. Run in with these marks on until Port Hawkesbury Point bears S. 43° W., when the vessel will be within the Premier Shoal, and may sheer to the southward into the middle of the harbor. The channel to the south- m ivi m'rmAmrmi i wtMn t at-^ ^ ^i^^dj^^- fi^u Jaa:-.-*K-!-?i :■- PORT HASTINGS. 186 deep enough or small ves- hooner is in SE., distant iegrayli from d by a beach within it and it low water* , which leads about 4 mile (osite to Port winds. The rectly off the itings, should g place here* El fine settle- d. idge nearly a 3, which blow cepting when orage is quite , mud bottom. E. side of the ns, also stores • in safety, cbor, and out- 8 detained by rom the oppo- l1, gravely and Pirate Island ?t. un in to Port r Shoal at all el to the north id of low sand- bear S. 63° E., or, will appear sight. Run in ws S. 430 W., ay sheer to the 1 to the south- ward of the shoal is neither so deep nor so wide as the other, but it is more convenient for entering the harbor with southerly winds. Port Hastings, on the eastern shore, will be known at ouce by the conspicuous cliffs of white gypsum, which are 120 feet high on the N W. side and a short distance within the bridge near its entrance. The head of the port, which forms a cove, is dry at low water. The town, in addition to the post-office, contains a large and consi)ic- uous telegrai)h office, whence the electric cables cross the Gut to the south shore. Boards of warning not to anchor near the line of the cables are erected on both shores. Anchorage.— The anchorage at Port Hastings is convenient and safe in all winds. In northerly gales the swell, deflected by Cape Porcu- pine, causes rather uneasy riding, but it does not endanger vessels well anchored in a clear berth. The only directions necessary, both for avoiding the Dixon Rock and choosing a good berth, are to keep the cove open, so that the whole of the bridge as well as the white cliffs above it may be seen. Vessels of large draft should keep Balache Point well open, and go no nearer in than 7 or 8 fathoms water ; but smaller vessels may anchor in 4 or 5 fathoms, with mud bottom. The bottom is more and more sandy farther out towards the steep edge of the bank in 10 fathoms, after which it be- comes rocky in the deep water and strength of the tide. Tides.— The tidal streams at the anchorage are eddies, running often irregularly, but generally in a contrary direction to the main stream in the channel, and at a rate seldom exceeding one knot. These eddies render it advisable to moor, especially in large vessels having occasion to remain some time (to water for instance), in which case one anciior should be laid well out to the southward in 9 or 10 fathoms water. Water.— There is an excellent watering place directly opposite Port Hawkesbury, in the bay between Cape Porcupine and Keaton Point. Anchorages.— The other anchorages in the Gut are less secure, either from exposure to particular winds or loose holding ground. On the eastern shore, off Madden Cove, and Doolan Pond, NW. of Bear Island, and east of Bear Head, vessels frequently anchor to wait for wind or tide in fine summer weather ; as they do also at Byers, Oritchet. and Eddy Coves, on the opposite side of the channel. Vessels may anchor for a tide and in fine weather near the lighthouse at the north entrance, and also on the western shore of the Gut oft' Mill Creek, which is another occasional stopping place ; but neither of these can be recommended, since they are both exposed to northerly winds, which often commence suddenly and send in a very heavy sea. More- over, off" Mill Creek irregular eddies render it very difficult to keep an anchor clear. Directions for the Out of Canso.— With the foregoing description of the dangers and anchorages, and the aid of the chart, there will be httle or no difficulty experienced in the passage of the Gut of Canso, 11 »;.. u ! wm iwiiMwroiii^^ 186 GUT OF CAN80. either with a leadiag or a beating Wmd. la the latter case, and wheu bound to the northward into the gulf, the aim should be to gam the anchorage at Port Hastings, and to start from thence with the turn ot the tide, so as to secure a good offing in St. George Bay before the ebb When bound through the Gut to the southward, the distance from Cape George to the light at the north entrance of the Gut is 20J miles. The approach in this direction, through St. George Bay, is unattended with difficulty or danger, excepting when fogs or snowstorms hide from view the light which has been judiciously placed at its northern entrance. The soundings are then the only guides, and they will be toured suffi- cient, iu all ordinary cases, for the safety of vessels prudently coniucted, with their leads going. In vessels so circumstanced the endeavor should be to strike soundings on the bank oil" Long Point, and then to follow its ledge along the shore of Cape Breton Island, in the low water deptU of 10 fathoms, to the entrance of the Gut. It is seldom so thick especially in a breeze of wind, but that some part of the shore will be seen before the vessel has run tar after entering so narrow a strait. With a beating wind, she shouW board oflf and on the same shore, until soundings are struck (iu the board to the westward, and after crossing the deep water), on the edge of the bank off Cape Jack, where, if it be night,and the fog so thick that the lightcan not be8een,orif the tide be nearly done, it will be advisable to anchor, and wait for a change. The ground there is not good, but it is out of the strength of the tides, and an anchor will hold in moderate weather. The anchorage J mile to the SB. of the lighthouse, and on the same side of the channel should be preferred if attainable. There are some spots of mud there, in which an anchor holds well iu 7 to 9 fathoms, and where the strength of the tide is not great. -. ^ ^i n Vessels outward bound, and proceeding through the Gut to the south- ward, very frequently meet a south or SE. wind, with its usual accom- paniments of fog and rain ; iu which case the roadstead off Port Hawkesbury will be found the most roomy and convenient anchorage. Eddy Cove, from its more advanced position at the entrance of the Gut, offers, to vessels sailing with the first of a fair wind, a better chance of clearing Chedabucto Bay and the Canso Ledges before dark ; but it can only be recommended in fine settled summer weather, for the ground is not good, and the anchorage is much exposed on the occurrence of a sudden change of wind. Turbalton Bay is much more secure, but it is rather small for a large and weakly manned vessel to weigh from in the event of a strong wind setting in suddenly from the westward. Tides —Ordinary springs rise 4 feet, neaps 2 feet ; but extraordinary tides may rise 6 or 7 feet, or only 2 feet, owing to the irregular influence of unknown causes; probably strong winds at a distance. The rise and fall of the tides on the shore usually continue through nearly equal periods of time, but the duration of the tidal streams (the flood being a&essSEBSS TIDES — DIRECTIONS. 187 9, ftud when i to gain the 1 the turn of jfore the ebb istance from is 20^ miles. s unattended ras hidt) from eni entrance, e foui'id suffl- ly conducted, ieavor should hen to follow V water depth om so thick shore will be irrow a strait, le shore, until after crossing where, if it be r if the tide be k change. The the tides, and e J mile to the uel should be re, in which an fth of the tide It to the south- 3 usual accom- (tead ofif Port eut anchorage, ice of the Gut, etter chauce of irk; but it can r the ground is ccurrence of a jecure, but it is igh from in the tward. t extraordinary 5gular influence Mice. The rise ;h nearly equal the flood being to the /thward aud the ebb to the southward) varies from one to 4 hours after it is high or low water by the shore, even in the fine weather of summer ; whilst in the blowing weather, so frequent on the approach of winter or in early spring, they are reported to be still more irregular, running at times in the same direction for several days in succession ; but this never occurred during the Admiralty survey. The rate of these streams off Cape Porcupine, where it is most rapid, is ordinarily about i kuots ; but is increased occasionally to 5 knots by strong winds. At most of the anchorages, and under almost every point, there are eddies, usually runniag in the opposite direction to the main streaui outside, but at a much inferior rate, and they render great attentioa necessary to insure a clear anchor. The set of the flood stream from the north entrance of the Gut is nearly towards Gape St. George, diminishing rapidly in strength as it expands in advancing to the northward. It is weak in the western part of St. George Bay, sweeping roand it to the NW., with slight indraughts towards Pomquet, Antigouish, etc. The ebb stream will be found set- ting in the contrary direction. On the eastern side of St. George Bay the flood stream from the Gut is usually met by a much weaker and contrary stream of flood, coming from the NE., along the west coast of Cape Breton. These opposing flood streams will be found, in general, to unite somewhere off the Judique Shoals, and then to set towards the N W. The two correspond- ing ebb streams as generally diverge from about the same place ; the one setting towards the Gut, with increasing strength, as it proceeds to the southward, and the other in the contrary direction, towards Port Hood. All, however, that has been said respecti ng these streams must be understood as of usual, aud not of constant occurrence, since they must recessarily partake of the irregularity in the strength and dura- tion of the tidul streams of the Gut of Canso. Nevertheless, it will be highly useful, and may materially aid the progress of the vessel, to bear in mind the usual set of these streams. St. Q-eorge Bay is of great extent, being 13^ miles wide at entrance, between Cape St. George and Henry Island, and 20 miles deep, from the same cape to tlie Gut of Oanso. It is traversed by all the uumer- ons vessels which pass in or out of the Gulf by its southern entrance, and heuce its navigation assumes a more than usual degree of nautical importance. Anchorage. — Malf a mile to the SE. of the lighthouse at the north entrance, and on the same side of the Gut, tnere is tolerable anchorage in all but northerly winds. Vessels frequently stop there to wait tide. Havre Bouche is a small but convenient harbor for schooners, lying between Cape Jack aud the lighthouse at the north entrance. It has 4 teet at low wat^er in its narrow entrance between stony points, hav- ing no bar outside, and 13 or 14 feet within. There is a small stieam at its head. The shores and neighl^orliood are well cultivated, aud the 188 ST. GEORGE BAY. church will be seen near the shore, and a mile to the westward of the entrance, or half way towards Cape Jack. Jack Shoal.— Cape Jack, a clift' of red sandstone 45 feet high, is the most prominent headland on this part of the coast. Jack Shoal runs out from the cape one mile to 3 fathoms water, and IJ miles to 5 fathoms. Between the distances of J and i mile off shore there are two large patches of rock, which dry at half tide, leaving a passage carry- ing 11 or 12 feet water for small craft between them and the cape. Caution.— The Jack Shoal has often proved dangerous to vessels in thick weather, when it should be approached with great caution, espe- cially from the eastward, the soundings on that side being irregular and deep near the shoal, but nevertheless q ate sufficient to insure safety if the lead be kept going. On the outer point of the shoal, in 3 fathoms, the lighthouse at the north entrance of the Gut of Canso bears S. 720 E. 34 miles. If the light can not be seen the shoal should not be approached nearer than the low water depth of 10 fathoms. Little Tracadie Harbor has only one foot at low water over its bar. Its entrance is in the bay between Barrio Head and Cape Blue, the former being a cliflf of red sandstone 110 feet high; the latter remark- able from being of limestone, and sheltering the entrance from NE. winds. The inhabitants of these small harbors, including Poraquet, are Acadians, of French extraction, who live principally by agriculture. Tracadie Harbor, 3J miles eastward of Pomquet Island, has its narrow entrance about J mile to the eastward of Bowman Head. It is extensive, and has 14 feet water in some parts within, with many coves, islets, and small streams, the principal of which, called Tracadie River, is at the head of the eastern arm, 2^ miles In firom the sea. The depth over its dangerous bar of gravel and stones is only 2 feet at low water, in a narrow and crooked channel; it therefore admits only boats or very small vessels at high water. The village of Tracadie and the church are situated about a mile within the entrance. The church is large and can be seen from a great distance out at sea. Pomquet Road.— Poraquet Island is of red sandstone, low, wooded, about i mile long, and is joined by a reef to Poraquet Point, from which it is distant 350 yards. The reef dries out from the point more than half way over towards the island, and leaves a passage with only 3 or 4 feet in it at low water. Pomquet Road is considered safe during the summer montlis, but where the riding must be very heavy in NB. gales is in the bay be- tweeu Pomquet Point and Little River, which last admits boats only at high water, and with its church and settlement will be seen to the southward at the distance of a mile from the island. Anchorage.-Vessels may anchor in any depth from 3 to 6 fathoms over sandy bottom, but the best sheltered berth is in 4 fathoms at low water, with the south point of the island bearing N. 7° W., distant J mile. BOWMAN BANK — ANTIGONISH HARBOR. 189 stward of the ► feet high, is Jack Shoal IJ miles to 5 ) there are two massage carry - the cape. IS to vessels in caution, espe- »eing irregular ieut to insure the shoal, in 3 ; of Oanso bears oal should not ;homs. ;er over its bar. Dape Blue, the latter remark- ince from NE. ding Pomquet, by agriculture. Island, has its an Head. It is ith many coves, Tracadie River, lea. The depth et at low water, s only boats or •acadie and the The church is lie, low, wooded, [)int,from which point more than ;e with only 3 or ner months, but 8 in the bay be- imits boats only 11 be seen to the m 3 to 6 fathoms I fathoms at low 7° W., distant J Directions.— To run for this anchorage from the northward pass the eastern shore of Pomquet Island at the distance of J mile, or in not less than 8 fathoms water, until Pomquet Point comes in sight to the southward of the island, when haul to the westward into the bay. The Bowman Bank must be avoided in approaching from the east- ward, either by the lead or by not bringing the north point of the is- land to bear to the westward of S. 43° W. until the north point of the bank is passed. The bank is of great extent, running off fully 2 miles to the northward from Quarry Point and Bowman Head, and has rocky patches on it, with 13, 16, and 19 feet at low water, at various dis- tances, from 5 to 1^ miles off shore. Pomquet Banks lie off Pomquet Island to the northward, distant from 3 to 6 miles. The soundings on them are rociiy and irregular, the least water, 6 fathoms, being on the outer and smaller of the two banks, with the church at the Little River shut in behind the east side of the island, bearing S. 3° E. 5^ miles. Pomquet Harbor has its narrow entrance at the eastern extremity of a range of low sandhills and sand beach, 2| miles from Monk Head, and in the bay between it and Pomquet Point. It is an extensive place, branching into two principal and many smaller inlets, coves, and islets. It is navigable for small craft and boats nearly 3 miles in from the sea, but it is of no use to shipping, having usually only a depth of 2 feet at low water over its shifting bar of sand. The principal settle- ments and the church are on the western shore of the NW. arm, and the Indians have a chapel and a reservation of land on the eastern and larger branch, at the head of which is Pomquet River, a small stream (1860). Monk Head is a cliff of gypsum 45 feet high, 2f miles from the en- trance of Antigonish Harbor. A rocky bank, with 3 fathoms least water, extends oiT it ^ mile to the eastward, and there are no more than ^ fathoms at double that distance from the shore. Antigonish Harbor, at 11 miles to the southward of Cape St. George, is nearly 200 yards wide at the entrance, between low points of sand,' from which a dangerous bar extends to the distance of J mile. The bar and the deep water up the harbor are marked by spar buoys on either side. The bar has a depth of 6 feet at low water, but both the depth and direction of the very narrow channel are said to change occasionally. The anchorage oft' the bar (rock) is not good, and would be quite unsafe in a gale from the NE. The Harbor is of great extent, running in 6 or 7 miles to the SW. ; the channel, between flats of mud and weeds, having in some places 6 or 6 fathoms water. There are flourishing farms on either side, and the village of Antigonish, containing about 1,500 inhabitants, stands at the head of the western arm, distant 6J miles from the entrance. Oypsum abounds here, forming, with lumber and the produce of an in- I 190 ST. GEORGE BAY. T creasing agriculture, the cargoes of the schooners which frequent the harbor. The United States is represented by an agent. Tides.— Northerly winds cause high tides, and southerly winds the contrary. The rate of the tides in the entrance seldom exceeds 2 knots, unless it may be in spring after the melting of the winter's snow. Maclsaac Rock, with 9 feet least water, is the center of a small de- tached shoal, distant nearly 600 yards from the shore, between Mac^ Isaac Point and a remarkable patch of white gypsum cliff. This rock, ^vhich is the only danger on the west side of St. George Bay, bears trom the gypsum patch N. 49° E. § mile ; it is distant 2J miles to the north- ward of the entrance of Antigonish, and is shown occasionally by heavy breakers. , ,, , .. Cape St aeorge, the NW. point of this bay, is a bold and precipi- tous headland, composed principally of slate, conglomerate, and trap rocks, attaining the elevation of 600 feet above the sea. The sha low water does not extern^ off it beyond i mile, but as there is a depth of 20 fathoms at double that distance, the lead affords but little warning, and it should therefore be approached with caution in thick weather. A new church has been built to the westward of the lighthouse, form- ing a useful land mark. Off Ballantyne Cove, on the eastern side of the cape, there is an anchorage in westerly winds, but the ground is not very good. •MlHs 1 1 n itirti i ! v.uiw * M ii *tn [^^i ^ llKV»X^lf:- '' V ' - ' T frequent the man >rly winds the ceeds 2 knots, r's snow, of a small de- between Mac- ff. This rock, ay, bears from 3 to the north- lally by heavy d and precipi- tate, and trap The shallow e is a depth of little warning, thick weather, hthoase, form- tern side of the ground is not CHAPTE R VII. NORTHUMBERLAND STRAIT, CAPE ST. GEORGE TO MIRAMIOHI BAY. The Coast from Cape St. George to Merigomish Harbor is bold and free from danger. The land, rising from the sea to the sum- mit of a ridge 2 or 3 miles iu rear of and parallel to the coast line, is well settled, the cultivation extending occj sionally to the summit of the ridge, which attains the extreme elevation of 1,100 feet above the sea. Malignant Cove has a small stream at its head, affording good land- ing for boats, and will be known by the Sugar Loaf Hill, a mile in rear of it, and 680 feet high above the sea. There is no harbor in this distance, the wooden pier at the village of Arisajg affording shelter only to boats and shallops in easterly winds, but none in winds from between north and west. The remarkable rock called the Baiii lies nearly a mile to the east- ward of this pier, and J mile NE. from Arisaig church. Merigomish Harbor is so intricate and difficult of entrance that no directions would enable a stranger to take his ship in safely, and the northerly winds send in so heavy a sea over the bar that to get on shore going in would probably be attended with the loss of the vessel. The outer entrance of the harbor (f mile wide) is between King Head and Merigomish Point, the latter being the west extreme of Merigomish Island. The bar is formed by rocky shoals running out from these points of entrance f mile to the northward. The channel over the bar, and leading in from it between the shoals, is more than 200 yards wide ; but the shoals are so steep that the lead affords little guidance, and there are no leading marks. The course running in is at first to the southward, and then by a sharp turn to theeastward close past Savage Point (the sandy spit at the SW. extreme of Merigomish Island) into the harbor. This inner entrance of the harbor, between Savage Point and the east end of Olding Island, is about i mile wide, but the navi- gable breadth is reduced to 100 yards by the shoal off Olding Island, and the tides frequently run there at the rate of 5 miles an hour. This harbor is seldom visited by anything larger than a coasting schooner. The pilots are therefore incompetent from want of practice and the channel is no longer buoyed as it used to be formerly. The harbor is of great extent, running in 5 or C miles to the eastward, within Merigomish Island and the sandbar which joins it to the mainland, 191 iw •: ! I" 192 CAPE 8T. GEORGE TO MIRAMICHI BAY. and also 4 miles to the westward, up a bay full of islands, coves and precipitous headlands. Several small streams enter the harbor, of whTch French River, opposite the east end of Olding Island, is the prin- Tipal It IS approached by a very narrow channel, through flats of mud and weeds, and can be ascended by boats to the bridge, about a mile "Meri^omiriri^^ 3i miles long andl^ miles broad, is of clay and sa^stone, belonging to the coal formation, rising t- thejietght of^l50 feet above the sea. Thin Hcams of coal may be seen at Coa loint, whlre the cliffs, which form the northern shore of the island, are 35 feet high. Its southern shore is broken intx, coves, chfty islets, and peninsulated points similarly to the western part of the harbor A sandbar 2J miles long unites the island to the mainland to the east- ward, excepting in unusually high tides, when the water washes over one part of it into the harbor. • „ . . . -,^ . Tidee-It is high water, full and change, at Betty Point in Men. Romish Harbor at lOh. 6m.; springs rise 5i feet, neaps 3i feet, but the diurnal inequality is strongly marked here, as ^ » »« «f f «f "' f ^""^ ing a considerable difference in the times and the heights of the two tides on the same day. /.^i„„i,«„r. Little Harbor.-In the shoal bay between Evans and Oolquhoun Points, which are distant 5 and 6J miles, respectively, from the light- houso n Pictou Harbor, are two narrow, dangerous, and intricate chan- „e s leading through shoals Into Little Harbor. Of these channels the eaten and best turns sharp in to the eastward withinRoy Island, and close round the sandy spit at its SW. extreme. The other has only a foot or two water, and leads into the western part of the harbor, which s several miles in extent, and broken into bays, coves, and picturesque points, but only at for boats, being nearly all dry at low water, except- ing the narrow channels. ^is+u^ Roy Ledge, a small, rocky shoal, with 9 feet least water, lies off the nort^shorrof Roy Island, at the distance of 700 y^^ds and| mUe K 730 W. from Colquhoun Point. There is also a reef of sandstone, in great part dry at low water, running out from Colquhoun Poi-.t J mile to the eastward 5 and as all these dangers have 5 fathoms water close to them, vessels should be careful not to stand into less than 6 fathoms ftlon? this part of the coast. . ,. , ^, The Rowing BuU, distant 4 miles to the eastward of the lighthouse in Pictou MK»r, is the cliffy north point (with a remarkable red patch on it) of a small peninsula, united to the mainland at its western end by a sandv beach, and having at the other extremity the gully or en^ trance to'ohance Harbor, dry, or nearly so, at low water. A reef of sandstone runs out to the NE. from the Roaring Bull, 600 yards to the 3-fathom line of soundings. u^..^ «f Pictou Harbor, in every respect the finest on the southern shore of the gulf, derives additional importance from the coal mines, valuable Jjigg. PICTOU. 198 8, coves, and le harbor, of d, is the prin- h flats of mud about a luile is of clay and height of 150 t Coal Point, island, are 35 fly islets, and le harbor. A il to the east- r washes over ?oint, in Meri- J feet, but the b Pictou, cans- lits of the two ,nd Colquhoun rom the light- intricate chan- 86 channels the toy Island, and her has only a ) harbor, which ,nd picturesque • water, except- kter, lies off the J, and 5 mile N. >f sandstone, in an Poiriii J mile nis water close than 6 fathoms • the lighthouse •kable red patch its western end the gully or en- ater. A reef of 600 yards to the outhern shore of mines, valuable quarries of building stone, and finely settled country in its neighbor- hood. It is situated at the bottom of a bay, which is 1^ miles wide at its entrance, from Logan Point to Mackenzie Head, and 1^ miles deep. Mackenzie Head will be recognized by its sharp-pointed cliff of clay and sandstone 40 feet high, with a small white house on the edge, and by its bearing S. 24° W. from Logan Point. Fictou stands on the north shore of the harbor, 2 miles within the lighthouse, on the declivity of a ridge, which rises to the height of 200 feet above the sea, at a short distance in rear of the town. A spur from this ridge forms Battery Point, which shelters the place from the east winds. On Town Point has been built the customhouse, a new brick building faced with stone, and having a square tower at its south ex- treme. The most conspi -'ous of the new public buildings is the Koman Catholic Church, a red brick edifice with a spire, situated near the summit of the eminence to the eastward of the toAiWMa» l8 ee a«3e8«aa,-«^ PICTOU — DIRKCTI0N8. 195 •ry the depth 118 occur sev- 1 Pictou. rer, owing its ler up and to considerable p when light ) supply the ig place is on h ; and there rer. , 1^ cents per 1 ; outward, 6 ler ton. Pilot- ge if services 1, Oatward. I $4.00 ► 6.00 ) 8.00 ) 9.00 ) 10.00 ) 11.00 ) 12.00 d. gyrard. I immediately. aled outside by part, able and sels. eice consul, diameter, with lud the shallow not attempt to Caribou and irds to the east- in line with the y S. 68° W. will long J mile to fathoms, trends lole bay on that onsiderable dis- Kreen Mackenzie )11 Point, is Boat Harbor, the entrance of an extensive inlet or lake, full of mud and weeds, and which boats can traverse only when the tide is in. On the opposite or rorthern side reefs extend off Lo|.'an Point to the east and SE., a long ^ mile to the 3-fathom line of soundings. Cole Point, which is of clay and sandstone cliff 30 feet high, and lies a short mile farther in or to the SW. from Logan I'oint, has also a reef stretching out to the eastward if mile, and the shallow water contin. ues from it westward to the commencement of Loudon Beach on the north side of the entrance of the harbor. Pictou Bar and Road. — The distance across the harbor's month from the li^'.'^honse on the sandy spit to Loudon Beach is about 400 yards, and tliC greatest depth is 7 fathoms water; but the channel over the bar is much narrower, and has besides a turn in it, which, together with the necessity of knowing exactly the set of the tides, renders a pilot indispensable in a large ship. After passing the bar the depth will increase to 5, 6, and 7 fathoms, sand. Directions. — To enter Pictou Harbor by day, having a fair wind, and being further out than Mackenzie Shoal, the position of which has been pointed out, bring the tower of the custom-house in line with the north extreme of the lighthouse embankment, bearing S. G9° W. This will lead north of Mackenzie Shoal and south of the bank off the marine hospital as far as the bar, until the first two trees south of Boariug Bull Point are in line with the base of the cliff at Mackenzie Head, bearing S. 79° E. These marks in line will lead over the bar in a depth of 19 feet, the deepest water at low- water springtides. When the north ex- treme of Moodie Point (the first point on the south side within the light- house) opens out to the northward of the Sandy Spit, haul to the westward, at first towards the SW. extreme of London Beach, and afterwards so as to pass midway between it and the Sandy Spit into the harbor. By night — Vessels entering the harbor should follow the usual course, by keeping the Pictou Bar light in line (S. 69° W.) with the light on the custom-house, until reaching the alignment of the Eraser's Farm range (north side of entrance), which should then be held on aN. 82° W. course until Pictou Bar light is brought nearly abeam, whence a course S. 62° W. will lead to safe anchorage in the harbor. A pilot would be indispensable in a vessel of large draft with beating winds, and even smaller vessels must know the tides and the place well to beat in or out with safety. Tides. — With a good tide it is possible to carry 25 feet over the bar and 23 feet may generally be reckoned upon ; the harbor, therefore, is capable of admitting vessels of large draft, but it must be remembered that the best of the two tides is always spoken of in the 24 hours, for the diurnal inequality, iif-the rise of the tides, which occurs more or less in all parts of Northumberland Strait, is very strongly marked in this harbor. It may also be added that in the month of August, when the 'W"iMJ": ' U^ s&.';?v> i»«r- 196 CAPF ST. OEOROE TO MIRAMICIII BAY. observations were made, the a. m. tides were always the highest, follow- ing the inferior transit of the moon with north declination in the first part of the lunation, and the superior transit with south declination in the latter part. Fictou Island is of clay and sandstone, rising In the central parts to the extreme height of 15U feet above the sea. It in wooded on the northern side, but there are settlements and farms along its southern shore. Low cliffs form its outline with the exception of several small bays, and Kogcr Point, on the south side, which is of sand and afl'ords the liest landing for boats. West Point nuiy be ptissed in 3 fathoms water within ^ mile ; but on either side of the west end of the island there are rocks, nearly dry at low water, just within the 3 fathoms line and extending to the dis- tance of GOO yards off shore. The shallow water runs out occasioualls' to the same distance off the north shore of the island, which should not be approached nearer than the depth of ut turn and a tide of 4 kiiotH render so narrow a channel extremely diflicult. Outside the entrance the channel between the shoals becomes wider, and the depth diminishes gradually out to the bar at the distance of a mile, and over which only 9 feet can be carried at low water. The great superiority of the neighboring harbor of Pictou renders it in the highest degree unlikely that ever this har- bor will be much freipiented by shipiting ; and its bar and entrance are too difficult and dangerous to be attempted without some special object, and then a pilot should be employed. Widow Point, the south or main- land point of entrance of the harbor, is of sand and shingle; and Oak- Tree Point, a steep clay bank, with a house and barn upon it, is the first point of the mainland within the entrance, from which it is distant ^ mile. Directions. — To enter Caribou Harbor, — having a fair wind, and be- ing in not less than 5 fathoms water, — bring the high-water extremes of Widow and Oak-Tree Points in one, bearing west, and run towards them, till the vessel has passed the bar in the low-water depth of 9 feet, and has deepened to 13 or 14 feet. Then look out when Caribou and DoctorPointscoiueinoue, bearing N. 37°W., when sheer immediately to the northward, suHiciently to bring Oak-Tree Point and Doctor Spit in one, bearing S. 86° W. Keep the last-named marks accurately in one, or closely touching, until the vessel is not more than 60 yards from the end of the spit, when sheer to the SW. so as to pass its south ex- treme at the same distance into the harbor. The channel, for the first J mile in from the entrance, is not more than 180 yards wide, the tide is stronger there, and the bottom not quite so good as farther in, where the channel expands to 260 yards in wid » h, with a depth of from 4 to 7 fathoms over mud ' o«-tom. Tides. — The diunial inequality causes at times a difference of nearly 2 hours in the two tides of the same day, and also several feet in the height of the water. The rise of the highest of the two ordinary spring tides of the same day is feet, and of neap tides 4 feet. Caribou Channel. — The safest mode of running through this chan- nel to the westward is to strike soundings in 6 or 7 fathoms on the edge of the shoal water off Doctor Island, and follow it to the NW. until Mackenzie Head is just shut in behind Logan Point, bearing 8. 18° E. Then steer from those marks, keeping the head just shut in, and they will lead across the deep water, and afterwards along the western edge of the Pictou Island bank out to sea. If the wind were strong from the SW. with an ebb tide, it would be preferable to keep on the weather side of the channel, in which case the edge of the fi: '!! 1 198 CAPE ST. GEORGE TO MIRAMICHI RAY. shoal water off Doctor Island should be followed farther to the NW. until Logan Point is only a little open to the eastward of Doctor Point. Those points in one lead along the east side of Caribou Reef, and in 4 fathoms water. Keep Logan Point a little open, and it will lead clear out to sea in not less than 4J fathoms. The same marks and directions, taken in reverse order, will enable a vessel to take this channel from the northward o. westward, it being only necessary to add that she should not haul to the eastward until the Hawksbill is well shut in behind Caribou Point, nor open out the former again after having shut it in, until the lighthouse at Pictou is open to the southward of Cole Point ; the lighthouse and Cole Point in line, bearing S. 44° W., being the mark for clearing the south extreme of the Pictou Island bank in 5 fathoms. Caribou Reef, of large stones, which dry out to the distance of 600 yards from the shore, is very dangerous, the deep water approaching nearly close to its north point and eastern side. It stretches out from Caribou Point to the northward 4 mile to the 3-fathoms and § mile to the 5-fathoms line of soundings. Doctor Island lies to the southward of Caribou Point, forming two entrances into Caribou Harbor, of which the northern, between two sandy spits, is 800 yards wide, but has only 4 feet in it at low water. Doctor Reef, also very dangerous, extends from Doctor Point to the eastward IJ miles, to the depth of 3 fathoms, and shows rocks dry at low water to the distance of i mile. To the southward of this reef, and % mile SB. from Doctor Point, lie the Seal Kocks, dry at low tide. The CoastfromWest Gully of Caribou toCape John,is nearly straight, unbroken, and free from danger, the shoal water nowhere extending beyond }^ mile off shore. Cliffs of clay and sandstone, not exceeding the height of 50 feet, and in general much lower, form the predomina- ting feature; but there is, nevertheless, good landing for boats almost everywhere in fine weather. From the Caribou Point to West Gully» tne coast is formed by the northern shore of Caribou Island, appearing from a distance like several islands; but on a nearer approach the wooded parts are found to be joined together by sand bars. Amet Sound is very extensive, affording excellent anchorage for any number and class of vessels. MuUegash Point and Cape John, its western and eastern points of entrance, are more than 4 miles apart, but there are detached dangers outside, or off the entrance, which re- quire to be described before directions can be given for entering by either of the three channels which they form. Amet Isle is very small, and is divided into two parts, of which the western is the largest, presenting clay cliffs on every side, excepting where they are joined together by a sandy neck. It is flat at top, bare of trees, covered with a coarse grass, and about 20 feet above the sea at high water. This islet was formerly much larger than at present, and the cliffs to the NW. d of Doctor Jaribou Reef, 1, and it will will enable a ^ard, it being istward until open out the e at Pictou is Cole Point in outh extreme stance of 600 approaching ches out from and % mile to lie southward rbor, of which , but has only >r Point to the s rocks dry at this reef, and low tide. early straight, ere extending uot exceeding he predomina- r boats almost ,0 West Gully* md, appearing approach the rs. anchorage for Cape John, its 4 miles apart, mce, which re- ar entering by 3, of which the side, excepting [at at top, bare above the sea t, and the cliffs AMET SOUND. 199 still continue to be undermined by every heavy gale and high tide ; the frosts also aid in the work of destruction, so that the time can not be very distant when thei-e will only remain a reef of the highly inclined sandstone which at present forms the base of the islet, and dries out to the distance of about 400 yards, excepting on the southern side, where boats can generally land at all times of tide (1860). Shallow water ex- tends off the islet 600 yards to the westward, and will be c!eared in not less than 3^ fathoms, if the English church steeple at the river John be not shut in behind the western side of Cape John ; bat vessels of large draft should stand in only to 6 fathoms, remembering that in every other direction shallow water extends from the island to far greater distances. The Amet Shoals are rocky with very irregular soundings. They extend nearly 4 miles from the islet to the eastward, and also to the SE. 2 miles towards Cape John. In both directions there are rocky patches, with no more than 5 or 6 feet water, a long mile out from the islet; at a greater distance than 2 miles there are uot less than 16 feet, but there is a patch with that depth fully 3 miles to the eastward of the islet. To clear the extreme east end of the shoal in a greater depth than 4 fathoms. Cape John must bear to the westward of S. 34° W. The northern side of these shoals is very steep, and should not be approached in a large ship, especially at night, to a less depth than 10 fathoms. Treen Bluff and Saddle Island touching, and bearing S. 84° W., lead along the southern side in 2| fathoms, but if kept distinctly open will clear it in 3^ fathoms. Waiigh Shoal, which from its position and steepness is extremely dangerous, is a rocky bank, nearly IJ miles long and J mile broad, with irregular soundings from 2 to 5 fathoms. It should not be approacbed from the northward nearer than the depth of 7 fathoms, but in all other parts vessels may approach to 5 fathoms at low water. The NE. side is just cleared in 5 and 6 fathoms, by the western side of Cape John and the English, church steeple at the river John in lim?, bearing S. 4S° E. The SE. side is cleared in 4 fathoms, by the eastern ex- tremes of Mullegash and Chamber Points in one, bearing S. UP W. All these objects will easily be made out excepting Chamber Point, which, being very low, is at timea difficult to distinguish from the high land behind it. The Ea8:t8rn Passage into the sound, between the Amet Shoals and Cape John, is ^ mile wide, from 3 fathoms to 3 fathoms water on either side, with irregular soundings from 3^ to 6 fathoms, and with rock, red sand, broken shells, and mud bottom. It is difficult to carry more than 4 fathoms through at low water. To safely take this passage from tlie eastward with a fair wind, bring Cape John to bear to the westward of S. 34° W., or bring that cape and Brul^ Point to touch, bearing S. 40° W., and steer for them till Treen Bluff" opens to the southward of Saddle Island, when alter course L^ 'I If I Si* 5 i t' 200 CAPE 8T. GEORQE TO MIRAMICHI BAY. to 8. 62° W., which is for the mouth of Tataniagouche Bay, and the vessel will sail nearly through the middle of the passage. There will be no danger from the Amet Shoals if Treen Bluflf be kept open to the southward of Saddle Island; nor yet from the shallow water off Cape John, if it be not approached nearer than the depth of 4 fathoms, or at the utmost 3^ fathoms. The Middle Passage into Amet Sound between the Waugh Shoal and Amet Islet is a long mile wide, and carries 6 to 10 fathoms water, with sand and mud bottom. An excellent leading mark for running through this passage with a fair wind is Conn's house and Brul6 Point in line, hearing S. 9° E. The Western Passage, between Saddle Island and reef and the Waugh Shoal, is a mile wide, with irregular soundings from 5 to 8J fath- oms, the lesser depth being to the southward of Waugh Shoal, where the bottom is rocky and uneven,. whilst farther westward it is of mud. If bound to Brul«5 Harbor, after rounding Saddle Eeef, steer for Brul6 Point, or a little to the east of it, until the mark for clearing the NE. side of the Brul<5 Shoals, namely, the English church steeple in the John River, a little open to the northward of Long Point comes on ; then alter course, and run towards those marks till Brul6 Point bears S. 340 W., when haul in to the southward, and run by the lead along the SE. side of the Brul6 Shoals in from 3J to 3J fathoms, until the anchorage is reached. A pilot, or a previous buoying of the channel, would be necessary to take the vessel into the harbor. If bound to the anchorage off the bar of the river John, it is only necessary to run up the middle of John Bay till the water shoals to 3J fathoms, which is as near as a large ship should go, although distant 1 J miles from the river's mouth. Tides.— The tidal streams are very weak within the sound, setting regularly up the bays and rivers. In the Western Passage both tides in general set fairly through, the flood about west, and the ebb about east, at rates never exceeding IJ knots, and usually much less. In the Middle Passage the ebb sets out to the northward and eastward less than a knot, and the flood to the westward at the same rate over Waugh Shoal. Ill the Eastern Passage the ebb sets out to the NB., and the flood in tlie opposite direction, the rates varying ftom a half to 1^ knots. John Bay runs in nearly 4 miles to the SE. ftom Cape John to Murphy Point, which is the sandy east point of entrance of the river. The bay is free from detached dangers, but the shoals extending out from its shores are often very steep, and should not be approached nearer than the low- water depth of 3^ fathoms, nor without due can- tioa. Sandy shoals o.'oupy the head of the bay, drying out nearly i mile, and extending IJ miles from the entrance of the river to the 3-fatlioms line. Cape John, the northern point of John Bay, will be easily recog- nijsed by its sharp pointed cliffs of sandstone 40 or 50 feet high ; and BRUL^ HARBOR AND SHOALS. 201 Bay, and the 5. There will >t open to the tter off Gape fathoms, or at (Vaugh Shoal ithoms water, : for running d Brul6 Point reef and the tn 5 toS^fath- Shoal, where it is of mud. eef, steer for ir clearing the 1 steeple in the int comes on ; Point bears S. lead along the ms, until the f the channel, hn, it is only ir shoals to 3^ ugh distant 1^ sound, setting age both tides :he ebb about hless. In the eastward less teoverWaugh I NE., and the ilf to 1^ knots. Gape John to le of the river, extending out )e approached thout due can- g out nearly J e river to the 5 easily recog- 'eet high ; and by two high rocks, always above water, on the inner part of the reef, which extends from it 800 yards to the NW. This reef is very steep, especially at its western point, where there are nearly 7 fathoms at low water quite close to it, being a greater depth than occurs anywhere else near. Off the northern side of the cape shallow water extends nearly ^ mile, and as there are only 15 or 16 feet close within the S-fathoms mark, large vessels should not approach uearei than the low- water depth of 4 or 3^ fathoms. The river John has only one foot at low water over its bar of sand, and an irregular depth, from 3 to 11 feet, in a very narrow channel up to the bridge, a distance of nearly a mile. Several new ships are built here annually, and notwithstanding the shallow bar, are taken out Mght and moored outside to take in cargoes of lumber which are brought down the river. The vessels lie off the entrance in from 2J to 3^ fathoms, over mud bottom; and although the bay is completely open to the NW., are considered safe in the summer months. There are extensive and flourishing settlements on either side of this river. The English church will be known by its spire, about J mile to the eastward of the bridge ; and the chapel by its cupola, on the opposite or westeru bank, J mile from the bridge towards the river's mouth. Bruld Peninsula. — Brul6 Peninsula is wooded, rather low, and united to the mainland at its SW. end by a low and marshy isthmus. Pen- insula Point, its NW. extreme, has a reef extending from it 800 yards to the NW., in great part dry at low water, and so bolu that therf is little warning by the lead. Brule Point is ij miles farther to the east- ward, the intermediate northern shore of the peninsula being nearly straight, and of clay cliffs 8 or 10 feet high, the whole appearing to a vessel in the otSug like a low island in the center of Amet Sound. The Brul6 Shoals, extending 1^ miles to the north from Brul6 Point, are rocky with irregular soundings, and there is only 9 feet water not far from their outer edge. The north and NW. sides of these shoals should be approached very cautiously, for they are there extremely sceep, having 4 or 5 fathoms close to the edge, and no good clearing mark. The English church steeple at the river John just open to the northward of Long Point, bearing S. 70° E., leads along their NE. side in 3 fathoms ; their east and SE. sides may safely be approached by the lead to 3^ fathoms. Brule Harbor runs in within Brul6 Peninsula, 2^ miles, in a SW> direction, and is nearly a mile wide, but the far greater part of this large space is occupied by flats of mud and weeds. There are 14 feet on the bar at low water, and 11) feet for a short distance within, but the channel soon becomes very narrow and divided into several branches. Anchorage. — The anchorage outside the bar, in 3^ fathoms, mud bottom, is the best sheltered of any in the sound, and a ship or two usually lie there to take in lumber every year. In the best berth Brul6 is a 202 CAPE ST. GEORGE TO MIRAMICHI BAT. Point Will bear N. 66° W. with the eastern end of Saddle Island show- ing open one point to the right of it, and Gape John N. 22° E. Barachois Harbor, between Chamber and Peninsula Points, is the entrance to a sniull harbor called the Barachois, which runs in, within Chamber Point, SW. 1^ miles, and is then contracted to a very nar- row channel turning to the SE. into a shallow lake one mile long, with steep banks and an island at its head. This place, which is seldom visited by shipping, has 12 feet over its bar, and 14 feet within at low water. Tatamagouche Bay, 2^ miles wide at entrance, between MuUegash Point and Brul6 Peninsula, runs in 7 miles to the westward, aiiordiug everywhere good anchorage over a bottom of soft mud, but with insuffi- cient depth of water for large ships far up the bay. A stranger may safely approach to the low-water depth of 3 fathoms in the outer part of the bay, and to 2^ fathoms farther in, but in entering should keep well over to the northward to avoid the BruI6 Shoals. Anchorage. — In 4 fathoms, good holding ground (mud), with Cape Tohn N. 65° E., Mullegash Point N. 47° W. Tatamagouche River, in the SW. corner of Tatamagouche Bay, and 5 miles from its entrance, is approached by a very narrow channel through the flats, obstructed by oyster beds, and only one foot deep at low water, in ordinary spring tides; nevertheless new ships of consider- able burden are brought down it occasionally. The principal settlement in the bay, containing Mr. Campbell's shipbuilding establishment, and a chapel, stands on the western bank, and there is a bridge 2 miles from the entrance of the river. Several vessels visit this river for lumber every year; they anchor off it where there are only 11 or 12 feet at low water, and are suffered to ground on the soft mud, as the tide falls, without injury. Tatamagouche and Mullegash are now large villages. Mullegash Point, the north point of Tatamagouche Bay, is one mile to the southward of Saddle Island; shallow water extends from the one to the other, and off the point to the distance of a long i mile. Saddle Island is low, wooded, and joined to the shore by shoals at low water. Saddle Reef runs out from the east point of the island one mile to the depth of 3 fathoms, and is very dangerous, having on it a round- backed rock called the Wash-ball, dry at low water, and distant k »"•« from the island. There are only a few feet of water much farther out. In a]>proaching this reef from the northward, the soundings give little warning, but an excellent leading mark, namely, Treen Bluff, just open to the northward of Saddle Island, and bearing S. 70° W., just clears it in 4 fathoms. The lead affords the only guide for clearing it to the eastward, where it may be safely approached to the depth of fathoms with care. Island show- JOE. Poiuts, is the ana in, within to a very nar- lile long, with ich is seldom trithiu at low en Mullegash ard, aiiordiug tt with insnffl- stranger may i outer part of oald keep well d), with Cape agoucbe Bay, irrow channel e foot deep at ps of consider- pal settlement )li8hmeut, and ^e 2 miles from hey anchor off tre suffered to ay, is one mile 3nds from the ig h mile, e by shoals at id one mile to on it a round- distant li mile ih farther out. ngs give little (luff, just open ■.,ju8t clears it aring it to the h of fathoms WALLACE HARBOR. 203 Wallace Harbor is the finest on this coast, excepting Pictou, hav- ing 16 feet over its bar at low water in ordinary springtides, which rise 8 feet, so that it is capable of admitting vessels of large draft. Its en- trance, 2i miles SW. of Oak Island, and between two sandy spits, named Palmer and Caulfield Points, is nearly 400 yards wide and car- ries 6^ fathoms water ; but the approach to this entrance, over the bar and throagh the bay for a distance of 3 miles, is by a crooked channel, which, although nowhere less than 300 yards wide, is difficult without the aid of buoys or sufficient leading marks. The services of the pilots of the place will, therefore, always be necessary to insure safety. Wallace stands on the southern shore, 1^ miles within the entrance of the harbor. The land rises gradually in the rear to the summit of a ridge extending to the eastward, and attaining the elevation of 400 feet. Opposite Wallace the river is more than ^ mile broad, whilst the chan- nel between the flats is only 60 or 70 yards wide, and with 5 or 6 fath- oms water. At the distance of 2 miles higher up the river is divided into two branches, both of which are rendered narrow and intricate by oyster beds in the channel. Wallace, under the name of Bamsheg, was formerly visited annually by many more vessels than at present, the supply of lumber being then much greater ; at present only a few cargoes are embarked and two or three vessels built there every year. There are no fisheries of consequence in a commercial point of view ; the salmon and gasperenx, or alewives, still visit the river, but in diminished numbers, and a few codfish are caught off Oak Island and the neighboring coast in the months of May and June. There is the same difficulty in obtaining a large supply of fresh water at Wallace as at Pugwash ; it is obtained from wells and springs, .vhich boats can only approach at high water. The United States is represented by nn agent. Ship Channel.— Oak Island Bar is of sand, and extends from Oak Island nearly 2J miles to the southward towards Gravois Point, which maybe recognized by its being the highest part of the clay and sandstone cliffs, and by its bearing and distance from the east end of Oak Island, namely, S. *-'8o E. 3 miles. Within or to the westward of the bar the whole bay is shallow, excepting the Ship or Wallace Channel leading to Wallace Harbor. The outer or eastern side of this bar may be safely approached by the lead tift- (fhe depth of 4 fathoms. The Ship Channel is fully 600 ^l^ds wide at its entrance, between the south point of the bar and the snal which stretches out 800 yards from Gravois Point, and 3i fathoms i»it at low water. Froitf the en- trance the channel runs to the northwam and westw^ml, curving round Horton Shoal, and between it and the shallow water to the northward, which is continuous from the bar to Mullin Point. The Horton Spit, of low sand, inclosing a marsh, extending to the northward from Horton Point, will easily be recognized by a vessel entering the Ship Channel. The northern end of thisspit isquite bold, Wmfll M»» 204 CAPE ST. GEORGE TO MIRAMICHI BAY. the cbauiiel passiug close to it, aud tbence westward ^ of a mile, to the entrance of the harbor. Directions. — Approaching from the northward pass Oak Island at a distance of fully ^ mile, or in 5 fathoms water, to avoid the reef ofif its east point. Approaching from the eastward, Treen Bluff (the cliffy point 2^ miles to the eastward of Gravois Point) must be passed at an equal distance or depth to avoid the Treen Reef, which is sandstone, and stretches out ^ mile from the bluff to the 3-fathom line of soundings; the north extremes of Saddle Island and Cape John in one, bearing S. 87° E., lead to the northward of it in 4 fathoms. In either case, ap- proach the shore about i mile to the eastward of Gravois Point, taking care not to bring the east end of Oak Island to bear less to the west- ward than N. 34^ W., until the south side of Saddle Island is only one degree open to the northward of Treen Bluff, bearing N. 82° B. Steer now S. 82° W., taking all possible care to keep the island «8 nearly as possible one degree open,* but remembering that the lead must be principally depended upon to guide the vessel along the edge of the shallow water off the mainland, in SJ or 3 fathoms at low water, or a corresponding depth at other times of tide, until Smith Point (the east- ern extreme of the mainland outside or to the northward of Oak Island), appears through the middle of the opening in the trees of Oak Island, and over the low and narrow neck which joins the southwestern part to the rest of the island, aud bearing N. 31° W. Then alter course to N. 66° W., and a run of J mile will place the vessel within, or to the west- ward of the south point of the bar, in about 16 feet at low water. Let the course be now immadiately changed to N. 22° W. for another i mile, aud when Palmer Poinii: opens out to the northward of the Hor- ton Spit, bearing west, steer N. 70° W., and the water will soon deepen to 4 and 5 fathoms with mud bottom, affording tolerably safe anchor- age under shelter of the bar, on which the sea breaks in heavy weather. But, if it be wished to proceed to the harbor, let the NW. course be continued for ^ mile, and Gauiaeld Point will open out to the northward of the Horton Spit ; aud, immediately afterwards. Smith Point will open out to the westward of the west extreme of the trees ou Oak Is- land, when the vessel must be kept gradually away to the westward, and towards Palmer Point, so as to run along the northern edge of Horton Shoal, which can generally be seen until off the Horton Spit at the dis- tance of 200 yards, whence the course is S. 79° W. for f mile to the harbor's mouth. In entering the harbor keep two-thirds Oi t^ e way over towards the northern, or Palmer Point, which is quite bold, to avoid the shoal water extending 100 yards from Caulfleld Point. •This mark is given as only better than none, for it is not easy to keep the island ao nearly one degree open as is required. If the island and bluff be brought to touch, the vessel will be ashore on Gravois Reef, aud if they be opened to the extent of 2 degrees only, she will be on the south point of the bar. a mile, to the 3ak Island at he reef ofif its iflf (the cliffy I passed at an is sandstone, of soundings; le, bearing S. ther case, ap- point, taking i to the west- iid is only one 82° E. the island «8 that the lead ag the edge of ow water, or a oint (the east- f Oak Island), )f Oak Island, estern part to r coarse to N. )r to the west- V water. y. for another fd of the Hor- II soon deepen ly safe anohor- leavy weather. IW. course be the northward th Point will es on Oak Is- westward, and dge of Horton }pit at the dis- ' f mile to the )r towards the the shoal water to keep the island brought to touch, o the extent of 2 FOX HARBOR — PUGWA8H ROAD. 205 Anchorage — Anchor about 500 yards within the entrance, where the channel is 300 yards wide, and carries from 3 to 6 fathoms, with mud bottom. On either side, flats of stiff red clay, dry at low water, extend to the shore, and render the lauding difficult when the tide is out. At the distance of 1,200 yards within the entrance a middle ground commences, and diminishes the breadth of the channel to 100 yards. Nearly abreast the eastern end of this middle ground there is a narrow channel through the flats and up Lazy Bay, which runs in more than a mile to the SE., and has, on the southern shore near its head, cliffs of gypsum 30 feet high. Tides. — The rate of the tidal streams is greatest in the entrance of the harbor, and there it does not exceed IJ knots during the summer months ; whilst outside, in the Ship Channel, it is usually from l^ to one knot. The ebb, however, may be somewhat stronger m spring alter the melting of the winter's snows. Fox Harbor runs in 3 or 4 miles to the NVV., with a channel through flats of tenacious red clay and weeds, which are nearly dry at low water. There are 3 or 4 fathoms water in this channel, but a depth of 8 or 9 feet is all that can be carried over the bar at low water in ordinary spring tides. Oak Island is low, for the most part wooded, and about a mile long, having Jerry Island, small and wooded, a long ^ mile to the westward of it. and on the north side of Fox Bay, just within Mackenzie Point. The Coast from Mackenzie Point to Pugwash Point is unbroken, and for the most part composed of clay and sandstone cliffs, of the height of 50 feet, from which the land rises to the summit of a ridge 150 feet high. Mackenzie Point is separated from Oak Island by sandbars and a gully for boats nearly dry when the tide is out. Pugwash Road, in the entrance of Pugwash Bay, affords excellent anchorage, in from 16 to 19 feet at low water, with sand and clay bot- tom, being sheltered by Phillip Bar and Lewis Reef from westerly, and by Pugwash Reef from easterly winds. This anchorage is exposed be- tween N. NW. and N. NB., but the shallow water outside prevents any Hca from coming in sufficient to endanger a vessel daring the summer mouths. Directions. — To run for Pugwash Road from the northward, the vessel being in not less than 5 fathoms water, bring the English church- steeple at Pugwash so as to be seen over and only just within the west extreme of the low cliff of Fishing Point (the east point of the bay) bearing 8. 35° E. Run towards those marks, taking care not to open out the church in the least to the westward of the point until Bergeman Point (the south point of entrance of the river Phillip) bears 8. 34° W., or until the depth decreases to 3J fathoms at low water. The vessel will then be close off the NW. end of the Pugwash Reef, and must steer south for f mile, wheii she will be in from 16 to 19 feet at low water, with clay bottom. 206 CAPE ST. GEORGE TO MIBAMICIII BAT. Anchorage. — Directly in the line joining Bergeman and Pugwash Points, and with Fishing Point N. 85° E., distant nearly J mile. This is the best anchorage ; but vessels may lie J mile farther in to the south- ward, or close off the bar, in 14 feet at low water. Still farther in the bay is all shoal, excepting the narrow channel, which curves round its eastern side and leads to the harbor. To run for Pugwash Road from the eastward, the vessel being in more than the low-water depth of 5 fathoms, bring Bergeman Point to bear 8. 34° W., and steer for it until the church opens out to the westward of Fishing Point, when immediately alter course to south and, having ran nearly J mile, anchor in the same berth as before directed. Pugwash Harbor, at the head of the bay and entrance of the river of the same name, is small but quite secure, and has more than sufficient depth of water for any vessel that can pass the bar, on which the depth is 14 feet at low water, in ordinary spring tides. The bar is about i mile within the entrance of the bay, and a crooked channel, from 100 to 200 yards wide, and through flats of sand and weeds, for the dis- tance of one mile, leads from it to the harbor's mouth. No directions would avail for this channel, and the assistance of one of the able pilots of the place is indispensable, and will be readily obtained in answer to the usual signal. The town of Pugwash, with its wharves and small wooden English church, stands on the east side of the entrance of the harbor. Imme- diately within there is a fine little land-locked basin, with a depth of nearly 7 fathoms, in which vessels lie moored in security, to take in cargoes of lumber that are brought down the river. Pugwash River, immediately within the harbor, expands into a small lake, 1 J miles long and one mile wide. On the western side the narrow channel of Lime Creek leads to quarries of limestone, unfit for building, but which supply Prince Edward Island as well as the neigh- boring country with lime. The river continues navigable for small vessels about 2 miles above the lake, and for boats to a distance of 7 miles from its entrance. Water. — There is no good watering place at Pugwash, the supply from wells, or from springs which are frequently dry in summer, being too limited for the wants of a ship of war. Tides. — The rate of the tidal streams, which is greatest in the en- trance of the harbor, do3s not exceed 2 knots, unless it may be the ebb in the spring after the melting of the winter's snows ; in Pugwash Road it seldom exceeds a knot. Phillip River enters the sea immediately to the southward of Lewis Head, and between the latter and Bergeman Point. Its mouth is f mile wide, but a dangerous bar of sand and stones stretches across it, 80 as to leave only a narrow and tortuous channel of 8 feet at low water, through which the new vessels, built up the river and brought down light, are taken with difficulty on their way to Pugwash, where they PU0WA8H HARBOR — BAY VERTE. 207 and Pugwash T ^ mile. This Q to the south- farther in the irves round its . being in more Point to bear the westward h and, having Bcted. ce of the river than sufficient tiich the depth >ar is about ^ inel, from 100 3, for the dis- No directions the able pilots d in answer to )oden English arbor. Imme- ith a depth of ty, to take in xpands into a estern side the (tone, un&t for 1 as the ncigh- bble for small a distance of 7 sh, the supply summer, being test in the en- lay be the ebb ?ugwash Road ward of Lewis [ts mouth is |[ <;hes acrosM it, t at low water, brought down ih, where they take iu their cargoes, and where also the lumber r ^ produce brought down this river are taken to be shipiied. Within t , bar a depth of 12 feet at low water can be carried ui) the river to the distance of 5 miles, and there are in some places 4 and 5 fathoms ; the chuuiiel, between flats of mud and weeds, being, in some parts, not more than 40 or 50 yards wide. Boats can easily ascend about 9 miles, at which distaijce the tide ends, and there is a slight rapid. Pugwash Reef extends ^ mile to the westward from Pugwash Point, and dries out about half that distance. There are rocky patches, with 11 and 12 feet water, i^ mile off the point to the northward; and others farther to the eastward, a full mile out from the shore ; moreover, there is uneven rocky ground, with a less depth than 4 fathoms, 2 miles off shore, and which renders it unsafe for a stranger in a vessel of large draft to go within the depth of 5 fathoms. Lewis Reef extends NE. 2^ miles from Lewis Head; its outer part is composed of detached rocky patches, on which there are from 14 to 18 feet water, with a greater depth between them; but the inner part is shallow. Bay Verte is 9 miles wide across its entance, from Indian Point iu New Brunswick to Cold Spring Head in Nova Scotia, but contracts to the breadth of 2J miles near its head. It is 11 miles deep, and sep- arates the two provinces w hich have just l>een named, their boundary continuing across the isthmus from the head of Bay Verte to Cumber- land Basin, a distance of about 11 miles. This isthmus connecting Nova Scotia with the rest of North America is low and affords an ad- vantageous level for the construction of a ship railroad being built from Amherst to Tignish. There are thriving settlements on either side of Bay Verte, and espe- cially at its head, where extensive tracts of meadow land have been formed by diking out the tide. The River Tignish is the most considerable stream in Bay Verte, which it enters on the south side, near its head. It has only 3 feet depth of water, in a very narrow channel, when the tide is out; and it is approached by a narrow channel, carrying 3 to 7 feet, through flats of mud and weeds, which dry out a mile from its mouth. The spring tides rise 9 feet, and the neap tides 5 feet. Spear Shoal, having a patch of rock with 10 feet least water near its east end, and from 15 to 18 feet in other parts, is a bank of sand and stones, resting on sandstone, about a mile long, in an east and west direction, and ^ mile broad. From the shoalest part Cape Spear bears N. 56° W. 15 miles, and Indian Point N. 2° W. 24 miles. The lead gives little warning in approaching this dangerous shoal from the eastward, on which side there are from 3f to 4J fathoms close-to; but vessels will avoid it by coming into no less water than 4J fathoms, as they pass to the southward of it. 208 CAPE ST. GEORGE TO MIRAMICHI BAY. Heart Shoal, lying about a raile westward of the Spear Shoal, and S. 14° W. 1:^ miles from Cape Spear, has 9 feet least water and 15 feet between it and the shore ; but it lies within the S-fathoms line of sound- ings. Laurent Shoal, of rock and sand, with 10 feet least wiiter, is about ^ mile long by half that breadth. From the shoalesit part Cape St. Laurent bears N. 57° VV. 2iJ miles, Ephraim Island N. 70^ W., Indian Point N. 40° E., and Cold Spring Head 8. 5° W.. This shoal is also bold on the east side, where there are 4^ fathoms close to. Aggermore Rock, with 18 feet least water, an«l boiring N. 28° H. 2f miles from Cold Spring head, is, like the Laurent Shoal, merely om> of the shallowest points of an extensive rocky bank, which is thinly cov- ereiis water till they ar- rive off Cold Spring Head, where at the distance of about l.V miles from the shore they will find the water deepen to 8 or 9, and even nearly to 19 fathoms, as they pass to the southward of the banks and shoals which have been described. After passing Cold Spring ileaa about 3 miles the depth of water dt ! aases to less than 5 fathoms, and con- tinues to shoal gradually, with mad and sand bottom, to the head of the bay. The Boss Spit, which extends ij mile from the south shore be- tween Boss and Jackson Points, and 3^ miles to the NW. from Cold Spring Head, is dangerous, as it dries out to its edge, and is so steep-to that there are 17 feet water close to its outer point. Vessels should be careful not to go into less water than 3J fathoms until they are past this sand spit. Farther up the bay there is nothing in the way, excepting two patches of stone with 3 and 5 feet water at the distance of J and J mile northward of Tignish Head. Tormentine Reefs are also extremely dangerous, and are rendered doubly 80 by the strong tides. They extend off Indian Point rather more than 3 miles to the eastward, and there is rocky ground with 4 fathoms fully a mile farther off shore. The part of these reefs which dries at low water is very small, and bears N. 85° E. 2^ miles from In- dian Point It lies about 309 yards to the southward of the line join- ing Cape Spear and the south side of Ephraim Island, and the whole of that island open to the southward of Cape St. Laurent will lead more than a mile to the southward of it. The only sufficient guides, therefore, are the lead and the chart. Caution.— Vessels running through Northumberland Straifat night or at any time without a commanding breeze should not approach this )ear Shoal, and er and 15 feet IS line of sound- wiiter, is abont part Cape St. 70O W., Indian in Hlioal iH also to. iiig N. 280 H. 2f , niorely one of h is tliiiilj' cov- ape St. Lanreut a deep cliaunel At low water in riinuiiijj be- )etweeii the lat- Hliore. I keep the Nova iter till they ar- about 1 .V miles and even nearly nks and shoals g ileaa about 3 jhoins, and cou- , to the head of I south shore be- NW. from Cold rid is so steep- to jssels should be ley are past this way, excepting bance of J and J lid are rendered iiU Point rather { ground with 4 lese reefs which f miles from In- »f the line join- , and the whole uirent will lead ufficient guides, I Strait'at night >t approach this BAY VERTE JOURIMAIN SHOALS. m reef from any direction between north and east nearer than 9 fathom- water, for the tlood tide sets over it to the southward, in the Bay Verte, at the rate of 3 knots, causing a great rippling over the part that dries, and generally indicating its position. Nearly midway between the dry part of the reef and Indian Point there is a patch of rocks with 7 feet at low water. Small craft carry a depth of 2^ fathoms at low tide through between that and Indian Point, and ofteu take shelter under the latter in northerly winds ; but large vessels wishing to do the same must run around outside the whole of the reef, and will And the soundings in the chart a sufficient guide. Directions.— To run through the 2^ fathom channel between Indian Point and dry part of the Tormentiue Keefs bring Indian Point and Cape Spear in one, bearing SVV., and run towards them until the east extreme of Cape Tormentiue touches the west side of the outer Jouri- main Island, bearing NW.; then alter course and run to the 8E., with thfe last named marks on astern, until the water deepens to 5 fathoms at low tide, when the vessel will be to the southward of the reefs. Cape Tormentine is a name sometimes api)]ied to the whole and sometimes to different points of the great headland which forms the eastern extremity of New Brunswick within the gulf, and which sepa- rates Bay Verte from the rest of Northumberland Strait. But it is here restricted to the comparatively high central point, to which the inhab- itants also seem to confine it ; and again, in conformity with their usage, as well as for precision of description, the names of Indian Point and Cape Jourimain have been adopted for the southern and northern extremities of this promeutory. Jourimain Shoals are extremely dangerous to vessels running at night without their leads goiug ; they commence at Peacock Cove, off which there is a patch of 3^ fathoms at 2 miles off shore. They extend from Cape Jourimain I J miles to the NVV., and there is a patch of 4 fathoms 1^ miles north from the same point. They are of sandstone, thinly covered with sand, and their SB. point, a narrow ridge with only 6 feet at low water and distant IJ miles from the shore, is the most dangerous, because the boldest part of the shoals. It should not be approached nearer than the depth of 9 fathoms in the night time, but farther westward the shoals may be ueared with proper caution to 6 fathoms at low water. Anchorage.— To the southward of the Jourimain Shoals, and between them and the Tormentine Reefs, there is good anchorage, with westerly winds, in from 5 to 6 fathoms, the bottom being of sand, with clay underneath. Little and Great Shemogue Risers are only fit for boats and very small vessels, having narrow and intricate channels over shifting bars of sand. Anchorage.— There is good anchorage, in 5 or 6 fathoms sandy bot- tom, oft" these rivers, in the bay between Cape Bald and Cape Bruin. 5314 14 210 CAPE 8T. OEORGE TO MIRAMICIII BAY. Cape Fillet Church, situated 1^ miles south westward of Cape Bald, and bearing S. 58° E.,di8tant lllj miles from Cnssi^s Point Lighthouse, has a square tower, and is a conspicuous marlc from seaward. Kouchibouguet and Abouchagan Rivers, in the sandy bay be- tween (Jai)e Bald and Bouleaux Point, and «i miles eastward of Shediac, are small, and can oidy be entered by boats at high water. Off Bouleaux Point a reef extends more than a mile from the shore; but Cape Bald, which is of sandstone cliff, 40 feot high and 11 miles eastward of Shediac Island, is bold, and may safely be approached by the lead to the depth of 5 fathoms. Shediac Bay.— Shediac Point is a low sandstone cliff, nearly 4 miles to the southward of Cocagne. The Grandigue Bank, with from l4 to 18 feet water, extends off it to the distance of ti miles, having the least water near its outer edge. Thin extensive rocky bank is dangerous to vessels of large draft, which, however, will pass outside it if they do not approach the shore nearer than the depth of 5 fathoms at low water. Anchorage. — There is good anchorage under Cassias Point, in north and northwest winds, in 17 or 18 feet, mud.bottom. Medea Rock. —The Medea Hock is very small, with feet least water. There are 3 and 4 fathonis water around it at the distance of 200 yards, excepting to the southward, in which direction there are several rocky patches, with 12 feet water, between it and the shore, which is distant from it nearly 1^ miles. The can buoy on Medea Rock is colored red and black in horizontal bands, and may be left on either hand in entering. The Zephyr Rock is also very small, with 9 feet least water,'and lies rather more than a mile west of the Medea Rock. The can buoy on Zephyr Rock is colored red and black in horizontal bands, and may be left on either hand in entering. The marks used for clearing Medea and Zephyr Rocks are the leading lights and beacons on Shediac Island and on the railway wharf, Point du Chf'ue, which lead in 13 feet least water to the railway wharf. Grandigue Church, in Une with north extreme of Shediac Island, bear- ing N. 54° W., leads westward of Zephyr and Medea Rocks. Shediac Harbor is the easiest of access and egress on this part of the coast, being the only one which a vessel in distress can safely ran for, as a harbor of refuge. It is superior to Buctoucbe and Cocagne, in the depth of water over the bar, and it is also much more extensive within than the latter ; the space in which shipping may be moored, in from 12 to 17 feet at low water, being % mile long, and \ mile wide. The harbor is unsafe with the northeasterly gales of autumn, in- stances having occurred when all vessels, whether at anchor or moored to the wharf, were driven on shore ; but, except on these rare occa- sions, it is a safe harbor. The wharf at Point du Chene has been enlarged by the addition of another pier, making with the old pier a safe dock, and from the latter of Capu Bald, t Li^ht-house, rani. aiuly bay be- nl of Shediac, r. 0111 the Hhoro ; iind 11 miles .pprouched by nearly 4 miles ith from 1 4 to iviii^; the least dangerous to 1 it if tlioy do s at low water. Point, in north set least water. e of 200 yards, I several rocky hich is distant k in horizontal water, 'and lies ^ in horizontal are the leading ,y wharf, Point railway wharf. c Island, bear- >cks. on this part of can safely ran e and Cocagne, more extensive f be moored, in mile wide, of autumn, in- chor or moored lese rare occa- the addition of from the latter EsaaBMbaiiym flllEDIAC — DIRECTIONS. 211 a wharf has been extended eastward, alongside which vessels must dis- charge their ballast. Shediac Village (locally known as The Cape), is situated on the south- western shore of Shediac Bay. The village contains four churches, the most conspicuous from seaward being the Episcopal and Koinan Catholic, which are surmounted by spires and stan